MCCB Contents 2011 1000503461 Catalog
557431-Attachment 557431-Attachment 557431-Attachment 782113 Batch5 unilog cesco-content
182741-Attachment 182741-Attachment 182741-Attachment 786685 Batch5 unilog cesco-content
2016-10-06
: Pdf 1000503461-Catalog 1000503461-Catalog B5 unilog
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 239 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
Product Guide 2011
Series C and
Special Application
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
© 2011 Eaton Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Canada
Pub No. PG01200001K
October 2011
Eaton is a registered trademark
of Eaton Corporation.
All trademarks are property of their
respective owners.
Product Guide 2011 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efficient and safe
power is available when it’s needed most. With unparalleled
knowledge of electrical power management across industries,
experts at Eaton deliver customized, integrated solutions to solve
our customers’ most critical challenges.
Our focus is on delivering the right solution for the application.
But, decision makers demand more than just innovative products.
They turn to Eaton for an unwavering commitment to personal
support that makes customer success a top priority.
For more information, visit www.eaton.com.
Eaton Corporation
1111 Superior Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44114
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
Canadian Operations
5050 Mainway
Burlington, ON L7L 5Z1
Canada
1-800-268-3578
EatonCanada.ca
MCCB 2011 Cover Spread.indd 1 9/20/11 10:38:17 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Description Catalogue Section
Page No. Page No.
Product Line Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
. . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Product Line Description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
. . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Standards and Certifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
. . . . . . . . . .
1.2
Quick Reference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
. . . . . . . . . .
1.3
15 – 100 Amperes
. . . . . . . (G-Frame)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
. . . . . . . . . .
G-1
10 – 225 Amperes
. . . . . . . (F-Frame)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
. . . . . . . . . .
F-1
70 – 250 Amperes
. . . . . . . (J-Frame)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
. . . . . . . . . .
J-1
70 – 400 Amperes
. . . . . . . (K-Frame)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
. . . . . . . . . .
K-1
125 – 600 Amperes
. . . . . . . (L-Frame)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
. . . . . . . . . .
L-1
300 - 800 Amperes
. . . . . . . (MDL-Frame)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
. . . . . . . . . .
M-1
400 – 1200 Amperes
. . . . . . (N-Frame)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
. . . . . . . . . .
N-1
800 – 2500 Amperes
. . . . . . (R-Frame)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
. . . . . . . . . .
R-1
Motor Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
. . . . . . . . . .
MCP-1
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101. . . . . . . . . . MPCB-1
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
. . . . . . . . . .
ELCB-1
Internal Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
. . . . . . . . . .
INTA-1
External Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
. . . . . . . . . .
EXTA-1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
. . . . . . . . . .
DIM-1
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
. . . . . . . . . .
CLCP-1
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
. . . . . . . . . .
EGCB-1
Direct Current Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
. . . . . . . . . .
DCCB-1
E
2
Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
. . . . . . . . . .
E2MB-1
Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
. . . . . . . . . .
CMCB-1
Add-On Ground Fault Protection
. . . . . . .(GFR)
. . . . . . . . . .236
. . . . . . . . . .
GFR-1
Moulded Case Circuit Breaker Family
MCCB Contents 2011 Page 1 Saturday, September 17, 2011 12:34 PM
2 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Product Line Overview
Product Line Description
Eaton’s Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
are designed to provide circuit protection
for low voltage distribution systems. They
are described by NEMA as, “a device for
closing and interrupting a circuit between
separable contacts under both normal and
abnormal conditions,” and furthermore as,
“a breaker assembled as an integral unit
in a supporting and enclosing housing of
insulating material.” The NEC describes
them as, “A device designed to open and
close a circuit by non-automatic means,
and to open the circuit automatically on a
predetermined overload of current,
without injury to itself when properly
applied within its rating.”
So designed, Eaton circuit breakers
protect conductors against overloads and
conductors and connected apparatus,
such as motors and motor starters,
against short circuits.
In low voltage distribution systems, there
are many varied applications of moulded
case circuit breakers. Eaton offers the
most comprehensive family of moulded
case circuit breakers in the industry.
This section of circuit breakers includes:
●
Thermal Magnetic Trip Breakers
●
Electronic rms Trip Breakers
●
Moulded Case Switches
●
Motor Circuit Protectors
●
Current Limiting Breakers
●
Special Application Breakers
Modified Breakers
Eaton breakers can be ordered with
internal accessories installed. These
modified breakers will be subject to an
additional charge.
Special Calibration
Special non-CSA/UL-listed calibrations
are available for certain ambient
temperatures other than 40°C and for
frequencies other than 50/60 Hz or DC.
Reduced interrupting ratings will apply
for 400 Hz applications. Please refer to
Eaton’s Consulting Application Guide,
(CA08104001E) pages 28.2 - 16 for
details.
50°C Calibration
Add suffix
V
to Catalogue Number for
complete breaker, when ordering listed
ampere ratings for breakers to be used in
50°C ambients.
Moisture-Fungus Treatment
All circuit breaker cases are moulded
from glass-polyester which does not
support the growth of fungus. Any parts
which are susceptible to the growth of
fungus will require special treatment.
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers
The circuit breakers may be ordered with
freeze testing. This option uses special
lubrication and mechanical operation is
verified at -40°C.
Marine Applications
F- to R-Frame circuit breakers can be
supplied to meet the following marine
specifications:
●
U.S. Coast Guard CFR 46 ABS —
American Bureau of Shipping
IEEE 45; DNV; Lloyds; and ABS/NVR
These specifications generally require
moulded case circuit breakers to be
supplied with special nameplating, and
plug-in adapter kits. When plug-in adapter
kits are used, no terminals need be
supplied.
Circuit breakers can also be supplied to
meet UL489 Supplement SA (Marine
Use) and UL489 Supplement SB (Naval
Use).
UL489 Supplement SA applies to vessels
over 65 feet (19.8 m) in length.
Requirements include 40°C ambient
calibration, special labeling, and no use of
aluminum conductors or terminals.
Or you can choose to add 50ºC ambient
but then there is no “UL” mark.
UL 489 Supplement SB requires partial
50ºC ambient calibration, vibration
testings, special nameplating and no use
of aluminum conductors or terminals.
Eaton chooses to always fully calibrate to
50ºC ambient. (“Naval” labelled per UL
and UL now allows 50°C label here).
Certified Test Reports
Eaton breakers can be ordered with
certified test reports at the time of order
entry for an additional charge. Test report
documents the thermal and magnetic or
electronic tripping characteristics of the
individual breaker. Breaker and test
reports must be ordered together.
Add suffix 12 to breaker catalogue
number and enter separate line item on
order for certified test report.
Standards and Certifications
Moulded case circuit breakers are
designed to conform with the following
standards:
●
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
Standard UL489, Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures
●
National Electrical Manufacturers
Association Standards Publication No.
AB1-1993, Moulded Case Circuit
Breakers
●
Australian Standard AS 2184, Moulded
Case Circuit Breakers
●
British Standards Institution Standard
BS 4752: Part 1, Switchgear and
Control Gear Part 1: Circuit Breakers
●
Canadian Standards Association
Standard C22.2 No. 5, Moulded Case
Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker
Enclosures.
●
International Electrotechnical
Commission Recommendations
IEC 60947-2, Circuit Breakers
●
Japanese T-Mark Standard Moulded
Case Circuit Breakers
●
South African Bureau of Standards,
Standard SABS 156, Standard
Specification for Moulded Case Circuit
Breakers
●
Swiss Electro-Technical Association
Standard SEV 157-1, Safety
Regulations for Circuit Breakers
●
Union Technique de l’Electricite
Standard NF C 63-120, Low Voltage
Switchgear and Control Gear Circuit
Breaker Requirements
●
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker
(Association of German Electrical
Engineers) Standard VDE 0660, Low
Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear,
Circuit Breakers
Conformance with these standards
satisfies most local and international
codes, assuming user acceptability and
simplified application.
Moulded case circuit breakers equal or
exceed Federal Specification
Classification W-C-375b requirements for
the particular class associated with the
circuit breaker frame being considered.
Open breakers do not have service
entrance ratings. Service entrance rating
is part of the enclosure.
Suffix
H01
400 Hz
Suffix
V
50°C Calibration
Suffix
J01
Fungus Treated
Suffix
F01
Freeze Tested
Suffix
H08
“Marine”
Suffix
VH08
“Marine” with 50ºC ambient calibration
Suffix
VH09
“Naval” with 50ºC ambient calibration
Circuit breaker manufactured with this option will be supplied without the CSA/UL certification label.
MCCB Contents 2011 Page 2 Saturday, September 17, 2011 12:34 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Product Line Overview
Quick Reference
Industrial Circuit Breakers
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250V DC.
CSA listed only. Not UL listed.
UL listed only. Not CSA listed.
Current limiting.
The 175A 200A and 225A 2, 3 and 4 pole FDB breakers are CSA listed only, not UL listed.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Cont.
Amp.
Rating
@ 40°C
No.
Poles
Volts
Type
of
Trip
CSA/UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
Section
Page
NumberAC DC
AC Ratings Volts DC
120 120/240 240 277 347
480Y/
277 480
600Y/
347 600 125 250 125/250
G-Frame
GHQ 15 – 30 1 277 — N.I.T. — — — 14 — — — — — — — —
G-3
HGHB 15 – 30 1 277 125 N.I.T. — — — 14 — — — — — 14 — —
G-3
GHB
GHB
15 – 100
15 – 100
1
2, 3
277
480Y/277
125
125/250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65
—
—
—
—
65
14
—
—
—
—
14
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
—
—
—
—
14
G-3
G-3
GBH
➂
GBH
➂
15 – 100
15 – 100
1
2, 3
347
600Y/347
125
125/250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65
—
—
—
—
65
14
—
10
—
—
14
—
—
—
10
—
—
14
—
—
—
—
14
G-3
G-3
HGHC 15 – 30 1 277 125 N.I.T. — — — 14 — — — — — 14 — —
G-4
GHC
GHC
15 – 100
15 – 100
1
2, 3
277
480Y/277
125
125/250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65
—
—
—
—
65
14
—
—
—
—
14
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
—
—
—
—
14
G-4,5
G-4,5
GCH
➂
GCH
➂
15 – 100
15 – 100
1
2, 3
347
600Y/347
125
125/250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
65
—
—
—
—
65
14
—
10
—
—
14
—
—
—
10
—
—
14
—
—
—
—
14
G-4
G-4
GD
GD
15 – 50
15 – 100
2
3
480
480
125/250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
65
65
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
22
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
—
G-2
G-2
GHBGFEP
➃
GHCGFEP
➃
15 – 60
15 – 60
1
1
277
277
—
—
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
14
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
G-6
G-6
F-Frame
ED
EDH
EDC
100 – 225
100 – 225
100 – 225
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
240
240
240
125
125
125
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
65
100
200
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
10
—
—
—
—
—
—
F-4
F-4
F-4
EHD
EHD
15 – 100
15 – 100
1
2, 3
277
480
125
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
18
14
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
—
—
—
—
10
—
—
10
—
—
F-4
F-4
FDB
➂
FDB
FDB
15 – 150
15 – 225
15 – 225
1
2, 3
4
347
600
600
125
250
250
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
18
18
—
—
—
14
—
—
—
—
—
—
14
14
—
—
—
—
14
14
10
—
—
—
10
10
—
—
—
F-4
F-4
F-4
FD
FD
FD
FDE
15 – 150
15 – 225
15 – 225
15 – 225
1
2, 3
4
3
347
600
600
600
125
250
250
—
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
65
65
65
35
—
—
—
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
35
35
35
—
—
—
—
—
18
18
18
10
—
—
—
—
10
10
—
—
—
—
—
F-4
F-4
F-4
F-5
HFD
HFD
HFD
HFDE
15 – 30
15 – 225
15 – 225
15 – 225
1
2,3
4
3
347
600
600
600
125
250
250
—
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
100
100
100
65
—
—
—
25
➂
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
65
65
65
—
—
—
—
—
25
25
25
10
—
—
—
—
22
22
—
—
—
—
—
F-5
F-5
F-5
F-5
FDC
FDC
FDC
FDCE
15 – 30
15 – 225
15 – 225
15 – 225
1
2, 3
4
3
347
600
600
600
125
250
250
—
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
200
200
200
—
—
—
—
30
➂
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
100
100
100
—
—
—
—
—
35
35
25
10
➂
—
—
—
—
22
22
—
—
—
—
—
F-5
F-5
F-5
F-5
MCCB Contents 2011 Page 3 Saturday, September 17, 2011 12:34 PM
4 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Product Line Overview
Industrial Circuit Breakers
(Continued)
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250V DC.
Current limiting.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Cont.
Amp.
Rating
@ 40°C
No.
Poles
Volts Type
of
Trip
CSA/UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
Section
Page
NumberAC DC
AC Ratings Volts DC
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250
J-Frame
JD
HJD
JDC
➂
70 – 250
70 – 250
70 – 250
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
65
100
200
—
—
—
35
65
100
18
25
35
—
—
—
10
22
22
—
—
—
J-3
J-3
J-3
K-Frame
DK 250 – 400 2, 3 240 250 I.T. — — 65 — — — — 10 —
K-6
KD
CKD
HKD
CHKD
KDC
➂
100 – 400
100 – 400
100 – 400
100 – 400
100 – 400
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
65
65
100
100
200
—
—
—
—
—
35
35
65
65
100
25
25
35
35
65
—
—
—
—
—
10
10
22
22
22
—
—
—
—
—
K-4,5,9,10
K-7,11,12
K-4,5,9,10
K7,11,12
K-4,5,9,10
L-Frame
LD
CLD
HLD
CHLD
LDC
➂
CLDC
➂
300 – 600
300 – 600
300 – 600
300 – 600
300 – 600
300 – 600
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
600
600
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
65
65
100
100
200
200
—
—
—
—
—
—
35
35
65
65
100
100
25
25
35
35
50
50
—
—
—
—
—
—
22
22
25
25
25
25
—
—
—
—
—
—
L-4,5,7
L-5,9
L-4,5,7
L-5,9
L-4,5,8
L-5,10
MDL-Frame
MDL
CMDL
HMDL
CHMDL
300 – 800
300 – 800
300 – 800
300 – 800
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
600
600
600
600
250
250
250
250
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
65
65
100
100
—
—
—
—
50
50
65
65
25
25
35
35
—
—
—
—
22
22
25
25
—
—
—
—
M-4,5
M-5
M-4,5
M-5
N-Frame
ND
CND
HND
CHND
NDC
CNDC
600 – 1200
600 – 1200
600 – 1200
600 – 1200
600 – 1200
600 – 1200
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
600
600
600
—
—
—
—
—
—
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
65
65
100
100
200
200
—
—
—
—
—
—
50
50
65
65
100
100
25
25
35
35
65
65
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
N-4,10
N-7,11
N-5,10
N-8,11
N-6,10
N-9,11
MCCB Contents 2011 Page 4 Saturday, September 17, 2011 12:34 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Product Line Overview
Industrial Circuit Breakers (Continued)
N.I.T. is non-interchangeable trip unit and I.T. is interchangeable trip unit.
Two-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of three-pole circuit breaker at 250V DC.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Cont.
Amp
Rating
@ 40°C
No.
Poles
Volts Type
of
Trip
CSA/UL Listed Interrupting Ratings rms Symmetrical Amperes (kA)
Section
Page
NumberAC DC
AC Ratings Volts DC
120 120/240 240 277 480 600 125 250 125/250
R-Frame
RD 1600
CRD 1600
RD 2000
CRD 2000
RD 2500
RDC 1600
CRDC 1600
RDC 2000
CRDC 2000
RDC 2500
800 – 1600
800 – 1600
1000 – 2000
1000 – 2000
1000 – 2500
800 – 1600
800 – 1600
1000 – 2000
1000 – 2000
1000 – 2500
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
N.I.T.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
125
125
125
125
125
200
200
200
200
200
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
65
65
65
65
65
100
100
100
100
100
50
50
50
50
50
65
65
65
65
65
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
R-4,7,9,11,13,15
R-6,8,10,12,14,16
R-4,7,9,11,13,15
R-6,8,10,12,14,16
R-4,7,9,11,13,15
R-5,7,9,11,13,15
R-6,8,10,12,14,16
R-5,7,9,11,13,15
R-6,8,10,12,14,16
R-5,7,9,11,13,15
HMCP Motor Circuit Protectors MCP-1
Current Limit R Current Limiting Circuit Breakers — Non-Fused Type
FCL 15 – 100 2, 3 480 — N.I.T. — — 200 — 150 — — — — CLCP-1
LCL 125 – 400 2, 3 600 — N.I.T. — — 200 — 200 100 — — — CLCP-2
Tri-Pac Current Limiting Circuit Breakers — Fused Type
FB 15 – 100 2, 3 600 250 N.I.T. — — 200 — 200 200 — — 100 CLCP-4
LA 70 – 400 2, 3 600 250 I.T. — — 200 — 200 200 — — 100 CLCP-5
NB 300 – 800 2, 3 600 250 I.T. — — 200 — 200 200 — — 100 CLCP-7
PB 600 – 1600 2, 3 600 250 I.T. — — 200 — 200 200 — — 100 CLCP-9
MCCB Contents 2011 Page 5 Saturday, September 17, 2011 12:34 PM
6
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes G-Frame
Series C Moulded Case Cir-
cuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes
Series C Moulded Case Cir-
cuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes
Series C Moulded Case Cir-
cuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes
Series C Moulded Case Cir-
cuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes
Series C Moulded Case Cir-
cuit Breakers
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
120 240 277 480
125/
250
➁
250
➀➁
GD 2
3
–
–
65
65
–
–
14
22
10
–
–
10
G-2
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
120 240 277 347 480Y/277 600Y/347 125 125/250
➀➁
GHQ 1 – – 14 – – – – – G-3
HGHB 1 – – 25 – – – 14 – G-3
GHB 1
2, 3
65
–
–
65
14
–
–
–
–
14
–
–
14
➂
–
–
14
G-3
G-3
GBH
➃
1
2, 3
65
–
–
65
14
–
10
–
–
14
–
10
14
➂
–
–
14
G-3
G-3
HGHC 1 – – 25 – – – 14 – G-4
GHC 1
2, 3
65
–
–
65
14
–
–
–
–
14
–
–
14
➂
–
–
14
G-4
G-4
GCH
➃
1
2, 3
65
–
–
65
14
–
10
–
–
14
–
10
14
➂
–
–
14
G-4
G-4
GHBGFEP
➄
1 ––14––––– G-6
GHCGFEP
➄
1 ––14––––– G-6
Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Two poles in series for 250 VDC application.
Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.
15 through 70A breakers only.
CSA listed only, Not UL listed.
UL listed only, not CSA listed.
Not CSA and UL listed sizes.
Product Description
●
All two- and three-pole circuit breakers
are of the common trip type. On all 3-
phase Delta (240V) Grounded B phase
applications, refer to Eaton.
●
Single-pole circuit breakers, 15 and 20
amperes. Switching duty rated (SWD)
for fluorescent lighting applications.
●
All G-frame circuit breakers are
suitable for reverse feed use.
●
HACR rated.
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding
catalogue numbers. It is not to be used to build catalogue
numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalogue Number
GD 3 100
Circuit
Breaker Type
GD
GHB
GBH
GHC
GCH
GHQ
HGHB
HGHC
Number of
poles
1: 1 Pole
2: 2 Pole
3: 3 Pole
Trip
Amperes
15
20
24
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
Suffix
K: Moulded Case Switch
V: 50°C
F01: Freeze Tested
J01: Fungus Protected
R01: Shock Tested
Terminal Types
Circuit
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal
Type
Material
Screw
Head
Type
Wire
Type
AWG
Wire
Range
Metric Wire
Range (mm
2
)
Standard
15-20
25-100
Clamp (Plated Steel)
Pressure (Aluminum Body)
Slotted
Slotted
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
#14-10
#10-1/0
2.5-4
4-50
Optional - GD Only
15-100 Pressure (Steel Body) Slotted Cu #14 - #3 –
Terminal Torque Values
AWG Wire
Range
Torque
Value bl-in
Torque
Value N.m.
#14-#10
#8
#6-#4
#3-1/0
20
40
45
45
2.26
4.52
5.09
5.09
G Frame Page 6 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes G-Frame
Two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Two poles in series for 250 VDC application.
Time constant is 8 milliseconds minimum.
Includes line and load steel terminals.
Includes binding head screws.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C102
Type GD Moulded Case Switches
Note:
Moulded Case Switches may open above 1300A
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Catalogue Number (Includes Line and Load Terminals)
3-Pole
60
100
GD3060K
GD3100K
60
GD3060KC
➂
60
100
GD3060KD
➃
GD3100KD
➃
Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit
Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units
Type GD Circuit Breaker
Standards and Certifications
■
UL/CSA.
Product Description
■
Cable in, cable out.
■
Includes mounting hardware and
BMHE.
Product Selection
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C102
Type GD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip-Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC @ 480 Vac
10 kAIC @ 125/250 Vdc
➁
22 kAIC @ 480 Vac
10 kAIC @ 250 Vdc
➀➁
Catalogue Number
(Includes Line and Load Terminals)
Catalogue Number
(Includes binding head screws
and clamps 10-32 x .312)
2-Pole 3-Pole 3-Pole
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
GD2015
GD2020
GD2025
GD2030
GD2035
GD2040
GD2045
GD2050
-
-
-
-
-
GD3015
GD3020
GD3025
GD3030
GD3035
GD3040
GD3045
GD3050
GD3060
GD3070
GD3080
GD3090
GD3100
GD3015D
GD3020D
GD3025D
GD3030D
GD3035D
GD3040D
GD3045D
GD3050D
GD3060D
GD3070D
GD3080D
GD3090D
GD3100D
G Frame Page 7 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:43 PM
8
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes G-Frame
Type GHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum
➀
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
➁
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
GHB1015
➂
GHB1020
➂
GHB1025
GHB1030
GHB1035
GHB1040
GHB1045
GHB1050
GHB1060
GHB1070
GHB1080
GHB1090
GHB1100
GHB2015
➂
GHB2020
➂
GHB2025
GHB2030
GHB2035
GHB2040
GHB2045
GHB2050
GHB2060
GHB2070
GHB2080
GHB2090
GHB2100
GHB3015
➂
GHB3020
➂
GHB3025
GHB3030
GHB3035
GHB3040
GHB3045
GHB3050
GHB3060
GHB3070
GHB3080
GHB3090
GHB3100
Typical GBH
Type GBH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
347 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum
➀
600Y/347 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
600Y/347 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
➁
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
GBH1015
➂
GBH1020
➂
GBH1025
GBH1030
GBH1035
GBH1040
GBH1045
GBH1050
GBH1060
GBH1070
GBH1080
GBH1090
GBH1100
GBH2015
➂
GBH2020
➂
GBH2025
GBH2030
GBH2035
GBH2040
GBH2045
GBH2050
GBH2060
GBH2070
GBH2080
GBH2090
GBH2100
GBH3015
➂
GBH3020
➂
GBH3025
GBH3030
GBH3035
GBH3040
GBH3045
GBH3050
GBH3060
GBH3070
GBH3080
GBH3090
GBH3100
15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.
Use (2) outside poles. Two poles in series for 250VDC application.
Uses .190-32 screw type clamp terminals.
480Y/277V, circuit breakers (Type GHB) not suitable for 3-phase Delta (480V).
600Y/347V, circuit breakers (Type GBH) not suitable for 3-phase Delta (600V). CSA listed only. Not UL listed
Types GHB, GBH, GHQ and HGHB
Bolt-On Panelboard Circuit
Breakers
Type GHB, 277 and 480Y/277V
Type GBH, 347 and 600Y/347V
Type GHQ, 277V
Type HGHB, 277V
Instruction Leaflet Number 15547.
Type GHQ Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
277V AC Maximum 14 KAIC, No DC Rating (HID & SWD)
1-Pole
Catalogue Number
15
20
GHQ1015
GHQ1020
Type HGHB Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
277V AC Maximum, 125V DC Maximum
1-Pole
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
HGHB1015
HGHB1020
HGHB1025
HGHB1030
G Frame Page 8 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes G-Frame
Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum
➀
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
➁
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
GHC1015
➂
GHC1020
➂
GHC1025
GHC1030
GHC1035
GHC1040
GHC1045
GHC1050
GHC1060
GHC1070
GHC1080
GHC1090
GHC1100
GHC2015
➂
GHC2020
➂
GHC2025
GHC2030
GHC2035
GHC2040
GHC2045
GHC2050
GHC2060
GHC2070
GHC2080
GHC2090
GHC2100
GHC3015
➂
GHC3020
➂
GHC3025
GHC3030
GHC3035
GHC3040
GHC3045
GHC3050
GHC3060
GHC3070
GHC3080
GHC3090
GHC3100
Types GHC, GCH and HGCH Circuit
Breakers
Type CHC, 277 and 480Y/277V
Type GCH, 347 and 600Y/347V
Type HGHC, 277V
Typical GCH
Type GCH Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
347 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum
➀
600Y/347 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
600Y/347 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
➁
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
GCH1015
➂
GCH1020
➂
GCH1025
GCH1030
GCH1035
GCH1040
GCH1045
GCH1050
GCH1060
GCH1070
GCH1080
GCH1090
GCH1100
GCH2015
➂
GCH2020
➂
GCH2025
GCH2030
GCH2035
GCH2040
GCH2045
GCH2050
GCH2060
GCH2070
GCH2080
GCH2090
GCH2100
GCH3015
➂
GCH3020
➂
GCH3025
GCH3030
GCH3035
GCH3040
GCH3045
GCH3050
GCH3060
GCH3070
GCH3080
GCH3090
GCH3100
15 through 70 ampere circuit breakers only.
Use (2) outside poles. Two poles in series for 250VDC application.
Uses .190-32 screw type clamp terminals.
480Y/277V, circuit breakers (Type GHC) not suitable for 3-phase Delta (480V).
600Y/347V, circuit breakers (Type GCH) not suitable for 3-phase Delta (600V). CSA listed only. Not UL listed.
Type HGHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
277V AC Maximum, 125V DC Maximum
1-Pole
Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
HGHC1015
HGHC1020
HGHC1025
HGHC1030
Instruction Leaflet Number 15548.
G Frame Page 9 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:43 PM
10 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes G-Frame
Type GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip
Units
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
277 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
480Y/277 Vac Maximum,
125/250 Vdc Maximum
➀
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
100
GHC1025D
GHC1030D
GHC1035D
GHC1040D
GHC1045D
GHC1050D
GHC1055D
GHC1060D
GHC1070D
GHC1080D
GHC1090D
GHC1100D
GHC2025D
GHC2030D
GHC2035D
GHC2040D
GHC2045D
GHC2050D
GHC2055D
GHC2060D
GHC2070D
GHC2080D
GHC2090D
GHC2100D
GHC3025D
GHC3030D
GHC3035D
GHC3040D
GHC3045D
GHC3050D
GHC3055D
GHC3060D
GHC3070D
GHC3080D
GHC3090D
GHC3100D
Instruction Leaflet Number 15548
Special Purpose GHC Circuit Breakers
This is Type GHC circuit breaker with binding head screw-type terminals on line and load
side. This circuit breaker with screw-type terminals (.190-32) will be marked “Special
purpose breaker not for general use.” To order this special breaker, use the catalogue
number below.
Type GHB and GHC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-interchangeable Trip Units for HID Lighting Applications
Type
Continuous
Ampere Rating@ 40°C
277 Vac Maximum
1-Pole
Catalogue Number
Cable-In 15
20
GHC1015HID
GHC1020HID
Bolt-On 15
20
GHB1015HID
GHB1020HID
Instruction Leaflet Number 15547 for Bolt-On type; 15548 for Cable-In type.
Use (2) outside poles. Two pole in series for 250VDC application.
G Frame Page 10 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes G-Frame
Types GHBGFEP Bolt-on Panelboard 30mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors
15-60 Amperes, 277 Volt AC, 50/60 Hz
Type GHBGFEP Bolt-on Panelboard
30mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit
Protectors with Non-Interchangeable
Trip Units
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@40
o
C
One Phase (Requires 2 Poles)
277 Vac, 30mA
Catalogue Number
15
20
30
40
50
60
GHBGFEP1015
GHBGFEP1020
GHBGFEP1030
GHBGFEP1040
GHBGFEP1050
GHBGFEP1060
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity
(Symmetrical Amperes)
277 Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)
GHBGFEP 1 14,000
These circuit breakers meet the
requirements of UL489 and UL1053.
Operational voltage 240V to 305V.
Single Phase (Requires 2 Poles Spaces)
Types GHCGFEP Cable In/Cable Out 30mA Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors
15-60 Amperes, 277 Volt AC, 50/60 Hz
Type GHCGFEP Cable In/Cable Out 30mA
Industrial Ground Fault Circuit Protectors
with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@40
o
C
One Phase (Requires 2 Poles)
277 Vac, 30mA
Catalogue Number
15
20
30
40
50
60
GHCGFEP1015
GHCGFEP1020
GHCGFEP1030
GHCGFEP1040
GHCGFEP1050
GHCGFEP1060
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity
(Symmetrical Amperes)
277 Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)
GHCGFEP 1 14,000
These circuit breakers meet the
requirements of UL489 and
UL 1053.
Operational voltage 240V to 305V.
Single Phase (Requires 2 Poles Spaces)
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C193
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C193
G Frame Page 11 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:43 PM
12 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
G-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
15-100 Amperes G-Frame
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)
Breaker Type
Number of Poles
123
GHB/GBH/GHC/GCH 1.0
(.454)
1.5
(.680)
2.25
(1.021)
GHBGFEP – 1.2
(.545)
–
GHCGFEP – 1.1
(.499)
–
GHB/GBH Carton Quantity
24 12 8
16
(7.264)
16
(7.264)
16
(7.264)
GHC/GCH Carton Quantity
24 12 8
18
(8.172)
18
(8.172)
18
(8.172)
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions, Inches (mm)
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
1 1.0
(25.33)
4.88
(123.95)
2.81
(71.41)
2 2.0
(50.78)
4.88
(123.95)
2.81
(71.41)
3 3.0
(76)
4.88
(123.95)
2.81
(71.41)
Accessories
Internal
Alarm Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-2
Alarm Switch and Auxiliary
Switch Combination . . . . . . . . INTA-2
Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-5
Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-10
Undervoltage Release
Mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-16
External
Control Wire Terminal Kit . . . . . . . EXTA-3
Multiwire Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-4
Base Mounting Hardware. . . . . . . . EXTA-5
Base Mounting Plate . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-9
DIN Rail Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-9
Key Operated Attachment . . . . . . . EXTA-9
Lock Dog (non-padlockable) . . . . . . EXTA-10
Padlockable Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-10
Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-21
G Frame Page 12 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
10-225 Amperes F-Frame
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings (P1)
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
➀
220, 240 380, 415 440 500 125 250
➁➂
ED
EDH
EDC
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
200
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10
10
10
–
–
–
F-4
F-4
F-4
FDB
2, 3, 4 18 14 14 14 – 10 F-4
FD
1
2, 3, 4
25
65
–
35
–
35
–
18
10
–
–
10
F-4
F-4
HFD
1
2, 3, 4
65
100
–
65
–
65
–
25
10
–
–
22
F-5
F-5
FDC
2, 3, 4 200 100 100 35 – 22 F-5
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
➀
240 277 347 480 600 125 250
➁➂
ED
EDH
EDC
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
200
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10
10
10
–
–
–
F-4
F-4
F-4
EHD
1
2, 3
–
18
14
–
–
–
–
14
–
–
10
–
–
10
F-4
F-4
FDB
1
2, 3, 4
–
18
–
–
14
➃
–
–
14
–
14
10
➃
–
–
10
F-4
F-4
FD
1
2, 3, 4
–
65
35
–
18
–
–
35
–
18
10
–
–
10
F-4
F-4
FDE
3 65– – 3518– – F-5
HFD
1
2, 3, 4
–
100
65
–
25
➃
–
–
65
–
25
10
–
–
22
F-5
F-5
HFDE
3 100 – – 65 25 – – F-5
FDC
1
2, 3, 4
–
200
–
–
30
➃
– 100 35
10
➃
–22
F-5
F-5
FDCE
3 200 – – 100 25 – – F-5
Dc ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits.
2-pole circuit breaker, or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
CSA listed only. Not UL listed.
Electronic Circuit Breakers available in 3-pole only.
Current limiting.
Typical F-Frame Breaker
Product Description
■
All F-frame circuit breakers are HACR
rated.
■
All circuit breakers 10 through 30
amperes are suitable for HID (high
intensity discharge) use. 480 VAC
max.
■
All F-frame circuit breakers are
suitable for reverse feed use.
Digitrip Electronic Trip Units
Circuit Breaker Type Frame Ratings
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
225 100, 110, 125, 150, 160, 175, 200, 225
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
160 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125, 150, 160
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
80 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80
F-Frame Breaker with Electronic Trip Unit
F-Frame 2011 Page 13 Monday, September 19, 2011 9:30 PM
14 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F-Frame Digitrip Specifications
Trip unit has selectable Ir Settings.
Z.S.I. (Zone Selective Interlock) is optional. Must order with ZSI. Standard 310+ does not
come with ZSI.
Occurs with Short Delay Time adjustment set at INST setting.
Trip Unit
Type
Digitrip
RMS 310+
rms Sensing Yes
Breaker Type
Frame FDE, HFDE, FDCE
Ampere Range 15 – 225 A
Interrupting Rating at 600 V 18, 25, 25 (kA)
Protection
Ordering Options LS
LSG
LSI
LSIG
Fixed Rated Plug (In) No No
Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable Rating Plug (In)NoNo
Long Delay Pickup Setting (Ir) 40 – 100% Frame
➀
40 – 100% Frame
➀
Long Delay Time I
2
t2 – 24 Seconds 2 – 24 Seconds
Long Delay Time I
4
t No No
Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes
High Load Alarm Yes Yes
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short Delay Pickup Setting 2 – 8, 10, 12 x (Ir) 2 – 8, 10, 12 x (Ir)
Short Delay Time I
2
tYes No
Short Delay Time Flat No Inst – 300 ms
Short Delay Time Z.S.I. No Yes
➁
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous Pickup Setting No 2 – 8, 10, 12 x (Ir)
➂
Discriminator No No
Instantaneous Override Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground Fault Alarm No No
Ground Fault Pickup 20 – 100% Frame 20 – 100% Frame
Ground Fault Delay I
2
t No No
Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst – 300 ms Inst – 300 ms
Ground Fault Z.S.I. No Yes
➁
Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Cause of Trip LEDs No No
Magnitude of Trip Information No No
Remote Signal Contacts No No
System Monitoring
Digital Display No No
Current No No
Voltage No No
Power and Energy No No
Power Quality Harmonics No No
Power Factor No No
Communications
PowerNet No No
Testing
Testing Method Test Kit (MTST120V/ MTST230V) Test Kit (MTST120V/ MTST230V)
In= Frame Rating (80/160/225)
Ir= LDPU Setting
F-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
10-225 Amperes F-Frame
F-Frame 2011 Page 14 Monday, September 19, 2011 9:30 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)
Breaker Type
Number of Poles
1234
ED, EDH, EDC
–3
(1.361)
4.5
(2.041)
–
EHD, FDB, FD, HFD, FDC
2
(.907)
3
(1.361)
4.5
(2.041)
6
(2.721)
FDE, HFDE, FDCE
– – 4.5
(2.041)
–
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions, Inches (mm)
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
1 1.375
(35)
6
(152)
3.375
(86)
2 2.75
(70)
6
(152)
3.375
(86)
3 4.125
(105)
6
(152)
3.375
(86)
4 5.5
(140)
6
(152)
3.375
(86)
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding Catalogue numbers. It is not to be used to build Catalogue numbers for
circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker Catalogue Number
FDC 3 100 L
Circuit
Breaker
Type
EHD
FDB
FD
HFD
FDC
Number
of Poles
1: 1 Pole
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
4: 4 Poles
Trip Amperes
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
Suffix
E:100% Protected (4-Pole only) Neutral Pole
EH: 50% Protected (4-Pole only)
K:High Magnetic Moulded Case Switch
L:Line and Load Terminals
S:VISA breaker
V:50˚C Calibration
W:Without Terminals
Y:Line Terminals Only
Z:Aluminum Terminals
SK: VISA - High Magnetic Moulded Case Switch
Number of
Poles
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
Circuit
Breaker
Type
ED
EDH
EDC
Trip
Amperes
100
125
150
175
200
225
EDC 3 200 L
Suffix
L: Line and Load Terminals
S: VISA breaker
W: Without Terminals
Y: Line Terminals Only
Z: Aluminum Terminals
Circuit
Breaker
Type
FDE
HFDE
FDCE
Number
of Poles
3: 3 Poles
Trip
Amperes
80
160
225
Suffix
W: Without
Terminals
L: Line and
Load
Terminals
–: Load
Terminals
Only
Trip Unit
33: LS
32: LSI
35: LSG
36: LSIG
FDE 3 225 32 ZG W
Suffix
ZG: Zone
Selective
Interlocking
–
: Without ZSI
F-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
10-225 Amperes F-Frame
“VISA” option is available. CSA listed only.
F-Frame 2011 Page 15 Monday, September 19, 2011 9:30 PM
16 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
10-225 Amperes F-Frame
Type FDB and FD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
347 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
347 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC @ 347 Vac 14 kAIC @ 600 Vac 18 kAIC @ 347 Vac 18 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Type FDB
➁
Type FD
➁
1-Pole
➂
2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Catalogue Number (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
–
FDB1015
➀
FDB1020
➀
FDB1025
FDB1030
FDB1035
FDB1040
FDB1045
FDB1050
FDB1060
FDB1070
FDB1080
FDB1090
FDB1100
FDB1110
FDB1125
FDB1150
–
–
–
–
FDB2015
FDB2020
FDB2025
FDB2030
FDB2035
FDB2040
FDB2045
FDB2050
FDB2060
FDB2070
FDB2080
FDB2090
FDB2100
FDB2110
FDB2125
FDB2150
FDB2175
➂
FDB2200
➂
FDB2225
➂
–
FDB3015
FDB3020
FDB3025
FDB3030
FDB3035
FDB3040
FDB3045
FDB3050
FDB3060
FDB3070
FDB3080
FDB3090
FDB3100
FDB3110
FDB3125
FDB3150
FDB3175
➂
FDB3200
➂
FDB3225
➂
–
FDB4015
FDB4020
FDB4025
FDB4030
FDB4035
FDB4040
FDB4045
FDB4050
FDB4060
FDB4070
FDB4080
FDB4090
FDB4100
FDB4110
FDB4125
FDB4150
FDB4175
➂
FDB4200
➂
FDB4225
➂
–
FD1015
➀
FD1020
➀
FD1025
FD1030
FD1035
FD1040
FD1045
FD1050
FD1060
FD1070
FD1080
FD1090
FD1100
FD1110
FD1125
FD1150
–
–
–
–
FD2015
FD2020
FD2025
FD2030
FD2035
FD2040
FD2045
FD2050
FD2060
FD2070
FD2080
FD2090
FD2100
FD2110
FD2125
FD2150
FD2175
FD2200
FD2225
–
FD3015
FD3020
FD3025
FD3030
FD3035
FD3040
FD3045
FD3050
FD3060
FD3070
FD3080
FD3090
FD3100
FD3110
FD3125
FD3150
FD3175
FD3200
FD3225
–
FD4015
FD4020
FD4025
FD4030
FD4035
FD4040
FD4045
FD4050
FD4060
FD4070
FD4080
FD4090
FD4100
FD4110
FD4125
FD4150
FD4175
FD4200
FD4225
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C101
CSA and UL listed for SWD applications.
When a “VISA” type breaker is required, add suffix ‘S’ to circuit breaker catalogue number, i.e., FD3150S. Available for 1-,2-,3-pole breakers.
CSA listed only. Not UL listed.
Product Selection
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C101
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C101
Types ED, EDH, and EDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers
with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
240 Vac Maximum, 125 Vdc
65 kAIC @ 240 Vac 100 kAIC @ 240 Vac 200 kAIC @ 240 Vac
Type ED
➁
Type EDH
➁
Type EDC Current
Limiting
➁
2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
100
125
150
175
200
225
ED2100
ED2125
ED2150
ED2175
ED2200
ED2225
ED3100
ED3125
ED3150
ED3175
ED3200
ED3225
EDH2100
EDH2125
EDH2150
EDH2175
EDH2200
EDH2225
EDH3100
EDH3125
EDH3150
EDH3175
EDH3200
EDH3225
EDC2100
EDC2125
EDC2150
EDC2175
EDC2200
EDC2225
EDC3100
EDC3125
EDC3150
EDC3175
EDC3200
EDC3225
Type EHD Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with
Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
277 Vac Maximum, 125
Vdc 480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
14 kAIC @ 277 Vac 14 kAIC @ 480 Vac
Type EHD
➁
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
–
EHD1015
➀
EHD1020
➀
EHD1025
EHD1030
EHD1035
EHD1040
EHD1045
EHD1050
EHD1060
EHD1070
EHD1080
EHD1090
EHD1100
–
EHD2015
EHD2020
EHD2025
EHD2030
EHD2035
EHD2040
EHD2045
EHD2050
EHD2060
EHD2070
EHD2080
EHD2090
EHD2100
–
EHD3015
EHD3020
EHD3025
EHD3030
EHD3035
EHD3040
EHD3045
EHD3050
EHD3060
EHD3070
EHD3080
EHD3090
EHD3100
F-Frame 2011 Page 16 Monday, September 19, 2011 9:30 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
17
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
10-225 Amperes F-Frame
Types HFD and FDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
347 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
347 Vac Maximum,
125 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
25 kAIC @ 347 Vac 25 kAIC @ 600Vac 30 kAIC @ 347 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Type HFD
➂
Type FDC
➂
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Catalogue Number (Includes Terminals on Load End Only)
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
175
200
225
HFD1015
➀➁
HFD1020
➀➁
HFD1025
➁
HFD1030
➁
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
HFD2015
HFD2020
HFD2025
HFD2030
HFD2035
HFD2040
HFD2045
HFD2050
HFD2060
HFD2070
HFD2080
HFD2090
HFD2100
HFD2110
HFD2125
HFD2150
HFD2175
HFD2200
HFD2225
HFD3015
HFD3020
HFD3025
HFD3030
HFD3035
HFD3040
HFD3045
HFD3050
HFD3060
HFD3070
HFD3080
HFD3090
HFD3100
HFD3110
HFD3125
HFD3150
HFD3175
HFD3200
HFD3225
HFD4015
HFD4020
HFD4025
HFD4030
HFD4035
HFD4040
HFD4045
HFD4050
HFD4060
HFD4070
HFD4080
HFD4090
HFD4100
HFD4110
HFD4125
HFD4150
HFD4175
HFD4200
HFD4225
FDC1015
➀➁
FDC1020
➀➁
FDC1025
➁
FDC1030
➁
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
FDC2015
FDC2020
FDC2025
FDC2030
FDC2035
FDC2040
FDC2045
FDC2050
FDC2060
FDC2070
FDC2080
FDC2090
FDC2100
FDC2110
FDC2125
FDC2150
FDC2175
FDC2200
FDC2225
FDC3015
FDC3020
FDC3025
FDC3030
FDC3035
FDC3040
FDC3045
FDC3050
FDC3060
FDC3070
FDC3080
FDC3090
FDC3100
FDC3110
FDC3125
FDC3150
FDC3175
FDC3200
FDC3225
FDC4015
FDC4020
FDC4025
FDC4030
FDC4035
FDC4040
FDC4045
FDC4050
FDC4060
FDC4070
FDC4080
FDC4090
FDC4100
FDC4110
FDC4125
FDC4150
FDC4175
FDC4200
FDC4225
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C101
CSA and UL listed for SWD applications.
1-pole circuit breaker interrupting ratings @ 347 Vac are listed with CSA only. Not UL listed.
When a “VISA” type breaker is required, add suffix ‘S’ to circuit breaker catalogue number, i.e., HFD2020S. Available for 1-,2-,3-Pole breakers except 2-,3-Pole only for type FDC breaker.
Required for ground fault measurement in 3 phase 4 wires system with phase to neutral load. Not supplied with the breaker, must be ordered separately.
FDE, HFDE, FDCE Electronic Circuit Breakers with optional Zone Selective Interlocking function.
Types FDE, HFDE and FDCE Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
Neutral
➃
CT for LSG
and LSIG
LS LSI LSI w/ZSI
LSG LSIG LSIG w/ZSI
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
IC Rating 18 kAIC at 600 Vac
80
160
225
CTF080
CTF160
CTF225
FDE308033
FDE316033
FDE322533
FDE308032
FDE316032
FDE322532
FDE308032ZG
FDE316032ZG
FDE322532ZG
FDE308035
FDE316035
FDE322535
FDE308036
FDE316036
FDE322536
FDE308036ZG
FDE316036ZG
FDE322536ZG
IC Rating 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
80
160
225
CTF080
CTF160
CTF225
HFDE308033
HFDE316033
HFDE322533
HFDE308032
HFDE316032
HFDE322532
HFDE308032ZG
HFDE316032ZG
HFDE322532ZG
HFDE308035
HFDE316035
HFDE322535
HFDE308036
HFDE316036
HFDE322536
HFDE308036ZG
HFDE316036ZG
HFDE322536ZG
IC Rating 25 kAIC at 600 Vac
80
160
225
CTF080
CTF160
CTF225
FDCE308033
FDCE316033
FDCE322533
FDCE308032
FDCE316032
FDCE322532
FDCE308032ZG
FDCE316032ZG
FDCE322532ZG
FDCE308035
FDCE316035
FDCE322535
FDCE308036
FDCE316036
FDCE322536
FDCE308036ZG
FDCE316036ZG
FDCE322536ZG
Breaker Mount Ammeter
Note: Use on FDE, HFDE and FDCE electronic trip only.
Description
Catalogue
Number
Breaker Mount Ammeter and Cause of Trip Display
Remote Mount Ammeter and Cause of Trip Display
DIGIVIEW
DIGIVIEWR06
Ammeter
F-Frame 2011 Page 17 Monday, September 19, 2011 9:30 PM
18 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
10-225 Amperes F-Frame
Note: Note: Moulded Case Switches may open above
1800 amperes.
Moulded Case Switches ➀
Moulded case switches are used as compact switches in
applications requiring high current switching capabilities.
Moulded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type.
Moulded case switches are listed in accordance with CSA C22.2
No. 5 and UL 489 suitable for reverse feed use, and as 100%
rated devices.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
480 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc 600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc
Complete MCS with Load
Side Terminals Only
Complete MCS
with Load Side Terminals Only
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
100
150
225
EHD2100K
–
–
FD2100K
FD2150K
FD2225K
HFD2100K
HFD2150K
HFD2225K
3-Pole
100
150
225
EHD3100K
–
–
FD3100K
FD3150K
FD3225K
HFD3100K
HFD3150K
HFD3225K
4-Pole
100
150
225
–
–
–
FD4100K
FD4150K
FD4225K
HFD4100K
HFD4150K
HFD4225K
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C101
When a “VISA” type MCS is required, change the suffix of the MCS catalogue number from “K” to “SK”. i.e., FD3225SK.
Moulded Case
Switch
Type
Number
of
Poles
Unfused Short Circuit Withstand Rating (Symmetrical
Amperes) (kA)
Volts AC (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
240 480 600 250
EHD 2,3 18 14 – 10
FD 2,3,4 65 25 18 10
HFD 2,3,4 100 65 25 22
F-Frame 2011 Page 18 Monday, September 19, 2011 9:30 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 19
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
10-225 Amperes F-Frame
Assemble wire clamp to bottom of conductor as shown. Insert collar enclosing conductor as shown. Locate nut
on top of conductor and tighten securely with screw
and washer. Caution: Collar must surround conductor.
Insert collar enclosing conductor and centre on
extrusion on collar. Install clip with legs on top of
conductor and snap end around bottom of collar.
Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten
securely with screw and washer.
Collar slides onto conductor and is held in position by a
screw and lock washer.
Assemble collar on top of conductor as shown. Tighten
securely with screw and washer. Terminal shield must
be used with this collar.
Line and Load Terminals
Line and load terminals provide wire
connecting capabilities for specific ranges
of continuous current ratings and wire
types. Except as noted, terminals comply
with Canadian Standard Association
standard C22.2 No. 65 and UL Standard
UL486A and UL486B. Unless otherwise
specified, F-frame circuit breakers are
factory equipped with load terminals only.
Ordering Information
F-frame circuit breakers and moulded
case switches have load terminals only
as standard equipment. When standard
line-end terminals (same as standard
load-end terminals) are required, add
suffix L to the circuit breaker catalogue
number.
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum Breaker
Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range Metric Wire Range mm2
Package of 3 Terminals
Catalogue Number
Standard Pressure Type Terminals
20 (EHD)
100
225
Steel
Steel
Aluminum
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
#14-#10
#14-1/0
#4-4/0
2.5-4
2.5-50
25-95
3T20FB➀
3T100FB
3TA225FD
Optional Pressure Terminals
50
100
150
225
Aluminum
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Aluminum
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
Cu
Cu/AI
#14-#4
#14-1/0
#4-4/0
#6-300 kcmil
2.5-25
2.5-50
25-95
16-150
3TA50FB➀
3TA100FD
3T150FB
3TA225FDK➁
3T20FB 3T100FB, 3T150FB 3TA225FD
3TA50FB 3TA100FD 3TA225FDK
Not for use with ED, EDH, EDC breakers.
Includes terminal shield kit. Adds approximately 3 inches to breaker height. Available for use on 3-pole breaker only.
Not for use on line side of F frame breaker rated 150A or less.
When non-standard or optional line and/
or load terminals are required, order by
style number. Specify if factory
installation is required.
Screw
Wire Clamp
Conductor
Screw
Washer
Collar
Conductor
Nut
Conductor
Extrusion
Clip
Collar
Collar
Screw
Washer
Conductor
Conductor
Collar
Washer
Screw
Note: For 185 mm2 wire, use 3TA225FDK1.
(IEC Application)
F-Frame 2011 Page 19 Monday, September 19, 2011 9:30 PM
20 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
F-8
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
10-225 Amperes F-Frame
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit
breaker.
Reference
Page
1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 3-Pole (FDE, HFDE, FDCE) 4-Pole
Centre Left Right Left Centre Right Left Centre Right Left Centre Right Neu.
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm Lockout Switch (Make Only) INTA-2 ■
Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) INTA-2 ■❏ ❏ ■➁ ■
Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) INTA-2 ■❏ ❏ ■➀➁ ■
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) INTA-5 ■■ ■ ■ ■➂■■
Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) INTA-5 ■■ ■ ■➀ ■ ■
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination INTA-8 ■ ❏ ❏ ■➀➁ ■
Shunt Trip – Standard INTA-11 ■■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Shunt Trip – Low Energy INTA-15 ■■ ■ ■ ■
Undervoltage Release Mechanism INTA-17 ■■ ■ ■➁ ■
External Accessories
End Cap Kit EXTA-2 ●●●●● ●●● ●● ●●
Keeper Nut EXTA-2 ●●
●●●● ●●● ●● ●●
Control Wire Terminal Kit EXTA-3 ●●
●●●● ●●● ●● ●●
Multiwire Connectors EXTA-4 ●●
●●●● ●●● ●● ●●
Base Mounting Hardware EXTA-5 ●●
●●●● ●●● ●● ●●
Terminal Shields EXTA-7 ●●
●●●● ●●● ●● ●●
Terminal End Covers EXTA-8 ●●● ●●●
Interphase Barriers EXTA-8 ●●●●● ●●● ●●●●
Non-Padlockable Handle Block EXTA-10 ■■ ■ ■ ■
Snap-on Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp EXTA-10 ■■ ■ ■ ■
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp EXTA-11 ■❏ ❏ ■ ❏ ❏
Cylinder Lock EXTA-11 ■■
Key Interlock Kit EXTA-12 ■❏ ❏ ■ ❏ ❏
Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●● ● ● ● ●
Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ●●
Electrical (Solenoid)/(Motor) Operator EXTA-14 ●● ● ● ● ● ●● ●●
Plug-in Adapters EXTA-16 ●●●● ● ● ● ● ●● ●●
Rear Connecting Studs EXTA-17 ●●
●●● ● ● ● ● ●● ●●
Panelboard Connecting Straps EXTA-20 ●●
●●● ● ● ● ● ●● ●●
Handle Mechanisms EXTA-21 ●● ● ● ● ●
LFD Current Limiter EXTA-28 ●● ● ● ●
IQ Energy Sentinel EXTA-28 ●●●● ● ● ● ●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special Calibration 1.2 ●●
●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Moisture Fungus Treatment 1.2 ●●
●●● ● ● ● ● ●
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 1.2 ●●
●●● ● ● ●
Marine Application 1.2 ●●
●●● ● ● ● ● ●
■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –
not both
●Accessory available/Modification available
Not for use with Ground Fault styles (LSG, LSIG) Electronic Circuit Breakers and Electronic Circuit Breakers complete with Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) option.
A special interface barrier is required. To be installed by the factory in U.S. or Perth only.
A special 1A/1B auxiliary switch is required. To be installed by the factory in U.S. only.
To specify a 1A/1B auxiliary switch be installed in the Right Pole with pigtail leads exit to same side of the breaker, add suffix ‘A30’ to circuit breaker catalogue number.
To specify a 1A/1B auxiliary switch be installed in the Right Pole with pigtail leads exit to rear of the breaker, add suffix ‘A31’ to circuit breaker catalogue number.
To specify a 1A/1B auxiliary switch be installed in the Right Pole with pigtail leads exit to opposite side of the breaker, add suffix ‘A32’ to circuit breaker catalogue number.
F-Frame 2011 Page 20 Monday, September 19, 2011 9:30 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
21
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
J-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-250 Amperes
J-Frame
Typical J-Frame Circuit Breaker
Product Description
●
All J-frame Circuit Breakers are HACR
rated.
●
J-frame circuit breakers are available
as individual components (Frame, Trip
Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled
complete breakers.
●
J-frame circuit breakers are
suitable for reverse feed use.
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
240 480 600 125 250
➀➁
JD
HJD
JDC
➂
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
65
100
200
35
65
100
18
25
35
–
–
–
10
22
22
J-3
J-3
J-3
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
240 380 415 600 125 250
➀➁
JD
HJD
JDC
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
65
100
200
35
65
100
35
65
100
–
–
–
–
–
–
10
22
22
J-3
J-3
J-3
2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
Current limiting.
J Frame 2011 Page 21 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:22 PM
22 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding Catalogue numbers. It is not to be used to build Catalogue numbers for
circuit breakers or trip units.
JD 3 250 F
Circuit
Breaker/
Frame
Type
JD
HJD
JDC
Number of
Poles
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
4: 4 Poles
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
Rating
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
Suffix
F: Frame Only
KW: High Magnetic Moulded
Case Switch without
terminals
FS: VISA - Frame only
SKW:VISA - High magnetic
Moulded Case Switch
without terminals
JT 3 250 T
Trip Unit Type
JT: Thermal-
Magnetic
Number
of Poles
2
3
4
Trip Unit/Rating Plug
Ampere Rating
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
Suffix
T: Trip Unit
Thermal-Magnetic
Fixed Thermal
Adj. Magnetic
TV: Trip unit with
50°C Calibration
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)
Breaker Type
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
Number of Poles
234234234
JD 11.25
(5.103)
12.5
(5.670)
13.25
(6.010)
9
(4.082)
10
(4.536)
10.5
(4.763)
2
(.907)
2
(.907)
2.25
(1.021)
HJD 11.25
(5.103)
12.5
(5.670)
13.25
(6.010)
9
(4.082)
10
(4.536)
10.5
(4.763)
2
(.907)
2
(.907)
2.25
(1.021)
JDC 12.25
(5.103)
13.5
(6.124)
14.25
(6.470)
10
(4.536)
11
(4.990)
11.5
(5.217)
2
(.907)
2
(.907)
2.25
(1.021)
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions, Inches (mm)
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 4.125
(105)
10
(255)
4.063
(103)
4 5.5
(140)
10
(254)
4.063
(103)
J-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-250 Amperes
J-Frame
Trip Unit Catalogue NumberCircuit Breaker/Frame Catalogue Number
“VISA” option available. CSA listed only.
J Frame 2011 Page 22 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:22 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
23
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
J-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-250 Amperes
J-Frame
Product Selection
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C103 for Breaker; 29C600 for Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit
Types JD, HJD, and JDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
18 kAIC @ 600 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Thermal Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
➅
For Use With: Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
Standard Terminals Only
See Page J-5 for
Optional Terminals
Factory
Assembled
Circuit Breaker
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
➄
Factory
Assembled
Circuit Breaker
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
➄
Factory
Assembled
Circuit Breaker
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
➃
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
JD2070
JD2090
JD2100
JD2125
JD2150
JD2175
JD2200
JD2225
JD2250
JD2250F HJD2070
HJD2090
HJD2100
HJD2125
HJD2150
HJD2175
HJD2200
HJD2225
HJD2250
HJD2250F JDC2070
JDC2090
JDC2100
JDC2125
JDC2150
JDC2175
JDC2200
JDC2225
JDC2250
JDC2250F JT2070T
JT2090T
JT2100T
JT2125T
JT2150T
JT2175T
JT2200T
JT2225T
JT2250T
TA250KB
➀
3-Pole
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
JD3070
JD3090
JD3100
JD3125
JD3150
JD3175
JD3200
JD3225
JD3250
JD3250F HJD3070
HJD3090
HJD3100
HJD3125
HJD3150
HJD3175
HJD3200
HJD3225
HJD3250
HJD3250F JDC3070
JDC3090
JDC3100
JDC3125
JDC3150
JDC3175
JDC3200
JDC3225
JDC3250
JDC3250F JT3070T
JT3090T
JT3100T
JT3125T
JT3150T
JT3175T
JT3200T
JT3225T
JT3250T
TA250KB
➀
4-Pole
➁➂
125
150
175
200
225
250
JD4125
JD4150
JD4175
JD4200
JD4225
JD4250
JD4250F HJD4125
HJD4150
HJD4175
HJD4200
HJD4225
HJD4250
HJD4250F JDC4125
JDC4150
JDC4175
JDC4200
JDC4225
JDC4250
JDC4250F JT3125T
JT3150T
JT3175T
JT3200T
JT3225T
JT3250T
TA250KB
➀
➀
Individually packed.
➁
Fully rated neutral pole with no protection.
➂
Neutral is in right pole.
➃
2-pole circuit breaker supplied in 3-pole frame
➄
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix ‘S’ to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, i.e. JD3250FS. JD and HJD only.
➅
Magnetic trip adjustable 5 - 10 times continuous ampere rating.
J Frame 2011 Page 23 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:22 PM
24 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
J-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-250 Amperes J-Frame
Moulded Case Switches
➁
Moulded case switches are used as compact switches in
applications requiring high current switching capabilities.
Moulded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the high instantaneous automatic
type. Moulded case switches are listed in accordance with
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489, suitable for reverse feed use,
and as 100% rated devices.
Note: Note:
Moulded case switches may open above
2500 amperes.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C103
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Standard Terminals
Only
See page J-5 for
Optional Terminals
Complete MCS Only Without Line and Load
Terminals
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
250
JD2250KW HJD2250KW TA250KB
➀
3-Pole
250
JD3250KW HJD3250KW TA250KB
➀
4-Pole
250
JD4250KW HJD4250KW TA250KB
➀
Moulded
Case
Switch
Type
Number
of
Poles
Unfused Short Circuit Withstand Rating (Symmetrical Amperes)
(kA)
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
240 480 600 250
JD 2,3 65 35 18 10
HJD 2,3 100 65 25 22
Individually packed.
When a “VISA” type Moulded Case Switch is required, change the suffix of the MCS catalogue
number from “KW” to SKW”, i.e. JD3250SKW.
J Frame 2011 Page 24 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:22 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
25
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
J-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-250 Amperes J-Frame
Line and Load Terminals
Line and load terminals provide wire
connecting capabilities for specific ranges
of continuous current ratings and wire
types. All terminals comply with CSA
Standard C22.2 No. 65 and UL Standards
UL486A and UL486B. Unless otherwise
specified, J-frame circuit breaker line and
load terminals are shipped separately for
field installation.
The bottom of the standard TA250KB
terminal contains a recess which is
positioned over the J-frame circuit
breaker terminal conductor.
Ordering Information
J-frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI
terminals as standard. When optional
copper-only terminals are required, order
by Catalogue number. Specify if factory
installation is required.
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
No. Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm
2
Catalogue
Numbers
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
250
250
Aluminum
Stainless Steel
Cu/AI
Cu
#4-350 kcmil
#4-350 kcmil
25-185
25-185
TA250KB
T250KB
T250KB Terminal TA250KB Terminal
Nut
Slotted
Screw
Collar
Collar
Slotted
Screw
J Frame 2011 Page 25 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:22 PM
26 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
J-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-250 Amperes J-Frame
J-Frame Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit
breaker.
Description
Reference
Page
2-, 3-Pole 4-Pole
Left Centre Right Left Centre Right Neu.
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) INTA-3
❏❏❏❏
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) INTA-6
■■■■
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination INTA-8
❏❏❏❏
Shunt Trip – Standard INTA-11
■■■■
Shunt Trip – Low Energy INTA-15
■■■■
Undervoltage Release Mechanism INTA-18
■■■■
External Accessories
End Cap Kit EXTA-2
●●● ●●●●
Plug Nut EXTA-3
●●● ●●●●
Control Wire Terminal Kit EXTA-3
●●● ●●●●
Multiwire Connectors EXTA-4
●●● ●●●●
Base Mounting Hardware EXTA-5
●●● ●●●●
Terminal Shields EXTA-7
●●● ●●●●
Interphase Barriers EXTA-8
●●● ●●●●
Non-Padlockable Handle Block EXTA-10
■■
Padlockable Handle Block EXTA-10
■■
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp EXTA-11
❏❏❏❏
Cylinder Lock EXTA-11
❏❏
Key Interlock Kit EXTA-12
❏❏❏❏
Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13
●●●
Electrical (Solenoid) Operator EXTA-14
●●● ●●●●
Plug-in Adapters EXTA-16
●●● ●●●●
Rear Connecting Studs EXTA-18
●●● ●●●●
Panelboard Connecting Straps EXTA-20
●●● ●●●●
Handle Mechanisms EXTA-21
●●● ●●●●
Handle Extension EXTA-27
●●● ●●●●
IQ Energy Sentinel EXTA-28
●●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special Calibration 1.2
●●● ●●●●
Moisture Fungus Treatment 1.2
●●● ●●●●
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 1.2
●●● ●●●●
Marine/Naval Application 1.2
●●● ●●●●
■
Applicable in indicated pole position
❏
May be mounted on left or right pole –
not both
●
Accessory available/Modification available
J Frame 2011 Page 26 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:22 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
27
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
IEC 157-1 (P1) Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type Number of
Poles
➂
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60Hz) Volts Dc
240 380 415 440 500 600 250
➁
DK
KD
HKD
KDC
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
65
65
100
200
–
40
65
100
–
40
65
100
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
10
10
22
22
K-6
K-4,5,9,10
K-4,5,9,10
K-4,5,9,10
2-pole circuit breaker or two outside poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, DK, KD, HKD, KDC breakers with
electronic trip unit are not DC rated.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds minimum at 22 kA.
Protected neutral pole in 4-pole circuit breaker available only with optional Electronic Trip Units.
Current limiting.
Typical K-Frame Circuit Breaker complete with the
“VISA” option
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number of
Poles
➂
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60Hz) Volts Dc
240 277 480 600 250
➀➁
DK
KD
HKD
2, 3
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
65
65
100
–
–
–
–
35
65
–
25
35
10
10
22
K-6
K-4,5,9,10
K-4,5,9,10
KDC
➃
CKD
CHKD
2, 3, 4
3
3
200
65
100
–
–
–
100
35
65
65
25
35
22
–
–
K-4,5,9,10
K-7,11,12
K-7,11,12
Product Description
●
All K-frame Circuit Breakers are HACR
rated.
●
K-frame circuit breakers are available
as individual components (Frame, Trip
Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled
complete breakers. OPTIM circuit
breakers are available as factory
assembled only.
●
K-frame circuit breakers are
suitable for reverse feed use.
K-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 27 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
28 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
K-Frame Digitrip Specifications
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes
Breaker Type
Frame K K K
Ampere Range 70-400A 70-400A 70-400A
Interrupting Rating at 600 Vac 25, 35, 65 (kA) 25, 35, 65 (kA) 25, 35, 65 (kA)
Protection
Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG
Fixed Rated Plug (I
n
) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable Rating Plug (I
n
) Yes Yes No No
Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
0.4-1.0 x (I
n
) 0.4-1.0 x (I
n
)
Long Delay Time I
2
t 12 Seconds 12 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds
Long Delay Time I
4
t No No 1-5 Seconds 1-5 Seconds
Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
High Load Alarm No No 0.5-1.0 x I
r
0.5-1.0 x I
r
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
) 150-800% x (I
r
) 150-800% x (I
r
)
Short Delay Time I
2
t 100 ms No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes
➃
Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous Pickup No 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
)
Discriminator No No Yes Yes
Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground Fault Alarm No No 20-100% x (I
s
) 20-100% x (I
s
)
Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame
➄
Varies by Frame
➄
20-100% x (I
s
) 20-100% x (I
s
)
Ground Fault Delay I
2
t No No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes
➃
Yes
Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes
Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes
Remote Signal Contact – Ground Alarm Yes
➅
Yes
➅
Yes
➃
➅
Yes
➅
Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional
➆
Included
System Monitoring
Digital Display No No Yes
➁
Yes
➁
Current No No Yes Yes
Power and Energy No No No Yes
Power Quality-Harmonics No No No Yes
Power Factor No No No Yes
Communications
Eaton PowerNet No No Yes
➂
Yes
Testing
Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Eaton PowerNet
I
s
= Sensor Rating
I
n
= Rating Plug
I
r
= Long Delay Pickup Setting
400 ampere frame 1 - 5 x 1g (80A)
250 ampere frame 1 - 5 x 1g (50A)
125 ampere frame 1 - 5 x 1g (25A)
With Separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU).
Must be mounted on left pole.
Adjust by rating plug.
By OPTIMizer/BIM.
Require Eaton PowerNet kit.
Require Zone interlock kit.
Legend:
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
K-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 28 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
29
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions, Inches (mm)
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 5.5
(140)
10.125
(257)
4.063
(103)
4 7.219
(183)
10.125
(257)
4.063
(103)
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)
Breaker
Type
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
➁
Number of Poles
232323
DK 10
(4.536)
11.5
(5.216)
––––
KD 10
(4.536)
11.5
(5.216)
7.5
(3.402)
8.5
(3.856)
1.5
(.680)
1.5
(.680)
HKD 10
(4.536)
11.5
(5.216)
7.5
(3.402)
8.5
(3.856)
1.5
(.680)
1.5
(.680)
KDC 10
(4.536)
11.5
(5.216)
7.5
(3.402)
8.5
(3.856)
1.5
(.680)
1.5
(.680)
Ampere rating available with electronic trip unit only.
Weights shown are for thermal magnetic trip units. 3-pole electronic trip units
weight 2.5 lbs. (1.134 kg).
“VISA” option is available. CSA listed only.
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding Catalogue numbers. It is not to be used to build Catalogue numbers for
circuit breakers or trip units.
Trip Unit Catalogue Number
Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalogue Number
OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalogue Number
KD 3 400 F KT 3 400 T
Circuit
Breaker/
Frame
Type
DK
KD
HKD
KDC
CKD
CHKD
Number of
Poles
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
4: 4 Poles
Circuit
Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
Suffix
E: 50% Protected Neutral
Pole (4-Pole Electronic
Trip Circuit Breaker Only)
F: Frame Only
KW: High Magnetic Moulded
Case Switch without
Terminals
FS: VISA - Frame Only
SKW: VISA - High Magnetic
Moulded Case Switch
without Terminals
Trip Unit Type
KT: Thermal
Magnetic
KES:Electronic
Number
of Poles
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
4: 4 Poles
Trip Unit/
Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
70
➀
90
➀
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
Suffix
LS: Electronic Trip Unit
Adjustable Short Time
Delay with I
2
t Short Delay
Ramp
LSI: Electronic Trip Unit
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Delay
LSG: Electronic Trip Unit
Adjustable Short Time
Pickup with I
2
t Short
Delay and Ground Fault
Protection
LSIG: Electronic Trip Unit
Independently Adjustable
Short Time Pickup and
Delay and Ground Fault
Protection
TV: 50°C Calibration
(Thermal-Magnetic Trip
Units Only)
E: 50% Protected Neutral
Pole (4-Pole Electronic Trip
Unit Only) Terminals Only
T: Trip Unit Only
KD 3 125 T5 7 W
Circuit
Breaker/
Frame
Type
KD
HKD
KDC
CKD
CHKD
Number of
Poles
3: 3 Poles
Circuit
Breaker/
Frame
Ampere
Rating
125
250
400
Trip
Type
2 – LSI
6 – LSIG
7 – LSIA
Suffix
W: Without
Terminals
Trip Model
T5 –
Model 550
T10 –
Model 1050
K-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 29 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
30 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Types KD, HKD, and KDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Thermal Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
For Use With: Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
Standard Terminals Only
See Section Page Number
K-13 for
Optional Terminals
Factory
Assembled
Circuit Breaker
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
➂
Factory
Assembled
Circuit Breaker
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
➂
Factory
Assembled
Circuit Breaker
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
➂
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
➃
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
KD2100
KD2125
KD2150
KD2175
KD2200
KD2225
KD2250
KD2300
KD2350
KD2400
KD2400F HKD2100
HKD2125
HKD2150
HKD2175
HKD2200
HKD2225
HKD2250
HKD2300
HKD2350
HKD2400
HKD2400F KDC2100
KDC2125
KDC2150
KDC2175
KDC2200
KDC2225
KDC2250
KDC2300
KDC2350
KDC2400
KDC2400F KT2100T
KT2125T
KT2150T
KT2175T
KT2200T
KT2225T
KT2250T
KT2300T
KT2350T
KT2400T
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA350K
➀
TA350K
➀
TA350K
➀
2TA400K
➁
3-Pole
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
KD3100
KD3125
KD3150
KD3175
KD3200
KD3225
KD3250
KD3300
KD3350
KD3400
KD3400F HKD3100
HKD3125
HKD3150
HKD3175
HKD3200
HKD3225
HKD3250
HKD3300
HKD3350
HKD3400
HKD3400F KDC3100
KDC3125
KDC3150
KDC3175
KDC3200
KDC3225
KDC3250
KDC3300
KDC3350
KDC3400
KDC3400F KT3100T
KT3125T
KT3150T
KT3175T
KT3200T
KT3225T
KT3250T
KT3300T
KT3350T
KT3400T
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA350K
➀
TA350K
➀
TA350K
➀
3TA400K
➁
4-Pole
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
KD4100
KD4125
KD4150
KD4175
KD4200
KD4225
KD4250
KD4300
KD4350
KD4400
KD4400F HKD4100
HKD4125
HKD4150
HKD4175
HKD4200
HKD4225
HKD4250
HKD4300
HKD4350
HKD4400
HKD4400F KDC4100
KDC4125
KDC4150
KDC4175
KDC4200
KDC4225
KDC4250
KDC4300
KDC4350
KDC4400
KDC4400F KT3100T
KT3125T
KT3150T
KT3175T
KT3200T
KT3225T
KT3250T
KT3300T
KT3350T
KT3400T
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA300K
➀
TA350K
➀
TA350K
➀
TA350K
➀
4TA400K
➁
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C104 for Breaker; 29C603 for Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit
Individually packed.
2TA400K, 3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number.
2-pole circuit breaker supplied in 3-pole frame.
Product Selection
K-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 30 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
31
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Types KD, HKD, and KDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
➀
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only
➁
Digitrip 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard
Terminals Only
See Section
Page Number K-
13 for Optional
Terminals
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
25 kAIC @
600 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC @
600 Vac
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting
600 Vac
Rated
65 kAIC @
600 Vac
L - Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S - Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time
(I
2
t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I - Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time
to Instantaneous
G - Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault
Delay (Flat Response)
Standard Options
LS LSI LSG LSIG
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
Adjustable
Rating Plugs
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time
(I
2
t Response)
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and Short
Delay Time (Flat
Response)
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time (I
2
t
Response)
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and Short
Delay Time (Flat
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue Number
3-Pole
➂
125
KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG 70
90
100
110
125
1KES070T
1KES090T
1KES100T
1KES110T
1KES125T
70/90/100/125
A1KES125T1
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
250 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG 70
100
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
2KES070T
2KES100T
2KES125T
2KES150T
2KES160T
2KES175T
2KES200T
2KES225T
2KES250T
125/150/200/250
A2KES250T1
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA350K➃
400 KD3400F HKD3400F KDC3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG 200
225
250
300
350
400
4KES200T
4KES225T
4KES250T
4KES300T
4KES350T
4KES400T
200/250/300/400
A4KES400T1
220/240/260/280
A4KES200T5
320/340/360/380
A4KES300T5
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA350K➃
TA350K➃
TA350K➃
3TA400K
4-Pole➅➆
125 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4125LS KES4125LSI – – 70
90
100
110
125
1KES070T
1KES090T
1KES100T
1KES110T
1KES125T
70/90/100/125
A1KES125T1
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
250 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4250LS KES4250LSI – – 70
100
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
2KES070T
2KES100T
2KES125T
2KES150T
2KES160T
2KES175T
2KES200T
2KES225T
2KES250T
125/150/200/250
A2KES250T1
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA350K➃
400 KD4400F HKD4400F KDC4400F KES4400LS KES4400LSI – – 200
225
250
300
350
400
4KES200T
4KES225T
4KES250T
4KES300T
4KES350T
4KES400T
200/250/300/400
A4KES400T1
220/240/260/280
A4KES200T5
320/340/360/380
A4KES300T5
TA300K➃
TA300K➃
TA350K➃
TA350K➃
TA350K➃
4TA400K
➀Ampere rating is established by rating plug.
➁For AC use only.
➂3-pole KES Trip Units are for use in 3-pole
frames only.
➃Individually packed.
➄3TA400K and 4TA400K terminal kits contain
one terminal for each pole and one terminal
cover.
➅Trip unit includes protected neutral pole. Use
corresponding 3-pole trip unit if protected
neutral pole is not required.
➆Fully rated neutral pole protection is standard.
For 50% rated protection on neutral pole, add
suffix E to 4-pole trip unit Catalogue number.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix
“S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C104 for Breaker; 29C614 for Electronic Trip Unit
K-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 31 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
32 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Type DK Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Type KES Digitrip Units
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Rating Plug, Terminals
Max.
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame
Only ➂ Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only ➅Digitrip 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard
Terminals Only
See Section
Page Number
K-13 for
Optional
Terminals
Standard Interrupting
Capacity
65 kAIC @ 240 Vac
Standard Options
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plugs
Adjustable
Rating Plugs
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time (I2t
Response)
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and Short
Delay Time (Flat
Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup with
Fixed Short Delay
Time (I2t Response)
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time (Flat
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Ampere Rating
Catalogue Number
Catalogue Numbers
3-Pole➃
125 DK3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG 70
90
100
110
125
1KES070T
1KES090T
1KES100T
1KES110T
1KES125T
70/90/100/125
A1KES125T1
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
250 DK3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG 125
150
160
175
200
225
250
2KES125T
2KES150T
2KES160T
2KES175T
2KES200T
2KES225T
2KES250T
125/150/200/250
A2KES250T1
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA350K ➀
400 DK3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG 200
225
250
300
350
400
4KES200T
4KES225T
4KES250T
4KES300T
4KES350T
4KES400T
200/250/300/400
A4KES400T1
220/240/260/280
A4KES200T5
320/340/360/380
A4KES300T5
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA350K ➀
TA350K ➀
TA350K ➀
3TA400K ➁
Types DK Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
Standard Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC @ 240 Vac
Thermal Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
Standard Terminals Only
See Section Page Numbe
K-13 for Optional Terminals
Factory Assembled Circuit Breaker
Consisting of Frame, Trip Unit, and
Terminals Frame Only ➂
Catalogue Number
2-Pole➃
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
DK2100
DK2125
DK2150
DK2175
DK2200
DK2225
DK2250
DK2300
DK2350
DK2400
DK2400F KT2100T
KT2125T
KT2150T
KT2175T
KT2200T
KT2225T
KT2250T
KT2300T
KT2350T
KT2400T
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA350K ➀
TA350K ➀
TA350K ➀
2TA400K ➁
3-Pole
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
DK3100
DK3125
DK3150
DK3175
DK3200
DK3225
DK3250
DK3300
DK3350
DK3400
DK3400F KT3100T
KT3125T
KT3150T
KT3175T
KT3200T
KT3225T
KT3250T
KT3300T
KT3350T
KT3400T
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA300K ➀
TA350K ➀
TA350K ➀
TA350K ➀
3TA400K ➁
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C104
Individually packed.
2TA400K and 3TA400K, terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
When a ‘Visa” frame is required, add suffix ‘S’ to circuit breaker frame catalogue number.
2-pole circuit breaker supplied in 3-pole frame.
Ampere rating is established by rating plug.
For AC use only.
K-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 32 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 33
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C104 for Breaker; 29C614 for KES Trip Unit
Individually packed.
3TA400K terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number.
For AC use only.
Ampere rating is established by rating plug.
K-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
100% Rated Types CKD and CHKD Electronic Circuit Breakers
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at the 75°C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C➄
Circuit Breaker Frame Only➂Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only➃Digitrip 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard
Terminals
Only
See Section
Page Number
K-13 for
Optional
Terminals
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
25 kAIC @
600 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
35 kAIC @
600 Vac
L - Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S - Adjustable Short Delay (Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time
(I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I - Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time
to Instantaneous
G - Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault
Delay (Flat Response)
Standard Options
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
Adjustable
Rating Plug
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time
(I2t Response)
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and
Short
Delay Time (Flat
Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup
with Fixed Short
Delay Time (I2t
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time
(Flat Response)
and Ground Fault
Protection
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue Number
3-Pole
125 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3125LS KES3125LSI KES3125LSG KES3125LSIG 70
90
100
110
125
1KES070T
1KES090T
1KES100T
1KES110T
1KES125T
70/90/100/125
A1KES125T1
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
250 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3250LS KES3250LSI KES3250LSG KES3250LSIG 70
100
125
150
160
175
200
225
250
2KES070T
2KES100T
2KES125T
2KES150T
2KES160T
2KES175T
2KES200T
2KES225T
2KES250T
125/150/200/250
A2KES250T1
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA350K➀
400 CKD3400F CHKD3400F KES3400LS KES3400LSI KES3400LSG KES3400LSIG 200
225
250
300
350
400
4KES200T
4KES225T
4KES250T
4KES300T
4KES350T
4KES400T
200/250/300/400
A4KES400T1
220/240/260/280
A4KES200T5
320/340/360/380
A4KES300T5
TA300K➀
TA300K➀
TA350K➀
TA350K➀
TA350K➀
3TA400K➁
K Frame 2011 Page 33 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
34 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Note: Note: Moulded case switches may open above 4000 amperes.
Moulded Case Switch ➀
Moulded case switches are used as compact switches in applications
requiring high current switching capabilities. Moulded case switches are
constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high
instantaneous automatic type. Moulded case switches are listed in
accordance with CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489, suitable for reverse feed
use and are 100% rated devices.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
240 Vac Maximum,
250 Vdc
600 Vac Maximum,
250 Vdc
Complete MCS
without Line and Load
Terminals
Complete MCS
without Standard Line and Load Terminals
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
400 DK2400KW KD2400KW HKD2400KW
3-Pole
400 DK3400KW KD3400KW HKD3400KW
4-Pole
400 - KD4400KW HKD4400KW
Moulded
Case
Switch
Type
Number
of
Poles
Unfused Short Circuit Withstand Rating (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
240 480 600 250
DK 2,3 65 - - 10
KD 2,3,4 65 35 25 10
HKD 2,3,4 100 65 35 22
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C104
When a “VISA” type Moulded Case Switch is required, change the suffix of the MCS catalogue number from
“KW” to “SKW”. ie. KD3400SKW
K-8
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 34 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 35
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 ➁
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 KD3125T52W KD3125T56W KD3125T57W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 KD3250T52W KD3250T56W KD3250T57W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 KD3400T52W KD3400T56W KD3400T57W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 HKD3125T52W HKD3125T56W HKD3125T57W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 HKD3250T52W HKD3250T56W HKD3250T57W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 HKD3400T52W HKD3400T56W HKD3400T57W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 KDC3125T52W KDC3125T56W KDC3125T57W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 KDC3250T52W KDC3250T56W KDC3250T57W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 KDC3400T52W KDC3400T56W KDC3400T57W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C092
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above Catalogue Number. (A factory assembly charge will be applied,
please refer to the Breaker Accessories/Modifications section in the Eaton MCCB Price List for details)
K-9
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 35 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
36 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 ➁➂
LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 KD3125T106W KD3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 KD3250T106W KD3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 KD3400T106W KD3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 HKD3125T106W HKD3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 HKD3250T106W HKD3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 HKD3400T106W HKD3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 KDC3125T106W KDC3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 KDC3250T106W KDC3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 KDC3400T106W KDC3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C092
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Factory sealed.
Eaton PowerNet, Zone Interlock functions, one Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch are supplied with
breakers as standard and are mounted on the right pole.
K-10
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 36 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 37
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 550 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 ➁
LSI LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 CKD3125T52W CKD3125T56W CKD3125T57W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 CKD3250T52W CKD3250T56W CKD3250T57W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 CKD3400T52W CKD3400T56W CKD3400T57W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt AC Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 CHKD3125T52W CHKD3125T56W CHKD3125T57W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 CHKD3250T52W CHKD3250T56W CHKD3250T57W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 CHKD3400T52W CHKD3400T56W CHKD3400T57W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C092
K-11
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above Catalogue Number.
K Frame 2011 Page 37 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
38 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM 1050 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere Rating Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 1050 ➁➂
LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 CKD3125T106W CKD3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 CKD3250T106W CKD3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 CKD3400T106W CKD3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt AC Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 CHKD3125T106W CHKD3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPK125A70
ORPK125A90
ORPK125A100
ORPK125A110
ORPK125A125
250 CHKD3250T106W CHKD3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPK025A125
ORPK025A150
ORPK025A175
ORPK025A200
ORPK025A225
ORPK025A250
400 CHKD3400T106W CHKD3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPK40A200
ORPK40A225
ORPK40A250
ORPK40A300
ORPK40A350
ORPK40A400
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C092
K-12
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Factory sealed.
Eaton PowerNet, Zone Interlock functions, one Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch are supplied
with breakers as standard and are mounted on the right pole.
K Frame 2011 Page 38 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 39
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
No. Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Terminal
Catalogue Number Figure
Terminals with Control Wire
Termination Catalogue
Number Figure
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
225
350
400
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
3-350/(1)
250-500/(1)
3/0-250/(2)
35-185
120-240
95-120
TA300K➀
TA350K➀
2TA400K➃➁
3TA400K➄➁
4TA400K➅➂
4
3
2
2
2
–
–
2TA400KCW➃➁
3TA400KCW➄➁
4TA400KCW➅➂
–
–
5
5
5
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
225
350
400
400
400
Copper
Copper
Copper
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu
Cu
Cu
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
3-350/(1)
250-500/(1)
3/0-250/(2)
2/0-250/(2)
or
2/0-500/(1)
500-750/(1)
35-185
120-240
95-120
70-120
70-240
300-400
T300K➀
T350K➀
2T400K➃➁
3T400K➄➁
4T400K➅➂
2TA401K➃➁
3TA401K➄➁
4TA401K➅➂
2TA402K➃➁
3TA402K➄➁
4TA402K➅➂
4
3
2
2
2
1
1
1
6
6
6
–
–
2T400KCW➃➁
3T400KCW➄➁
4T400KCW➅➂
2TA401KCW➃➁
3TA401KCW➄➁
4TA401KCW➅➂
–
–
–
–
–
5
5
5
5
5
5
–
–
–
400 Copper Cu 500-750/(1) – 2T402K➃➁
3T402K➄➁
4T402K➅➂
6
6
6
–
–
–
–
–
–
Line and Load Terminals
Line and load terminals provide wire
connecting capabilities for specific
ranges of continuous current ratings and
wire types. All terminals comply with
CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65 and UL
Standard UL486A and UL486B.
Unless otherwise specified, K-frame
circuit breaker line and load terminals are
shipped separately for field installation.
Ordering Information
K-frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI
terminals as standard. When optional
copper or Cu/AI terminals are required,
order by Catalogue number. Specify if
factory installation is required.
Individually packed.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and three interphase barriers.
Figure 1. TA401K Figure 2. TA400K, T400K Figure 3. TA350K, T350K
Figure 4. TA300K, T300K Figure 5. T400KCW, TA400KCW,
TA401KCW
Figure 6. TA402K, T402K
2-Pole Kit.
3-Pole Kit.
4-Pole Kit.
Terminal is marked with AL9CU to indicate the 90ºC temperature rating.
K-13
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 39 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
40 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles
in the circuit breaker.
Description
Reference
Page
2-Pole➀3-Pole 4-Pole
Left Right Left Centre Right Left Centre Right Neu.
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) ➃
Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) INTA-3 ■❏ ❏➂■
Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) INTA-3 ❏❏➂■
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) INTA-6 ■■ ■➂■■
Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) INTA-6 ■■➂■■
Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) INTA-6 ■■➂■■
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination INTA-9 ❏❏➂❏❏
Shunt Trip – Standard ➁INTA-12 ■■ ■■ ■
Shunt Trip – Low Energy ➁INTA-15 ■■■
Undervoltage Release Mechanism ➁INTA-19 ■■ ■■
Eaton PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kit (OPTIM 550) INTA-23 ■
External Accessories
End Cap Kit EXTA-2 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Keeper Nut EXTA-2 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Terminal Adaptor EXTA-3 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Control Wire Terminal Kit EXTA-3 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Multiwire Connectors EXTA-4 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Base Mounting Hardware EXTA-5 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Terminal Shields EXTA-7 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Interphase Barriers EXTA-8 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Non-Padlockable Handle Block EXTA-10 ■■■
Padlockable Handle Block EXTA-10 ■
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp EXTA-11 ■❏ ❏❏ ❏
Cylinder Lock EXTA-11 ❏❏ ❏ ❏
Key Interlock Kit EXTA-12 ■❏❏❏❏❏
Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●●●
Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●●● ●●●●
Electrical (Solenoid) Operator EXTA-14 ●●● ●●●●
Plug-in Adapters EXTA-16 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Rear Connecting Studs EXTA-18 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Panelboard Connecting Straps EXTA-20 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Handle Mechanisms EXTA-21 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Handle Extension EXTA-27 ●● ●●● ●●●●
IQ Energy Sentinel EXTA-28 ●●● ●●●●
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit EXTA-28 ●●● ●●●●
Ground Fault Alarm Unit EXTA-28 ●●● ●●●●
OPTIM System Components 3-Poles
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) EXTA-29
Digitrip OPTIMizer EXTA-29
Auxiliary Power Module EXTA-29
Potential Transformer Module EXTA-29
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special Calibration 1.2 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Moisture Fungus Treatment 1.2 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 1.2 ●● ●●● ●●●●
Marine Application 1.2 ●● ●●● ●●●●
➀2-pole breaker supplied in 3-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from centre pole.
➁Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on KES or OPTIM trip units.
➂Alarm Switch, Auxiliary Switch, Alarm Switch and Auxiliary Switch Combination cannot be mounted on right pole of
OPTIM 550 K-Frame circuit breaker.
➃OPTIM 1050 K-Frame circuit breaker is factory sealed and does not have right pole space available for accessories.
■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –
not both
●Accessory available/Modification available
K-14
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-400 Amperes K-Frame
K Frame 2011 Page 40 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:47 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
41
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
L-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
Typical L-Frame Circuit Breaker
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
➀
Circuit
Breaker Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
240 415 690 250
➁➂
LD 2, 3, 4 I
cu
I
cs
85
85
45
45
20
10
20
10
L-4,5,7
CLD
➃
2, 3, 4 I
cu
I
cs
85
85
45
45
20
10
–
–
L-5,9
HLD 2, 3, 4 I
cu
I
cs
100
100
70
70
25
13
20
10
L-4,5,7
CHLD
➃
2, 3, 4 I
cu
I
cs
100
100
70
70
25
13
–
–
L-5,9
LDC 2, 3, 4 I
cu
I
cs
200
100
100
75
35
18
20
10
L-4,5,8
CLDC
➃
2, 3, 4 I
cu
I
cs
200
100
100
75
35
18
–
–
L-5,10
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
➀
Circuit
Breaker Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (RMS Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
240 277 480 600 125 250
➁➂
LD
CLD
➃
HLD
CHLD
➃
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
65
65
100
100
–
–
–
–
35
35
65
65
25
25
35
35
–
–
–
–
22
–
25
–
L-4,5,7
L-5,9
L-4,5,7
L-5,9
LDC
➄
CLDC
➃
➄
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
200
200
–
–
100
100
50
50
–
–
30
–
L-4,5,8
L-5,10
Utilization category A circuit breakers.
L/R = 8 milliseconds minimum.
2-pole circuit breaker or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Incorporating Thermal-Magnetic trip unit only.
100% rated breakers.
Current limiting.
Product Description
●
All L-frame circuit breakers are HACR
rated.
●
L-frame circuit breakers are available as
individual components (Frame, Trip
Unit, Terminals), or factory assembled
complete breakers. OPTIM circuit
breakers are available as factory
assembled only.
●
L-frame circuit breakers are
suitable for reverse feed use.
L Frame 2011 Page 41 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
42 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
L-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
L-Frame Digitrip Specifications
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes
Breaker Type
Frame L L L
Ampere Range 300-600A 200-600A 70-600A
Interrupting Rating @ 600V 25, 35, 50 (kA) 25, 35, 50 (kA) 25, 35, 50 (kA)
Protection
Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSI(A), LSIG LSI(A), LSIG
Fixed Rated Plug (I
n
) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable Rating Plug (I
n
) Yes Yes No No
Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
0.4-1.0 x (I
n
) 0.4-1.0 x (I
n
)
Long Delay Time I
2
t 12 Seconds 12 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds
Long Delay Time I
4
t No No 1-5 Seconds 1-5 Seconds
Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
High Load Alarm No No 0.5-1.0 x I
r
0.5-1.0 x I
r
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
) 150-800% x (I
r
) 150-800% x (I
r
)
Short Delay Time I
2
t 100 ms No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes
➃
Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous Pickup No 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
)
Discriminator No No Yes Yes
Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground Fault Alarm No No 20-100% x (I
s
) 20-100% x (I
s
)
Ground Fault Pickup 1-5 x 1g (120A) 1-5 x 1g (120A) 20-100% x (I
s
) 20-100% x (I
s
)
Ground Fault Delay I
2
t No No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes
➃
Yes
Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes
Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes
Remote Signal Contact – Ground Alarm Yes
➄
Yes
➄
Yes
➃➄
Yes
➄
Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included
System Monitoring
Digital Display No No Yes
➁
Yes
➁
Current No No Yes Yes
Power and Energy No No No Yes
Power Quality-Harmonics No No No Yes
Power Factor No No No Yes
Communications
Eaton PowerNet No No Yes
➂
Yes
Testing
Testing Method Test Set OPTIMizer, BIM, Eaton PowerNet
Adjust by rating plug.
By OPTIMizer/BIM.
Require Eaton PowerNet kit.
Require Zone interlock kit.
With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU).
Legend:
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
I
s
= Sensor Rating
I
n
= Rating Plug
I
r
= Long Delay Pickup Setting
L Frame 2011 Page 42 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
43
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding Catalogue numbers. It is not to be used to build Catalogue numbers for
circuit breakers or trip units.
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Catalogue NumberCircuit Breaker/Frame Catalogue Number
OPTIM Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalogue Number Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Catalogue Number
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)
Breaker
Type
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
Number of Poles
234234234
LD, HLD,
LDC
18
(8.172)
20
(9.080)
25
(11.340)
14
(6.356)
15
(6.810)
20
(9.072)
3
(1.361)
4
(1.814)
5
(2.268)
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions, Inches (mm)
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 8.25
(210)
10.75
(274)
4.062
(103)
4 11
(279)
10.75
(274)
4.062
(103)
Circuit
Breaker/
Frame Type
LD
HLD
LDC
CLD
CHLD
CLDC
Number
of Poles
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
4: 4 Poles
Circuit
Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
300
350
400
450
500
600
Suffix
F: Frame Only
WK: High Magnetic Moulded
Case Switch without
terminals
V: 50°C (Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Units Only)
FS: VISA - Frame only.
SKW: VISA - High Magnetic
Moulded Case Switch
without terminals
LD 3 600 F LT 3 400 T
Trip Unit Type
LT:Thermal-
Magnetic
Number
of Poles
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
4: 4 Poles
Trip Unit/
Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
300
350
400
450
500
600
Suffix
T: Trip Unit Thermal-Magnetic
Fixed Thermal Adjustable
Magnetic
TV: 50°C Calibration (Thermal-
Magnetic Trip Units Only)
LD 3 125 T5 7 W
Circuit
Breaker/
Frame
Type
LD
HLD
LDC
CLD
CHLD
CLDC
Number
of Poles
3: 3 Poles
Circuit
Breaker/
Frame
Ampere
Rating
125
(Available on
Model 1050
only)
250
(Available on
Model 1050
only)
400
600
Trip Model
T5 –
Model 550
T10 –
Model 1050
Trip Type
2 – LSI
(550 only)
6 – LSIG
7 – LSIA
Suffix
W:Without
Terminals
LES 3 600 LS P
Trip Unit Type
LES:Electronic
Number of
Poles
3: 3 Poles
4: 4 Poles
Trip Unit
Ampere
Rating
600
Suffix
LS
LSI
LSG
LSIG
Suffix
P: 100% Protected
Neutral on 4-Pole
Trip Unit
L-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
“VISA option is available. CSA listed only.
L Frame 2011 Page 43 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
44 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
L-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
Types LD, HLD, and LDC Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
25 kAIC @600 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Ultra High Interrupting
Capacity Current Limiting
600 Vac Rated
50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Thermal Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
For Use With: Standard
or High or Ultra High
Interrupting Frames
Magnetic Trip Range
is 5-10 x Continuous
Ampere Rating
Standard Terminals Only
See Section Page Number
L-11 for
Optional Terminals
Factory
Assembled
Circuit Breaker
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
➀
Factory
Assembled
Circuit Breaker
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
➀
Factory
Assembled
Circuit Breaker
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
➁
300
350
400
450
500
600
LD2300
LD2350
LD2400
LD2450
LD2500
LD2600
LD2600F HLD2300
HLD2350
HLD2400
HLD2450
HLD2500
HLD2600
HLD2600F LDC2300
LDC2350
LDC2400
LDC2450
LDC2500
LDC2600
LDC2600F LT2300T
LT2350T
LT2400T
LT2450T
LT2500T
LT2600T
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
2TA603LDK
➄
3-Pole
300
350
400
450
500
600
LD3300
LD3350
LD3400
LD3450
LD3500
LD3600
LD3600F HLD3300
HLD3350
HLD3400
HLD3450
HLD3500
HLD3600
HLD3600F LDC3300
LDC3350
LDC3400
LDC3450
LDC3500
LDC3600
LDC3600F LT3300T
LT3350T
LT3400T
LT3450T
LT3500T
LT3600T
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
3TA603LDK
➄
4-Pole
➂
300
350
400
450
500
600
LD4300
LD4350
LD4400
LD4450
LD4500
LD4600
LD4600F HLD4300
HLD4350
HLD4400
HLD4450
HLD4500
HLD4600
HLD4600F LDC4300
LDC4350
LDC4400
LDC4450
LDC4500
LDC4600
LDC4600F LT4300T
LT4350T
LT4400T
LT4450T
LT4500T
LT4600T
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
TA602LD
➃
4TA603LDK
➄
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C607 for Thermal Magnetic Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number. LD and HLD only.
2-pole circuit breaker supplied in 3-pole frame.
Neutral is in right pole.
Individually packed.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
Product Selection
L Frame 2011 Page 44 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
45
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
L-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C615 for LES Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame
catalogue number. CLD & CHLD only.
For AC use only.
Ampere rating is established by rating plug.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C615 for LES Trip Unit
Types LD, HLD, and LDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C ➂
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only ➁Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard
Terminals Only
See Section
Page Number
L-11 for Optional
Terminals
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
25 kAIC @
600 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC @
600 Vac
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting
600 Vac
Rated
50 kAIC @
600 Vac
L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug)
S–Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay
Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat
Response)
I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay
Time to Instantaneous
G–Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground
Fault Delay (Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
Adjustable
Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Standard Options
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time
(I2t Response)
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and
Short Delay
Time (Flat
Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup
with Fixed Short
Delay Time (I2t
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time
(Flat Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalogue Number
3-Pole ➃
600 LD3600F HLD3600F LDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG 300
350
400
450
500
600
6LES300T
6LES350T
6LES400T
6LES450T
6LES500T
6LES600T
300/400/500/600
A6LES600T1
420/440/460/480
A6LES400T5
520/540/560/580
A6LES500T5
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
3TA603LDK
4-Pole ➄
600 LD4600F HLD4600F LDC4600F LES4600LS LES4600LSI – – 300
350
400
450
500
600
6LES300T
6LES350T
6LES400T
6LES450T
6LES500T
6LES600T
300/400/500/600
A6LES600T1
420/440/460/480
A6LES400T5
520/540/560/580
A6LES500T5
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
4TA603LDK
3-pole LES Trip Units are for use in 3-pole frame only.
Trip unit includes unprotected right neutral pole. For 100% protected right pole neutral, add “P” to
catalogue number. ie. LES4600LSP
Individually packed.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
100% Rated Types CLD, CHLD, and CLDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at the 75°C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Rating
Plug and Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C ➂
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only ➁Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard
Terminals Only
See Section
Page Number
L-11 for
Optional
Terminals
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
25 kAIC @
600 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC @
600 Vac
Ultra High
Interrupting
Capacity
Current
Limiting
600 Vac
Rated
50 kAIC @
600 Vac
L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug)
S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay
Time (I2t Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay
Time to Instantaneous
G– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground
Fault Delay (Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
Adjustable
Rating Plug
Standard Options
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time
(I2t
Response)
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and
Short Delay
Time (Flat
Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup
with Fixed Short
Delay Time (I2t
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time
(Flat Response)
and Ground Fault
Protection
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue Number
3-Pole ➃
600 CLD3600F CHLD3600F CLDC3600F LES3600LS LES3600LSI LES3600LSG LES3600LSIG 300
350
400
450
500
600
6LES300T
6LES350T
6LES400T
6LES450T
6LES500T
6LES600T
300/400/500/600
A6LES600T1
420/440/460/480
A6LES400T5
520/540/560/580
A6LES500T5
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
TA602LD ➅
3TA603LDK
L Frame 2011 Page 45 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
46 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Moulded Case
Switch
Type
Number
of
Poles
Unfused Short Circuit Withstand Rating (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts DC
240 480 600 250
LD 2,3,4 65 35 25 22
HLD 2,3,4 100 65 35 25
When a “VISA” type Moulded Case Switch is required, change the suffix of the MCS catalogue
number from “WK” to “SKW”. ie. LD3600SKW
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
L-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
Moulded Case Switches ➀
Moulded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high
current switching capabilities. Moulded case switches are constructed of circuit breaker
components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Moulded case switches
are listed in accordance with CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489, suitable for reverse feed
use, and as 100% rated devices.
Note: Note: Moulded Case Switch may trip above 6000 amperes.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C105 for Moulded Case Switch
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Standard Terminals Only
See Section Page Number
L-11 for Optional Terminals
MCS Only
Without Line and Load Terminals
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
600 LD2600WK HLD2600WK 2TA603LDK ➁
3-Pole
600 LD3600WK HLD3600WK 3TA603LDK ➁
4-Pole
600 LD4600WK HLD4600WK 4TA603LDK➁
L Frame 2011 Page 46 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 47
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM
Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 1050 ➂➃
LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 LD3125T52W LD3125T56W LD3125T57W LD3125T106W LD3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPL125A070
ORPL125A090
ORPL125A100
ORPL125A110
ORPL125A125
250 LD3250T52W LD3250T56W LD3250T57W LD3250T106W LD3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPL025A125
ORPL025A150
ORPL025A175
ORPL025A200
ORPL025A225
ORPL025A250
400 LD3400T52W LD3400T56W LD3400T57W LD3400T106W LD3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPL40A200
ORPL40A225
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
ORPL40A350
ORPL40A400
600 LD3600T52W LD3600T56W LD3600T57W LD3600T106W LD3600T107W 300
350
400
500
600
ORPL60A300
ORPL60A350
ORPL60A400
ORPL60A500
ORPL60A600
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 HLD3125T52W HLD3125T56W HLD3125T57W HLD3125T106W HLD3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPL125A070
ORPL125A090
ORPL125A100
ORPL125A110
ORPL125A125
250 HLD3250T52W HLD3250T56W HLD3250T57W HLD3250T106W HLD3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPL025A125
ORPL025A150
ORPL025A175
ORPL025A200
ORPL025A225
ORPL025A250
400 HLD3400T52W HLD3400T56W HLD3400T57W HLD3400T106W HLD3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPL40A200
ORPL40A225
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
ORPL40A350
ORPL40A400
600 HLD3600T52W HLD3600T56W HLD3600T57W HLD3600T106W HLD3600T107W 300
350
400
500
600
ORPL60A300
ORPL60A350
ORPL60A400
ORPL60A500
ORPL60A600
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit
L-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above Catalogue Number. (A factory assembly charge will be applied,
please refer to the Breaker Accessories/Modifications section in the MCCB Price List for details)
One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard on model 1050.
Factory sealed.
L Frame 2011 Page 47 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
48 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM
Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 1050 ➂➃
LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 LDC3125T52W LDC3125T56W LDC3125T57W LDC3125T106W LDC3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPL125A070
ORPL125A090
ORPL125A100
ORPL125A110
ORPL125A125
250 LDC3250T52W LDC3250T56W LDC3250T57W LDC3250T106W LDC3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPL025A125
ORPL025A150
ORPL025A175
ORPL025A200
ORPL025A225
ORPL025A250
400 LDC3400T52W LDC3400T56W LDC3400T57W LDC3400T106W LDC3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPL40A200
ORPL40A225
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
ORPL40A350
ORPL40A400
600 LDC3600T52W LDC3600T56W LDC3600T57W LDC3600T106W LDC3600T107W 300
350
400
500
600
ORPL60A300
ORPL60A350
ORPL60A400
ORPL60A500
ORPL60A600
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above Catalogue Number.
One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard on model 1050.
Factory sealed.
L-8
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
L Frame 2011 Page 48 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
L-9
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM
Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 1050 ➂➃
LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 CLD3125T52W CLD3125T56W CLD3125T57W CLD3125T106W CLD3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPL125A070
ORPL125A090
ORPL125A100
ORPL125A110
ORPL125A125
250 CLD3250T52W CLD3250T56W CLD3250T57W CLD3250T106W CLD3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPL025A125
ORPL025A150
ORPL025A175
ORPL025A200
ORPL025A225
ORPL025A250
400 CLD3400T52W CLD3400T56W CLD3400T57W CLD3400T106W CLD3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPL40A200
ORPL40A225
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
ORPL40A350
ORPL40A400
600 CLD3600T52W CLD3600T56W CLD3600T57W CLD3600T106W CLD3600T107W 300
350
400
500
600
ORPL60A300
ORPL60A350
ORPL60A400
ORPL60A500
ORPL60A600
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 CHLD3125T52W CHLD3125T56W CHLD3125T57W CHLD3125T106W CHLD3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPL125A070
ORPL125A090
ORPL125A100
ORPL125A110
ORPL125A125
250 CHLD3250T52W CHLD3250T56W CHLD3250T57W CHLD3250T106W CHLD3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPL025A125
ORPL025A150
ORPL025A175
ORPL025A200
ORPL025A225
ORPL025A250
400 CHLD3400T52W CHLD3400T56W CHLD3400T57W CHLD3400T106W CHLD3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPL40A200
ORPL40A225
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
ORPL40A350
ORPL40A400
600 CHLD3600T52W CHLD3600T56W CHLD3600T57W CHLD3600T106W CHLD3600T107W 300
350
400
500
600
ORPL60A300
ORPL60A350
ORPL60A400
ORPL60A500
ORPL60A600
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above Catalogue Number.
One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard on model 1050.
Factory sealed.
L Frame 2011 Page 49 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
50 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
L-10
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
100% Rated Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Rating Plug
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C105 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM
Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating Fixed Rating Plug
OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 1050 ➂➃
LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
125 CLDC3125T52W CLDC3125T56W CLDC3125T57W CLDC3125T106W CLDC3125T107W 70
90
100
110
125
ORPL125A070
ORPL125A090
ORPL125A100
ORPL125A110
ORPL125A125
250 CLDC3250T52W CLDC3250T56W CLDC3250T57W CLDC3250T106W CLDC3250T107W 125
150
175
200
225
250
ORPL025A125
ORPL025A150
ORPL025A175
ORPL025A200
ORPL025A225
ORPL025A250
400 CLDC3400T52W CLDC3400T56W CLDC3400T57W CLDC3400T106W CLDC3400T107W 200
225
250
300
350
400
ORPL40A200
ORPL40A225
ORPL40A250
ORPL40A300
ORPL40A350
ORPL40A400
600 CLDC3600T52W CLDC3600T56W CLDC3600T57W CLDC3600T106W CLDC3600T107W 300
350
400
500
600
ORPL60A300
ORPL60A350
ORPL60A400
ORPL60A500
ORPL60A600
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above Catalogue Number.
One Form C auxiliary switch and one Form C bell alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard on model 1050.
Factory sealed.
L Frame 2011 Page 50 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 51
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Line and Load Terminals
Line and load terminals provide wire
connecting capabilities for specific
ranges of continuous current ratings and
wire types. All terminals comply with
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
Standards UL486A and UL486B
and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65. Unless
otherwise specified, L-frame circuit
breaker line and load terminals are
shipped separately for field installation.
The wire connecting terminal is secured
with two pan-head, slotted screws and
lock washers which can be checked for
the correct torque loading or retightened
from the front of the circuit breaker
before installation of the conductors.
(Applies to all styles.) The circuit breaker
line/load terminal conductors are
positioned in the conducting holes in the
wire connecting terminal and are secured
with recessed socket screws which are
tightened to the correct torque loading
from the front of the circuit breaker.
Ordering Information
L-frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI
terminals as standard. When optional
copper terminals are required, order by
Catalogue number. Specify if factory
installation is required.
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2Terminal
Catalogue Number
Terminals with Control Wire
Termination Catalogue
Numbers
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
400
450
500
600
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
4/0-600 (1)
4-4/0 (2)
3/0-350 (2)
400-500 (2)
120-300
25-95
95-150
185-240
2TA401LDK– 2-Pole Kit ➀
3TA401LDK– 3-Pole Kit ➀
4TA401LDK– 4-Pole Kit ➀
TA450LD ➁
TA602LD ➁
2TA603LDK– 2-Pole Kit ➀
3TA603LDK– 3-Pole Kit ➀
4TA603LDK– 4-Pole Kit ➀
–
–
–
–
TA602LDCW
2TA603LDCW
3TA603LDCW
4TA603LDCW
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
600 Copper Cu 250-350 (2) 120-150 T602LD ➁T602LDCW
TA450LD or TA602LD
or T602LD Terminal
Pan-Head Screws and
Lockwashers (Installed
before Cable Clamping
Screws)
Terminal Cover
Screws
Retainer
TA401LD or TA603LD
Terminal (Step-Type
Terminal Requires
Terminal Cover and
Warning Label.
See Inset.)
Pan-Head
Screws and
Lockwashers
Warning Label
Circuit Breaker
Line Terminal Cover
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one terminal cover.
Individually packed.
Terminal is marked with AL9CU to indicate the 90ºC temperature rating.
L-11
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes L-Frame
L Frame 2011 Page 51 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
52 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
L-12
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
70-600 Amperes
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit
breaker.
Description
Reference
Page
2-Pole ➀, 3-Pole 4-Pole
Left Centre Right Left Centre Right Neu. ➁
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) ➂
Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) INTA-3 ■■■■
Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) INTA-3 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) INTA-7 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) INTA-7 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) INTA-7 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination INTA-9 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) and Alarm Switch Combination INTA-9 ■■■■
Shunt Trip – Standard ➃INTA-12 ■■■■
Shunt Trip – Low Energy ➃INTA-15 ■■■■
Undervoltage Release Mechanism ➃INTA-20 ■■■■
Eaton PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kit (OPTIM 550) INTA-23 ■
External Accessories
End Cap Kit EXTA-2 ●●● ●●●●
Control Wire Terminal Kit EXTA-3 ●●● ●●●●
Base Mounting Hardware EXTA-5 ●●● ●●●●
Terminal Shields EXTA-7 ●●● ●●●●
Interphase Barriers EXTA-8 ●●● ●●●●
Non-Padlockable Handle Block EXTA-10 ■■
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp EXTA-11 ❏❏❏❏
Key Interlock Kit EXTA-12 ❏❏❏❏
Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●●●
Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●●● ●●●●
Electrical (Motor) Operator EXTA-15 ●●● ●●●●
Plug-in Adapters EXTA-16 ●●● ●●●●
Rear Connecting Studs EXTA-19 ●●● ●●●●
Panelboard Connecting Straps EXTA-20 ●●● ●●●●
Handle Mechanisms EXTA-21 ●●● ●●●●
Handle Extension EXTA-27 ●●● ●●●●
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit EXTA-28 ●●● ●●●●
Ground Fault Alarm Unit EXTA-28 ●●● ●●●●
OPTIM System Components 3-Poles
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) EXTA-29
Digitrip OPTIMizer EXTA-29
Auxiliary Power Module EXTA-29
Potential Transformer Module EXTA-30
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special Calibration 1.2 ●●● ●●●●
Moisture Fungus Treatment 1.2 ●●● ●●●●
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 1.2 ●●● ●●●●
Marine Application 1.2 ●●● ●●●●
2-pole breaker supplied in 3-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from centre pole.
Refer to Eaton for appropriate neutral pole accessory combinations.
OPTIM model 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole space available for accessories.
Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on LES trip units or OPTIM trip units.
■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –
not both
●Accessory available/Modification available
L Frame 2011 Page 52 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:28 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
53
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
M-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
300-800 Amperes M-Frame
Typical M-Frame Circuit Breaker complete with the
“VISA” option
Utilization category A circuit breakers.
2-pole circuit breaker or two poles of 3-pole circuit breaker. Thermal-magnetic trip units only, MDL, HMDL
breakers with electronic trip unit are not DC rated.
Time constant is 3 milliseconds minimum at 10 kA and 8 milliseconds at 22 kA.
100% rated breakers.
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
➀
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
➁➂
240 480 600 250
MDL
CMDL
2, 3
2, 3
65
65
50
50
25
25
22
-
M-4,5
M-5
HMDL
CHMDL
2, 3
2, 3
100
100
65
65
35
35
25
-
M-4,5
M-5
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
➀
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity – RMS Symmetrical Amperes (kA) I
CU
≠
I
CS
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
➁➂
240 480 600 250
MDL
CMDL
2, 3
2, 3
65/65
65/65
50/50
50/50
20/10
20/10
20/10
-
M-4,5
M-5
HMDL
CHMDL
2, 3
2, 3
100/100
100/100
70/50
70/50
25/13
25/13
20/10
-
M-4,5
M-5
Product Description
●
All M-frame circuit breakers are HACR
rated.
●
MDL-frame circuit breakers are
available as individual components
(Frame, Trip Unit, Terminals), or factory
assembled complete breakers.
●
M-frame circuit breakers are suitable
for reverse feed use.
M-Frame 2011 Page 53 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:38 PM
54 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
M-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
300-800 Amperes M-Frame
Legend:
I
n
= Rating Plug
MDL-Frame Digitrip Specifications
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310
RMS Sensing Yes
Breaker Type
Frame MDL, CMDL, HMDL, CHMDL
Ampere Range 400-800A
Interrupting Rating @ 600 Vac 25, 35 (kA)
Protection
Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG
Fixed Rated Plug (I
n
)Yes Yes
Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable Rating Plug (I
n
) Yes Yes
Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
Long Delay Time I
2
t12 Seconds 12 Seconds
Long Delay Time I
4
t No No
Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes
High Load Alarm No No
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
)
Short Delay Time I
2
t100 ms No
Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms
Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous Pickup No 200-800% x (I
n
)
Discriminator No No
Instantaneous Override Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground Fault Alarm No No
Ground Fault Pickup 1-5 x 1g (160A) 1-5 x 1g (160A)
Ground Fault Delay I
2
tNoNo
Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms
Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No
Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes
Cause of Trip LEDs No No
Magnitude of Trip Information No No
Remote Signal Contacts – Ground Alarm Yes
➁
Yes
➁
System Monitoring
Digital Display No No
Current No No
Power and Energy No No
Power Quality – Harmonics No No
Power Factor No No
Communications
Eaton PowerNet No No
Testing
Testing Method Test Set (STK2)
Adjust by rating plug.
With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU).
M-Frame 2011 Page 54 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
55
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
M-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
300-800 Amperes M-Frame
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)
Breaker
Type
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
➀
Number of Poles
232323
MDL, HMDL
(T/M T.U.)
26.5
(12.0)
29
(13.2)
24.5
(11.1)
26
(11.8)
2.5
(1.1)
3
(1.4)
MDL, HMDL
(Elec. T.U.)
–30
(13.6)
–26
(11.8)
–4
(1.8)
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions, Inches (mm)
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 8.250
(210)
16.000
(406)
4.062
(103)
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding Catalogue numbers. It is not to be used to build Catalogue numbers for
circuit breakers or trip units.
Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit Catalogue NumberCircuit Breaker/Frame Catalogue Number
MDL 3 800 F
Circuit
Breaker/
Frame Type
MDL
HMDL
CMDL
CHMDL
Number of
Poles
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
Rating
300
➀
350
➀
400
450
500
600
700
800
Suffix
F: Frame Only
WK: High Magnetic
Moulded Case Switch
without Terminals
V: 50°C (Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Units Only)
FS: VISA - Frame only
SKW: VISA - High Magnetic
Moulded Case Switch
without terminals
MT 3 800 T
Trip Unit Type
MT:
MES:
Number
of Poles
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
Trip Unit/
Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
300
➀
350
➀
400
450
500
600
700
800
Suffix
T: Thermal-Magnetic
TV: 50°C (Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Units Only)
LS: Digitrip RMS 310
LSI: Digitrip RMS 310
LSG: Digitrip RMS 310
LSIG: Digitrip RMS 310
Thermal-Magnetic only.
“VISA” option is available. CSA listed only.
M-Frame 2011 Page 55 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:38 PM
56 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
M-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
300-800 Amperes M-Frame
Product Selection
Types MDL and HMDL Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Vac Rated
35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Thermal Magnetic
Trip Unit Only
For Use With: Standard
or High Interrupting Frames
Magnetic Trip Range is 5-10
up through 600A;
4-8 on 700 and 800A x Continuous
Ampere Rating
Standard Terminals Only
➁
See Section Page Number M-7 for
Optional Terminals
Factory
Assembled
Circuit
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
➀
Factory
Assembled
Circuit
Consisting
of Frame,
Trip Unit,
and Terminals
Frame
Only
➀
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
MDL2300
MDL2350
MDL2400
MDL2450
MDL2500
MDL2600
MDL2700
MDL2800
MDL2800F HMDL2300
HMDL2350
HMDL2400
HMDL2450
HMDL2500
HMDL2600
HMDL2700
HMDL2800
HMDL2800F MT2300T
MT2350T
MT2400T
MT2450T
MT2500T
MT2600T
MT2700T
MT2800T
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA800MA2
3-Pole
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
MDL3300
MDL3350
MDL3400
MDL3450
MDL3500
MDL3600
MDL3700
MDL3800
MDL3800F HMDL3300
HMDL3350
HMDL3400
HMDL3450
HMDL3500
HMDL3600
HMDL3700
HMDL3800
HMDL3800F MT3300T
MT3350T
MT3400T
MT3450T
MT3500T
MT3600T
MT3700T
MT3800T
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA700MA1
TA800MA2
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C111 for Breaker; 29C607 for MT Trip Unit.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame
catalogue number. ie. MDL3800FS
Two terminals are required per pole.
M-Frame 2011 Page 56 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
57
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
M-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
300-800 Amperes M-Frame
Types MDL and HMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as Individual Components: Breaker Frame, Trip Unit, Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
➀
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
➁
Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only
➂
Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
Terminals
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
25 kAIC @
600 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
600 Vac
Rated
35 kAIC @
600 Vac
L–Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S–Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I
2
t
Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I–Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to
Instantaneous
G–Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault
Delay (Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
Adjustable
Rating Plugs
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
Number
Standard Options
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time
(I
2
t Response)
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and Short
Delay Time (Flat
Response)
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time (I
2
t
Response)
and Ground
Fault Protection
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and Short
Delay Time (Flat
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalogue Number
3-Pole
800
MDL3800F HMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG 400
500
600
700
800
8MES400T
8MES500T
8MES600T
8MES700T
8MES800T
400/500/600/800
A8MES800T
620/640/660/680
A8MES600T5
720/740/760/780
A8MES700T5
See Section
Page Number
M-7 for Standard
and Optional
Terminals
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C111 for Breaker; 29C615 for MES Trip Unit
100% Rated Types CMDL and CHMDL Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Trip Units
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at the 75°C
ampacity. All 100% rated circuit breakers have electronic trip units. Order as individual components: breaker frame, trip unit, rating
plug and terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
➀
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
➁
Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only
➂
Digitrip RMS 310 Trip Unit Only
Terminals
Standard
Interrupting
Capacity
25 kAIC @
600 Vac
High
Interrupting
Capacity
35 kAIC @
600 Vac
L–Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S–Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I
2
t
Response) or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I–Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to
Instantaneous
G–Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault
Delay (Flat Response) Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
Adjustable
Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
NumberStandard Options
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time
(I
2
t Response)
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and Short
Delay Time (Flat
Response)
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time (I
2
t
Response)
and Ground
Fault Protection
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and Short
Delay Time (Flat
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalogue Number
3-Pole
800
CMDL3800F CHMDL3800F MES3800LS MES3800LSI MES3800LSG MES3800LSIG 400
500
600
700
800
8MES400T
8MES500T
8MES600T
8MES700T
8MES800T
400/500/600/800
A8MES800T
620/640/660/680
A8MES600T5
720/740/760/780
A8MES700T5
See Section Page
Number M-7 for
Standard and
Optional
Terminals
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C111 for Breaker; 29C615 for MES Trip Unit
Ampere rating is established by rating plug.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame
catalogue number. ie. MDL3800FS
For Ac use only.
M-Frame 2011 Page 57 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:38 PM
58 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
M-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
300-800 Amperes M-Frame
Note:
Moulded case switch may trip above 6000 amperes.
Moulded Case Switches
➀
Moulded case switches are used as compact switches in
applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Moulded
case switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and
are of the high instantaneous automatic type.
Moulded case
switches are listed in accordance with CSA C22.2 No. 5.2 and
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL 489 suitable for
reverse feed use and as 100% rated devices.
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
600 Vac Maximum,
250 Vdc
Moulded Case Switches Only without Line and
Load Terminals
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
800
MDL2800WK HMDL2800WK
3-Pole
800
MDL3800WK HMDL3800WK
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C111
Moulded Case
Switch
Type
Number
of
Poles
Unfused Short Circuit Withstand Rating (Symmetrical Amperes)
(kA)
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
240 480 600 250
MDL
2,3
65 50 25 22
HMDL
2,3
100 65 35 25
When a “VISA” type moulded case switch is required, change the suffix of the moulded case switch
catalogue number from “WK” to “SKW”. ie. MDL3800SKW.
M-Frame 2011 Page 58 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
59
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
M-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
300-800 Amperes M-Frame
Line and Load Terminals
M-Frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI
terminals as standard. When optional
copper or Cu/AI terminals are required,
order by Catalogue number. Specify if
factory installation is required.
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum Breaker
Amperes
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
No. Conductors
Terminal
Catalogue Number
Terminals with Control Wire
Termination Catalogue Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
600
800
800
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
(2) #1-500 kcmil
(3) 3/0-400 kcmil
(2) 500-750 kcmil
TA700MA1
TA800MA2
TA801MA
TA700MA1CWT
TA800MA2CWT
TA801MACWT
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
600
800
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
(2) 2/0-500 kcmil
(3) 3/0-300 kcmil
T600MA1
T800MA1
–
–
TA700MA1 TA800MA2 TA801MA
Terminal is marked with AL9CU to indicate the 90ºC temperature rating.
M-Frame 2011 Page 59 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:38 PM
60 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
M-8
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
300-800 Amperes M-Frame
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit
breaker.
Description
Reference
Page
2-Pole ➀3-Pole
Left Right Left Centre Right
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole)
Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) INTA-3 ■■■
Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) INTA-3 ■■■
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) INTA-7 ■■■
Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) INTA-7 ■■■
Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) INTA-7 ■■■
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination INTA-9 ■■■
Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) and Alarm Switch Combination INTA-9 ■■■
Shunt Trip – Standard ➁INTA-12 ■■■
Shunt Trip – Low Energy ➁INTA-15 ■■■
Undervoltage Release Mechanism ➁INTA-20 ■■■
External Accessories
Base Mounting Hardware EXTA-5 ●
Terminal Shields EXTA-7 ●
Interphase Barriers EXTA-8 ●
Non-Padlockable Handle Block EXTA-10 ■
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp EXTA-11 ❏❏❏
Key Interlock Kit EXTA-12 ❏❏❏
Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●● ●●●
Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●● ●●●
Electrical (Motor) Operator EXTA-15 ●● ●●●
Plug-in Adapters EXTA-16 ●● ●●●
Rear Connecting Studs EXTA-19 ●● ●●●
Panelboard Connecting Straps EXTA-20 ●● ●●●
Handle Mechanisms EXTA-21 ●● ●●●
Handle Extension EXTA-27 ●● ●
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit EXTA-28 ●● ●●●
Ground Fault Alarm Unit EXTA-28 ●● ●●●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special Calibration 1.2 ●● ●●●
Moisture Fungus Treatment 1.2 ●● ●●●
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 1.2 ●● ●●●
Marine Application 1.2 ●● ●●●
2-pole breaker supplied in 3-pole frame. Current carrying parts omitted from centre pole.
Shunt trip and UVR cannot be mounted in right poles on MES trip units.
■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –
not both
●Accessory available/Modification available
M-Frame 2011 Page 60 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 9:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
61
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
N-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes
N-Frame
Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
100% rated breakers.
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
➀
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)
240 277 480 600 125
ND
CND
➁
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
65
65
–
–
50
50
25
25
–
–
N-4, 10
N-7, 11
HND
CHND
➁
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
100
100
–
–
65
65
35
35
–
–
N-5, 10
N-8, 11
NDC
CNDC
➁
2, 3, 4
2, 3, 4
200
200
–
–
100
100
65
65
–
–
N-6, 10
N-9, 11
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
➀
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Section
Page
Number
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)
240 415 690
ND
I
cu
I
cs
2, 3, 4
85
85
50
50
20
10
N-4, 10
CND
➁
I
cu
I
cs
2, 3, 4
85
85
50
50
20
10
N-7, 11
HND
I
cu
I
cs
2, 3, 4
100
100
70
50
25
13
N-5, 10
CHND
➁
I
cu
I
cs
2, 3, 4
100
100
70
50
25
13
N-8, 11
NDC
I
cu
I
cs
2, 3, 4
200
100
100
50
35
18
N-6, 10
CNDC
➁
I
cu
I
cs
2, 3, 4
200
100
100
50
35
18
N-9, 11
Product Description
●
All N-frame circuit breakers are
suitable for reverse feed use.
●
All N-frame circuit breakers are HACR
rated.
Typical N-Frame Circuit Breaker
N Frame 2011 Page 61 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
62 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
N-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
N-Frame Digitrip Specifications
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip OPTIM 550 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes
Breaker Type
Frame N N N
Ampere Range 400A-1200A 400A-1200A 400A-1200A
Interrupting Rating @ 600V 25, 35, 65 (kA) 25, 35, 65 (kA) 25, 35, 65 (kA)
Protection
Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG, LSI(A) LSI(A), LISG
Fixed Rated Plug (I
n
) Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable Rating Plug (I
n
) Yes Yes No No
Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
0.4-1.0 x (I
n
) 0.4-1.0 x (I
n
)
Long Delay Time I
2
T 12 Seconds 12 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds
Long Delay Time I
4
T No No 1-5 Seconds 1-5 Seconds
Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
High Load Alarm No No No 0.5-1.0 x I
r
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
) 150-800% x (I
r
) 150-800% x (I
r
)
Short Delay Time I
2
T 100 ms No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Short Delay Time Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes
➃
Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous Pickup No 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-800% x (I
n
)
Discriminator No No Yes Yes
Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground Fault Alarm No No 20-100% x (I
s
) 20-100% x (I
s
)
Ground Fault Pickup Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 20-100% x (I
s
) 20-100% x (I
s
)
Ground Fault Delay I
2
T No No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Ground Fault Zone Selective Interlocking No No Yes
➃
Yes
Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes
Magnitude of Trip Information No No Yes Yes
Remote Signal Contact – Ground Alarm Yes
➄
Yes
➄
Yes
➃➄
Yes
➄
Local Auxiliary and Bell Alarm Contact Optional Optional Optional Included
System Monitoring
Digital Display No No Yes
➁
Yes
➁
Current No No Yes Yes
Power and Energy No No No Yes
Power Quality-Harmonics No No No Yes
Power Factor No No No Yes
Communications
Eaton PowerNet No No Yes
➂
Yes
Testing
Testing Method Test Set (STK2) OPTIMizer, BIM, Eaton PowerNet OPTIMizer, BIM, Eaton PowerNet
Adjust by rating plug.
By OPTIMizer/BIM.
Require Eaton PowerNet kit.
Require Zone interlock kit.
With separate ground fault alarm unit (GFAU).
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
I
s
= Sensor Rating
I
n
= Rating Plug
I
r
= Long Delay Pickup Setting
N Frame 2011 Page 62 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
63
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
N-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions, Inches (mm)
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2, 3 8.25
(210)
16
(407)
5.5
(140)
4 11.125
(283)
16
(407)
5.5
(140)
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (kg)
Breaker Type
Complete Breaker
Number of Poles
234
ND, HND, NDC 37
(16.783)
45
(20.412)
58
(26.308)
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding Catalogue numbers. It is not to be used to build
Catalogue numbers for circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalogue Number
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Type
ND
HND
NDC
CND
CHND
CNDC
Number of Poles
2: 2 Poles
3: 3 Poles
4: 4 Poles
Circuit Breaker/
Frame Ampere
Rating
8: 800 Amperes
12: 1200 Amperes
Trip Model
T3 – Model 310
T5 – Model 550
T10 – Model 1050
ND 3 12 T3 2 W
Trip Type
2 – LSI
3 – LS
5 – LSG
6 – LSIG
7 – LSIA
Suffix
E: 100% R.P. protected (4-Pole)
EH: 50% R.P. protected (4-Pole)
WK: High Magnetic Moulded Case Switch
without terminals
W: Without Terminals
SKW: VISA window high magnetic Moulded
Case Switch without terminals
SW: Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame
with VISA window and without
terminals
“VISA” option is available. CSA listed only.
N Frame 2011 Page 63 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
64 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
N-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106
Two terminals are required per pole.
Neutral is in right pole.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number. ie. ND3800T33SW.
Product Selection
Type ND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only
➂
Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard Terminals
Only
➀
See Section Page
Number N-12 for
Optional Terminals
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plugs
Adjustable Rating Plug
L - Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S - Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I
2
t Response) or
Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I - Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous
G - Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat
Response)
Standard Options
Adjustable Ampere
Ratings
Catalogue Number
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time (I
2
t
Response)
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time
(Flat Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup with
Fixed Short Delay
Time (I
2
t Response)
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time (Flat
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
800
ND2800T33W ND2800T32W ND2800T35W ND2800T36W
400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
3-Pole
800
ND3800T33W ND3800T32W ND3800T35W ND3800T36W
400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
4-Pole
➁
800
ND4800T33W ND4800T32W – –
400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
2-Pole
1200
ND212T33W ND212T32W ND212T35W ND212T36W
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
3-Pole
1200
ND312T33W ND312T32W ND312T35W ND312T36W
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
4-Pole
➁
1200
ND412T33W ND412T32W – –
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
N Frame 2011 Page 64 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
65
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106
Type HND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only
➂
Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard
Terminals Only
➀
See Section Page
Number N-12 for
Optional Terminals
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plugs
Adjustable Rating Plug
L - Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S - Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I
2
t Response) or
Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I - Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous
G - Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat
Response)
Standard Options
Adjustable Ampere
Ratings
Catalogue Number
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time (I
2
t
Response)
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time
(Flat Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup with
Fixed Short Delay
Time (I
2
t Response)
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time (Flat
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
800
HND2800T33W HND2800T32W HND2800T35W HND2800T36W
400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
3-Pole
800
HND3800T33W HND3800T32W HND3800T35W HND3800T36W
400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
4-Pole
➁
800
HND4800T33W HND4800T32W – –
400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
2-Pole
1200
HND212T33W HND212T32W HND212T35W HND212T36W
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
3-Pole
1200
HND312T33W HND312T32W HND312T35W HND312T36W
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
4-Pole
➁
1200
HND412T33W HND412T32W – –
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
N-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
Two terminals are required per pole.
Neutral is in right pole.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number. ie. HND3800T33SW.
N Frame 2011 Page 65 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
66 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
N-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106
Type NDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard Terminals
Only ➀
See Section Page
Number N-12 for
Optional Terminals
Ultra High Interrupting Capacity
600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plugs
Adjustable Rating Plug
L - Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S - Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response)
or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I - Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to
Instantaneous
G - Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat
Response)
Standard Options
Adjustable Ampere
Ratings
Catalogue Number
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time (I2t
Response)
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and
Short Delay
Time (Flat
Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup
with Fixed Short
Delay Time (I2t
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time (Flat
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
800 NDC2800T33W NDC2800T32W NDC2800T35W NDC2800T36W 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
3-Pole
800 NDC3800T33W NDC3800T32W NDC3800T35W NDC3800T36W 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
4-Pole ➁
800 NDC4800T33W NDC4800T32W – – 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
2-Pole
1200 NDC212T33W NDC212T32W NDC212T35W NDC212T36W 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
3-Pole
1200 NDC312T33W NDC312T32W NDC312T35W NDC312T36W 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
4-Pole ➁
1200 NDC412T33W NDC412T32W – – 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
Two terminals are required per pole.
Neutral is in right pole.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number. ie: NDC312T36SW.
N Frame 2011 Page 66 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 67
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
N-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
100% Rated Type CND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at the 75°C
ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➂Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard Terminals
Only ➀
See Section Page
Number N-12 for
Optional Terminals
Standard Interrupting Capacity
600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plugs
Adjustable Rating Plug
L - Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S - Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response)
or Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I - Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to
Instantaneous
G - Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat
Response)
Standard Options
Adjustable Ampere
Ratings
Catalogue Number
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup with
Fixed Short
Delay Time (I2t
Response)
Independently
Adjustable
Short Delay
Pickup and
Short Delay
Time (Flat
Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup with
Fixed Short Delay
Time (I2t Response)
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time (Flat
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
800 CND2800T33W CND2800T32W CND2800T35W CND2800T36W 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
3-Pole
800 CND3800T33W CND3800T32W CND3800T35W CND3800T36W 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
4-Pole ➁
800 CND4800T33W CND4800T32W – – 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
2-Pole
1200 CND212T33W CND212T32W CND212T35W CND212T36W 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
3-Pole
1200 CND312T33W CND312T32W CND312T35W CND312T36W 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
4-Pole ➁
1200 CND412T33W CND412T32W – – 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106
Two terminals are required per pole.
Neutral is in right pole.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number. ie. CND3800T33SW.
N Frame 2011 Page 67 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
68 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
100% Rated Type CHND Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at
the 75°C ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➂Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard Terminal
Only ➀
See Section Page
Number N-12 for
Optional Terminals
High Interrupting Capacity
600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plugs
Adjustable Rating Plug
L - Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S - Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or
Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I - Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous
G - Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat
Response)
Standard Options
Adjustable Ampere
Ratings
Catalogue Number
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup with
Fixed Short Delay
Time (I2t
Response)
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time
(Flat Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup with
Fixed Short Delay
Time (I2t Response)
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time (Flat
Response) and Ground
Fault Protection
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
800 CHND2800T33W CHND2800T32W CHND2800T35W CHND2800T36W 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
3-Pole
800 CHND3800T33W CHND3800T32W CHND3800T35W CHND3800T36W 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
4-Pole ➁
800 CHND4800T33W CHND4800T32W – – 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
2-Pole
1200 CHND212T33W CHND212T32W CHND212T35W CHND212T36W 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
3-Pole
1200 CHND312T33W CHND312T32W CHND312T35W CHND312T36W 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
4-Pole ➁
1200 CHND412T33W CHND412T32W – – 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
N-8
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106
Two terminals are required per pole.
Neutral is in right pole.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number. ie. CHND3800T33SW.
N Frame 2011 Page 68 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 69
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
N-9
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106
100% Rated Type CNDC Electronic Circuit Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Units
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at the 75°C
ampacity. Order as individual components: Breaker Frame, Rating Plug, Terminals
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Digitrip RMS 310 Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
Standard Terminals
Only ➀
See Section Page
Number N-12 for
Optional Terminals
Ultra High Interrupting Capacity
600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plugs
Adjustable Rating Plug
L - Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (by Adjustable Rating Plug)
S - Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) or
Adjustable Short Delay Time (Flat Response)
I - Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous
G - Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Delay (Flat
Response)
Standard Options
Adjustable Ampere
Ratings
Catalogue Number
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup with
Fixed Short Delay
Time (I2t
Response)
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time
(Flat Response)
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup with
Fixed Short Delay
Time (I2t Response)
and Ground Fault
Protection
Independently
Adjustable Short
Delay Pickup and
Short Delay Time (Flat
Response) and
Ground Fault
Protection
Catalogue Number
2-Pole
800 CNDC2800T33W CNDC2800T32W CNDC2800T35W CNDC2800T36W 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
3-Pole
800 CNDC3800T33W CNDC3800T32W CNDC3800T35W CNDC3800T36W 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
4-Pole ➁
800 CNDC4800T33W CNDC4800T32W – – 400
450
500
600
700
800
8NES400T
8NES450T
8NES500T
8NES600T
8NES700T
8NES800T
Adjustable Settings are:
400, 500, 600, 800
A8NES800T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
2-Pole
1200 CNDC212T33W CNDC212T32W CNDC212T35W CNDC212T36W 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
3-Pole
1200 CNDC312T33W CNDC312T32W CNDC312T35W CNDC312T36W 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
4-Pole ➁
1200 CNDC412T33W CNDC412T32W – – 600
700
800
900
1000
1200
12NES600T
12NES700T
12NES800T
12NES900T
12NES1000T
12NES1200T
Adjustable Settings are:
600, 800, 1000, 1200
A12NES1200T1
TA700NB1
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
Two terminals are required per pole.
Neutral is in right pole.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number. ie: CNDC312T33SW.
N Frame 2011 Page 69 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
70 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
N-10
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit), Rating Plug, Terminals.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating
Plug Only
L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 1050 ➂➃ OPTIM 1050 ➂➃
LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
800 ND3800T52W ND3800T56W ND3800T57W ND3800T106W ND3800T107W 400
450
500
550
600
700
800
ORPN80A400
ORPN80A450
ORPN80A500
ORPN80A550
ORPN80A600
ORPN80A700
ORPN80A800
1200 ND312T52W ND312T56W ND312T57W ND312T106W ND312T107W 600
700
800
1000
1200
ORPN12A600
ORPN12A700
ORPN12A800
ORPN12A100
ORPN12A120
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
800 HND3800T52W HND3800T56W HND3800T57W HND3800T106W HND3800T107W 400
450
500
550
600
700
800
ORPN80A400
ORPN80A450
ORPN80A500
ORPN80A550
ORPN80A600
ORPN80A700
ORPN80A800
1200 HND312T52W HND312T56W HND312T57W HND312T106W HND312T107W 600
700
800
1000
1200
ORPN12A600
ORPN12A700
ORPN12A800
ORPN12A100
ORPN12A120
3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
800 NDC3800T52W NDC3800T56W NDC3800T57W NDC3800T106W NDC3800T107W 400
450
500
550
600
700
800
ORPN80A400
ORPN80A450
ORPN80A500
ORPN80A550
ORPN80A600
ORPN80A700
ORPN80A800
1200 NDC312T52W NDC312T56W NDC312T57W NDC312T106W NDC312T107W 600
700
800
1000
1200
ORPN12A600
ORPN12A700
ORPN12A800
ORPN12A100
ORPN12A120
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above Catalogue Number. (A factory assembly charge will be applied,
please refer to the Breaker Accessories/Modifications section in the Eaton MCCB Price List for details)
Factory sealed.
1 Form C auxiliary switch and 1 Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard on model 1050.
N Frame 2011 Page 70 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 71
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
N-11
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106 for Breaker; 29C891 for OPTIM Trip
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
Digitrip OPTIM Rating
Plug Only
L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time (I2t or I4t Response) ➀
S– Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I– Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G– Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A– Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 550 ➁OPTIM 1050 ➂➃ OPTIM 1050 ➂➃
LSI LSIG LSIA LSIG LSIA
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 25 kAIC @ 600 Vac
800 CND3800T52W CND3800T56W CND3800T57W CND3800T106W CND3800T107W 400
450
500
550
600
700
800
ORPN80A400
ORPN80A450
ORPN80A500
ORPN80A550
ORPN80A600
ORPN80A700
ORPN80A800
1200 CND312T52W CND312T56W CND312T57W CND312T106W CND312T107W 600
700
800
1000
1200
ORPN12A600
ORPN12A700
ORPN12A800
ORPN12A100
ORPN12A120
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 35 kAIC @ 600 Vac
800 CHND3800T52W CHND3800T56W CHND3800T57W CHND3800T106W CHND3800T107W 400
450
500
550
600
700
800
ORPN80A400
ORPN80A450
ORPN80A500
ORPN80A550
ORPN80A600
ORPN80A700
ORPN80A800
1200 CHND312T52W CHND312T56W CHND312T57W CHND312T106W CNHD312T107W 600
700
800
1000
1200
ORPN12A600
ORPN12A700
ORPN12A800
ORPN12A100
ORPN12A120
3-Pole Ultra High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
800 CNDC3800T52W CNDC3800T56W CNDC3800T57W CNDC3800T106W CNDC3800T107W 400
450
500
550
600
700
800
ORPN80A400
ORPN80A450
ORPN80A500
ORPN80A550
ORPN80A600
ORPN80A700
ORPN80A800
1200 CNDC312T52W CNDC312T56W CNDC312T57W CNDC312T106W CNDC312T107W 600
700
800
1000
1200
ORPN12A600
ORPN12A700
ORPN12A800
ORPN12A100
ORPN12A120
Long delay I4t response selection limits short delay time to flat response.
Zone Interlocking, PowerNet, or both features can be added at the factory by adding Suffixes ZG, PN or ZGP respectively to above Catalogue Number. (A factory assembly charge will be applied,
please refer to the Breaker Accessories/Modifications section in the Eaton MCCB Price List for details)
Factory sealed.
1 Form C auxiliary switch and 1 Form C bell (trip) alarm switch supplied with breaker as standard on model 1050.
N Frame 2011 Page 71 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
72 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Moulded case switch may trip above 14,000 amperes.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Catalogue Number
3-Pole 4-Pole ➁3-Pole 4-Pole ➁
Moulded Case Switch Only without Line & Load Terminals
Standard Unfused S.C. Withstand Capacity High Unfused S.C. Withstand Capacity
800 ND3800WK ND4800WK HND3800WK HND4800WK
1200 ND312WK ND412WK HND312WK -
Moulded Case
Switch
Type
Number
of Poles
Unfused Short Circuit Withstand Rating
(Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Volts Dc
240 480 600 250
ND 3,4 65 50 25 -
HND 3,4 100 65 35 -
N-12
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
Type ND Moulded Case Switches ➀
Moulded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Moulded case
switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Moulded case switches
are listed in accordance with CSA C22.2 No. 5 and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL 489 suitable for reverse feed use and
as 100% rated devices.
T1000NB1
Line and Load Terminals
Ordering Information
N-frame circuit breakers use Cu/AI terminals as standard. When optional copper or Cu/AI terminals are required, order by catalogue
number. Specify if factory installation is required.
Maximum Breaker Amperes Terminal Body Material Wire Type AWG Wire Range/No. Conductors Metric Wire Range mm2Catalogue Number
Standard Cu/AI Pressure Terminals
700
1000
1200
1200
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Aluminum
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
Cu/AI
(2) 1-500 kcmil
(3) 3/0-400 kcmil
(4) 4/0-500 kcmil
(3) 500-750 kcmil
50-300
95-185
120-300
300-400
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1
Optional Copper and Cu/AI Pressure Type Terminals
700
1000
1200
Copper
Copper
Copper
Cu
Cu
Cu
(2) 2/0-500 kcmil
(3) 3/0-500 kcmil
(4) 3/0-400 kcmil
70-300
95-300
95-185
T700NB1
T1000NB1
T1200NB3
TA700NB1 TA1000NB1 TA1200NB1
TA1201NB1 T700NB1
When a “VISA” type Moulded Case Switch is required, change the suffix of the MCS catalogue number from “WK” to “SKW”. ie. ND312SKW
Neutral is in right pole.
Terminal is marked with AL9CU to indicate the 90ºC temperature rating.
N Frame 2011 Page 72 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 73
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Description
Reference
Page
3-Pole 4-Pole
Left Centre Right Left Centre Right Neu.
Internal Accessories (Only One Internal Accessory Per Pole) ➀
Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) INTA-4 ■■■■
Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) INTA-4 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (1A, 1B) INTA-7 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) INTA-7 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (3A, 3B) INTA-7 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (1A 1B) and Alarm Switch Combination INTA-9 ■■■■
Auxiliary Switch (2A 2B) and Alarm Switch Combination INTA-9 ■■■■
Shunt Trip – Standard INTA-13 ■■
Shunt Trip – Low Energy INTA-15 ■■
Undervoltage Release Mechanism INTA-21 ■■
Eaton PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kit (OPTIM 550) INTA-23 ■
External Accessories
Base Mounting Hardware EXTA-5 ●●
Interphase Barriers EXTA-8 ●●
Non-Padlockable Handle Block EXTA-10 ■■
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp EXTA-11 ❏❏❏❏
Key Interlock Kit EXTA-12 ❏❏❏❏
Sliding Bar Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●●●
Walking Beam Interlock – Requires Two Breakers EXTA-13 ●●● ●●●●
Electrical (Motor) Operator EXTA-15 ●●● ●●●●
Plug-in Adapters EXTA-16 ●●● ●●●●
Rear Connecting Studs EXTA-19 ●●● ●●●●
Panelboard Connecting Straps EXTA-20 ●●● ●●●●
Handle Mechanisms EXTA-21 ●●● ●●●●
Handle Extension EXTA-27 ●●● ●●●●
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit EXTA-28 ●●● ●●●●
Ground Fault Alarm Unit EXTA-28
OPTIM System Components 3-Poles
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) EXTA-29
Digitrip OPTIMizer EXTA-29
Auxiliary Power Module EXTA-29
Potential Transformer Module EXTA-30
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special Calibration 1.2 ●●● ●●●●
Moisture Fungus Treatment 1.2 ●●● ●●●●
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 1.2 ●●● ●●●●
Marine Application 1.2 ●●● ●●●●
N-13
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
400-1200 Amperes N-Frame
OPTIM 1050 is factory sealed and does not have the right pole available for accessories.
■Applicable in indicated pole position ❏May be mounted on left or right pole –
not both
●Accessory available/Modification available
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit
breaker.
N Frame 2011 Page 73 Saturday, September 17, 2011 1:37 PM
74 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
R - Frame Circuit Breaker
Product Description
●
R-frame circuit breakers are available
as frame (which includes trip unit),
rating plug and terminals.
●
All R-frame circuit breakers are
suitable for reverse feed use.
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
➂
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Circuit
Breaker Type
Page Numbers
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Trip Unit Types
➀
240 415 690 310 510 610 810 910 OPTIM 1050
RD
I
CU
I
CS
3, 4
135
100
70
50
25
13
RD R-4 R-7 R-9 R-11 R-13 R-15
RDC
I
CU
I
CS
3, 4
200
100
100
50
35
18
RDC R-5 R-7 R-9 R-11 R-13 R-15
See page R-2 for Trip Unit Specifications.
100% Rated breakers.
Utilization Category A circuit breakers.
Technical Data and Specifications
➂
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Circuit
Breaker Type
Number of
Poles
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical Amperes) (kA)
Circuit
Breaker Type
Page Numbers
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz) Trip Unit Types
➀
240 277 480 600 310 510 610 810 910 OPTIM 1050
RD
3, 4 125 – 65 50 RD R-4 R-7 R-9 R-11 R-13 R-15
CRD
➁
3, 4 125 – 65 50 CRD R-6 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-14 R-16
RDC
3, 4 200 – 100 65 RDC R-5 R-7 R-9 R-11 R-13 R-15
CRDC
➁
3, 4 200 – 100 65 CRDC R-6 R-8 R-10 R-12 R-14 R-16
R Frame 2011 Page 74 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
75
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
R-Frame Digitrip Specifications
Trip Unit Type Digitrip RMS 310 Digitrip RMS 510 Digitrip RMS 610 Digitrip RMS 810 Digitrip RMS 910 Digitrip OPTIM 1050
RMS Sensing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Breaker Type
Frame R R R R R R
Ampere Range 800A-2500A 800A-2500A 800A-2500A 800A-2500A 800A-2500A 800A-2500A
Interrupting Rating @ 600Vac 50, 65 (kA) 50, 65 (kA) 50, 65 (kA) 50, 65 (kA) 50, 65 (kA) 50, 65 (kA)
Protection
Ordering Options LS, LSG LSI, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG,
LSG, LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG LSG,
LSIG
LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LI, LS, LSI, LIG, LSG, LSIG LSI(A), LISG
Fixed Rated Plug (I
n
) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Overtemperature Trip Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Long Delay Protection (L)
Adjustable Rating Plug (I
n
) Yes Yes No No No No No
Long Delay Pickup 0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
0.5-1.0 (I
n
)
➀
0.5-1.0 x (I
n
) 0.5-1.0 x (I
n
) 0.5-1.0 x (I
n
) 0.5-1.0 x (I
n
) 0.4-1.0 x (I
n
)
Long Delay Time I
2
t 12 Seconds 12 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds 2-24 Seconds
Long Delay Time I
4
t No No No No No No 1-5 Seconds
Long Delay Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
High Load Alarm No No No 0.85 x I
r
0.85 x I
r
0.85 x I
r
0.5-1.0 x I
r
Short Delay Protection (S)
Short Delay Pickup 200-800% x (I
n
)
➁
200-800% x (I
n
)
➁
200-600%
S1&S2 x (I
r
)
200-600%
S1&S2 x (I
r
)
200-600%
S1&S2 x (I
r
)
200-600%
S1&S2 x (I
r
)
150-800% x (I
r
)
➁➂
Short Delay Time I
2
t 100 ms No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Short Delay Time Flat No Inst-300 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Short Delay Time Zone
Selective Interlocking
No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Instantaneous Protection (I)
Instantaneous Pick Up No 200-800% x (I
n
) 200-600%
M1&M2 x (I
n
)
200-600%
M1&M2 x (I
n
)
200-600%
M1&M2 x (I
n
)
200-600%
M1&M2 x (I
n
)
200-800% x (I
n
)
➂
Discriminator No No Yes
➃
Yes
➃
Yes
➃
Yes
➃
Yes
Instantaneous Override Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground Fault Protection (G)
Ground Fault Alarm
➄
No No No No No No 25-100% x (I
n
)
Ground Fault Pick Up
➄
Varies by Frame Varies by Frame 25-100% x (I
s
) 25-100% x (I
s
) 25-100% x (I
s
) 25-100% x (I
s
) 25-100% x (I
n
)
Ground Fault Delay I
2
t No No 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Ground Fault Delay Flat Inst-500 ms Inst-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms 100-500 ms
Ground Fault Zone
Selective Interlocking
No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Ground Fault Thermal Memory Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
System Diagnostics
Status LEDs Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cause of Trip LEDs No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Magnitude of Trip Information No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Remote Signal Contacts Yes
➆
Yes
➆
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
System Monitoring
Digital Display No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
➅
Current No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Voltage No No No No No Yes No
Power and Energy No No No No Yes Yes Yes
Power Quality-Harmonics No No No No No Yes Yes
Power Factor No No No No Yes (Over Eaton PowerNet
Only)
Yes Yes
Communications
Eaton PowerNet No No No No Yes Yes Yes
Testing
Testing Method Test Set Integral Integral Integral Integral OPTIMizer, BIM,
Eaton PowerNet
➀
Adjust by rating plug.
➁
Except 2500 ampere frame is 200-600%.
➂
Varies by frame.
➃
LS/LSG only.
➄
Not to exceed 1200 amperes.
➅
By OPTIMizer/BIM.
➆
Optional. Add suffix “R” to Catalogue
Number.
BIM = Breaker Interface Module
(A) = GF Alarm
I
s
= Sensor Rating
I
n
= Rating Plug
I
r
= Long Delay Pickup Setting x I
n
R Frame 2011 Page 75 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
76 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding catalogue numbers. It is not to be used to build catalogue numbers for
circuit breakers or trip units.
Circuit
Breaker/Frame
Ampere Rating
16: 1600A
20: 2000A
25: 2500A
Circuit Breaker/Frame Catalogue Number
RD 3 16 T32 W
Circuit
Breaker/
Frame Type
RD
RDC
CRD
CRDC
Number
of Poles
3: 3 Poles
4: 4 Poles
Suffix
W: Without Terminals
P: 100% Protected Neutral Pole
R: Ground Fault Remote
Indication Compatibility
(310 Only)
K: Moulded Case Switch
WK: Moulded Case Switch
without terminals
SW: VISA Window without
Terminals
Trip Type
➀
T32: Digitrip RMS
310 LSI
T53: Digitrip RMS
510 LS
T65: Digitrip RMS
610 LSG
T86: Digitrip RMS
810 LSIG
T96: Digitrip RMS
910 LSIG
T106: Digitrip
OPTIM
1050 LSIG
For complete list of available trip types refer to pages R-4 through R-16.
“VISA” option is available. CSA listed only.
Dimensions/Weights
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
3 15.5
(394)
16
(406)
9.75
(248)
4 20
(508)
16
(406)
9.75
(248)
Breaker
Type
Complete Breaker
Number of Poles
34
1600A
RD, CRD, RDC, CRDC 102
(46.266)
135
(61.235)
2000A
RD, RDC 102
(46.266)
135
(61.235)
CRD, CRDC 130
(58.967)
175
(79.378)
2500A
RD, RDC 135
(61.235)
182
(82.553)
R Frame 2011 Page 76 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
77
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Product Selection
Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only
➃
Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
L–Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug)
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I
2
t Response) for LS and LSG
trip unit Independently Adjustable Short Delay Pickup and Short Delay Time (Flat Response) for
LSI and LSIG trip unit
I–Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous
G–Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response) Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
Adjustable Rating Plug
Adjustable Ampere Ratings
Catalogue NumberLS LSI LSG
➂
LSIG
➂
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600
➀
RD316T33W RD316T32W RD316T35W RD316T36W
800
1000
1200
1250
1400
1500
1600
16RES08T
16RES10T
16RES12T
16RES125T
16RES14T
16RES15T
16RES16T
Adjustable Settings are:
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
A16RES16T1
2000
RD320T33W RD320T32W RD320T35W RD320T36W
1000
1200
1250
1400
1600
2000
20RES10T
20RES12T
20RES125T
20RES14T
20RES16T
20RES20T
Adjustable Settings are:
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
A20RES20T1
2500
RD325T33W RD325T32W RD325T35W RD325T36W
1200
1250
1600
2000
2500
25RES12T
25RES125T
25RES16T
25RES20T
25RES25T
Adjustable Settings are:
1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
A25RES25T1
4-Pole
➁
Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600
➀
RD416T33W RD416T32W – –
800
1000
1200
1250
1400
1500
1600
16RES08T
16RES10T
16RES12T
16RES125T
16RES14T
16RES15T
16RES16T
Adjustable Settings are:
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
A16RES16T1
2000
RD420T33W RD420T32W – –
1000
1200
1250
1400
1600
2000
20RES10T
20RES12T
20RES125T
20RES14T
20RES16T
20RES20T
Adjustable Settings are:
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
A20RES20T1
2500
RD425T33W RD425T32W – –
1200
1250
1600
2000
2500
25RES12T
25RES125T
25RES16T
25RES20T
25RES25T
Adjustable Settings are:
1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
A25RES25T1
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29C883 for Digitrip 310 Trip Unit
For SCR application use 2000 ampere frame.
Unprotected right pole neutral. Add “P” to catalogue number for 100% protected right pole neutral, i.e., “RD416T33PW”.
Add suffix “R” to breaker catalogue number for ground fault remote indication compatibility, i.e., RD316T35RW
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. RD316T33SW
R Frame 2011 Page 77 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
78 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
L– Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug)
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I
2
t Response) for LS and LSG
trip unit Independently Adjustable Short Delay Pickup and Short Delay Time (Flat Response) for
LSI and LSIG trip unit
I–Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous
G–Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response) Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
Adjustable Rating Plug
Adjustable Ampere Ratings
Catalogue NumberLS LSI LSG
➂
LSIG
➂
Catalogue Number
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600
➀
RDC316T33W RDC316T32W RDC316T35W RDC316T36W
800
1000
1200
1250
1400
1500
1600
16RES08T
16RES10T
16RES12T
16RES125T
16RES14T
16RES15T
16RES16T
Adjustable Settings are:
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
A16RES16T1
2000
RDC320T33W RDC320T32W RDC320T35W RDC320T36W
1000
1200
1250
1400
1600
2000
20RES10T
20RES12T
20RES125T
20RES14T
20RES16T
20RES20T
Adjustable Settings are:
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
A20RES20T1
2500
RDC325T33W RDC325T32W RDC325T35W RDC325T36W
1200
1250
1600
2000
2500
25RES12T
25RES125T
25RES16T
25RES20T
25RES25T
Adjustable Settings are:
1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
A25RES25T1
4-Pole
➁
High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600
➀RDC416T33W RDC416T32W – – 800
1000
1200
1250
1400
1500
1600
16RES08T
16RES10T
16RES12T
16RES125T
16RES14T
16RES15T
16RES16T
Adjustable Settings are:
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
A16RES16T1
2000 RDC420T33W RDC420T32W – – 1000
1200
1250
1400
1600
2000
20RES10T
20RES12T
20RES125T
20RES14T
20RES16T
20RES20T
Adjustable Settings are:
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
A20RES20T1
2500 RDC425T33W RDC425T32W – – 1200
1250
1600
2000
2500
25RES12T
25RES125T
25RES16T
25RES20T
25RES25T
Adjustable Settings are:
1200, 1600, 2000, 2500
A25RES25T1
For SCR application use 2000 ampere frame.
Unprotected right pole neutral. Add “P” to catalogue number for 100% protected right pole neutral, i.e., “RDC416T33PW”.
Add suffix “R” to breaker catalogue number for ground fault remote indication compatibility, i.e., RD316T35RW
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29C883 for Digitrip 310 Trip Unit
R Frame 2011 Page 78 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 79
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 310 Electronic Circuit Breakers ➀
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at 75°C ampacity.
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➃Digitrip RMS 310 Rating Plug Only
L–Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (By Adjustable Rating Plug)
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Fixed Short Delay Time (I2t Response) for LS and LSG
trip unit Independently Adjustable Short Delay Pickup and Short Delay Time (Flat Response) for
LSI and LSIG trip unit
I–Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup by Setting Short Delay Time to Instantaneous
G–Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time (Flat Response) Ampere
Rating
Fixed
Rating
Plug
Adjustable Rating Plug
Adjustable Ampere Ratings
Catalogue NumberLS LSI LSG ➂LSIG ➂
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 ➁CRD316T33W CRD316T32W CRD316T35W CRD316T36W 800
1000
1200
1250
1400
1500
1600
16RES08T
16RES10T
16RES12T
16RES125T
16RES14T
16RES15T
16RES16T
Adjustable Settings are:
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
A16RES16T1
2000 CRD320T33W CRD320T32W CRD320T35W CRD320T36W 1000
1200
1250
1400
1600
2000
20RES10T
20RES12T
20RES125T
20RES14T
20RES16T
20RES20T
Adjustable Settings are:
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
A20RES20T1
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 ➀➁ CRDC316T33W CRDC316T32W CRDC316T35W CRDC316T36W 800
1000
1200
1250
1400
1500
1600
16RES08T
16RES10T
16RES12T
16RES125T
16RES14T
16RES15T
16RES16T
Adjustable Settings are:
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
A16RES16T1
2000 CRDC320T33W CRDC320T32W CRDC320T35W CRDC320T36W 1000
1200
1250
1400
1600
2000
20RES10T
20RES12T
20RES125T
20RES14T
20RES16T
20RES20T
Adjustable Settings are:
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
A20RES20T1
Includes B2016RDL rear connections. Refer to TD.29.02.T.E for dimensions.
For SCR application use 2000 ampere frame.
Add suffix “R” to breaker catalogue number for ground fault remote indication compatibility, i.e., RD316T35RW
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. CRD316T33SW
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29C883 for Digitrip 310 Trip Unit
R Frame 2011 Page 79 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
80 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Digitrip RMS 510 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Rated
Current (In)
Catalogue
NumberLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 RD316T51W RD316T53W RD316T52W RD316T54W RD316T55W RD316T56W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 RD320T51W RD320T53W RD320T52W RD320T54W RD320T55W RD320T56W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T51W RD325T53W RD325T52W RD325T54W RD325T55W RD325T56W 1600
2000
2500
RP6R25A160
RP6R25A200
RP6R25A250
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 RDC316T51W RDC316T53W RDC316T52W RDC316T54W RDC316T55W RDC316T56W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T51W RDC320T53W RDC320T52W RDC320T54W RDC320T55W RDC320T56W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T51W RDC325T53W RDC325T52W RDC325T54W RDC325T55W RDC325T56W 1600
2000
2500
RP6R25A160
RP6R25A200
RP6R25A250
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29C885 for Digitrip 510 Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. RD325T51SW
R Frame 2011 Page 80 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 81
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-8
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 510 Circuit Breakers
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at 75°C ampacity.
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Rated
Current (In)
Catalogue
NumberLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRD316T51W CRD316T53W CRD316T52W CRD316T54W CRD316T55W CRD316T56W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 CRD320T51W CRD320T53W CRD320T52W CRD320T54W CRD320T55W CRD320T56W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRDC316T51W CRDC316T53W CRDC316T52W CRDC316T54W CRDC316T55W CRDC316T56W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 CRDC320T51W CRDC320T53W CRDC320T52W CRDC320T54W CRDC320T55W CRDC320T56W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29885 for Digitrip 510 Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. CRD316T55SW
R Frame 2011 Page 81 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
82 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-9
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Digitrip RMS 610 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Rated
Current (In)
Catalogue
NumberLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600
RD316T61W RD316T63W RD316T62W RD316T64W RD316T65W RD316T66W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000
RD320T61W RD320T63W RD320T62W RD320T64W RD320T65W RD320T66W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
2500
RD325T61W RD325T63W RD325T62W RD325T64W RD325T65W RD325T66W 1600
2000
2500
RP6R25A160
RP6R25A200
RP6R25A250
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600
RDC316T61W RDC316T63W RDC316T62W RDC316T64W RDC316T65W RDC316T66W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000
RDC320T61W RDC320T63W RDC320T62W RDC320T64W RDC320T65W RDC320T66W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
2500
RDC325T61W RDC325T63W RDC325T62W RDC325T64W RDC325T65W RDC325T66W 1600
2000
2500
RP6R25A160
RP6R25A200
RP6R25A250
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29886 for Digitrip 610 Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. RD320T63SW
R Frame 2011 Page 82 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 83
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-10
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 610 Circuit Breakers
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at 75°C ampacity.
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Rated
Current (In)
Catalogue
NumberLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRD316T61W CRD316T63W CRD316T62W CRD316T64W CRD316T65W CRD316T66W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 CRD320T61W CRD320T63W CRD320T62W CRD320T64W CRD320T65W CRD320T66W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRDC316T61W CRDC316T63W CRDC316T62W CRDC316T64W CRDC316T65W CRDC316T66W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 CRDC320T61W CRDC320T63W CRDC320T62W CRDC320T64W CRDC320T65W CRDC320T66W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29886 for Digitrip 610 Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. CRD316T64SW
R Frame 2011 Page 83 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
84 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-11
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Digitrip RMS 810 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Rated
Current (In)
Catalogue
NumberLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 RD316T81W RD316T83W RD316T82W RD316T84W RD316T85W RD316T86W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 RD320T81W RD320T83W RD320T82W RD320T84W RD320T85W RD320T86W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T81W RD325T83W RD325T82W RD325T84W RD325T85W RD325T86W 1600
2000
2500
RP6R25A160
RP6R25A200
RP6R25A250
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 RDC316T81W RDC316T83W RDC316T82W RDC316T84W RDC316T85W RDC316T86W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T81W RDC320T83W RDC320T82W RDC320T84W RDC320T85W RDC320T86W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T81W RDC325T83W RDC325T82W RDC325T84W RDC325T85W RDC325T86W 1600
2000
2500
RP6R25A160
RP6R25A200
RP6R25A250
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29888 for Digitrip 810 Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. RD316T86SW
R Frame 2011 Page 84 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 85
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-12
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 810 Circuit Breakers
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at 75°C ampacity.
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Rated
Current (In)
Catalogue
NumberLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRD316T81W CRD316T83W CRD316T82W CRD316T84W CRD316T85W CRD316T86W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 CRD320T81W CRD320T83W CRD320T82W CRD320T84W CRD320T85W CRD320T86W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRDC316T81W CRDC316T83W CRDC316T82W CRDC316T84W CRDC316T85W CRDC316T86W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 CRDC320T81W CRDC320T83W CRDC320T82W CRDC320T84W CRDC320T85W CRDC320T86W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29888 for Digitrip 810 Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. CRD320T81SW
R Frame 2011 Page 85 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
86 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-13
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Digitrip RMS 910 Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Rated
Current (In)
Catalogue
NumberLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 RD316T91W RD316T93W RD316T92W RD316T94W RD316T95W RD316T96W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 RD320T91W RD320T93W RD320T92W RD320T94W RD320T95W RD320T96W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
2500 RD325T91W RD325T93W RD325T92W RD325T94W RD325T95W RD325T96W 1600
2000
2500
RP6R25A160
RP6R25A200
RP6R25A250
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 RDC316T91W RDC316T93W RDC316T92W RDC316T94W RDC316T95W RDC316T96W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 RDC320T91W RDC320T93W RDC320T92W RDC320T94W RDC320T95W RDC320T96W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
2500 RDC325T91W RDC325T93W RDC325T92W RDC325T94W RDC325T95W RDC325T96W 1600
2000
2500
RP6R25A160
RP6R25A200
RP6R25A250
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29889 for Digitrip 910 Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. RD325T92SW
R Frame 2011 Page 86 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 87
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-14
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
100% Rated Digitrip RMS 910 Circuit Breakers
The CEC allows the breaker to be rated at 100% of its frame size in an assembly, provided that 90°C wire is applied at 75°C ampacity.
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only ➀Digitrip Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Rated
Current (In)
Catalogue
NumberLI LS LSI LIG LSG LSIG
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRD316T91W CRD316T93W CRD316T92W CRD316T94W CRD316T95W CRD316T96W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 CRD320T91W CRD320T93W CRD320T92W CRD320T94W CRD320T95W CRD320T96W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRDC316T91W CRDC316T93W CRDC316T92W CRDC316T94W CRDC316T95W CRDC316T96W 800
1000
1200
1600
RP6R16A080
RP6R16A100
RP6R16A120
RP6R16A160
2000 CRDC320T91W CRDC320T93W CRDC320T92W CRDC320T94W CRDC320T95W CRDC320T96W 1000
1200
1600
2000
RP6R20A100
RP6R20A120
RP6R20A160
RP6R20A200
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29889 for Digitrip 910 Trip Unit
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to circuit breaker frame catalogue number, RD and CRD only. ie. CRD316T91SW
R Frame 2011 Page 87 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
88 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-15
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Digitrip OPTIM Electronic Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
NumberLSIA 1050 LSIG 1050
Catalogue Number
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 RD316T107W RD316T106W 800
1000
1200
1600
ORPR16A080
ORPR16A100
0RPR16A120
0RPR16A160
2000 RD320T107W RD320T106W 1000
1200
1600
2000
0RPR20A100
0RPR20A120
0RPR20A160
0RPR20A200
2500 RD325T107W RD325T106W 1600
2000
2500
0RPR25A160
0RPR25A200
0RPR25A250
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 RDC316T107W RDC316T106W 800
1000
1200
1600
ORPR16A080
ORPR16A100
0RPR16A120
0RPR16A160
2000 RDC320T107W RDC320T106W 1000
1200
1600
2000
0RPR20A100
0RPR20A120
0RPR20A160
0RPR20A200
2500 RDC325T107W RDC325T106W 1600
2000
2500
0RPR25A160
0RPR25A200
0RPR25A250
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit
R Frame 2011 Page 88 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 89
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-16
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
100% Rated 600 Volt AC Digitrip OPTIM Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Rating Plugs
Order as individual components: Breaker Frame (which includes Trip Unit) and Rating Plug.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Circuit Breaker Frame Only Digitrip OPTIM Rating Plug Only
L – Adjustable Long Delay Pickup (Ir) with Adjustable Long Delay Time
S – Adjustable Short Delay Pickup with Adjustable Short Delay Time (I2t or Flat Response)
I – Adjustable Instantaneous Pickup
G – Adjustable Ground Fault Pickup with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
A – Adjustable Ground Fault Alarm with Adjustable Ground Fault Time Delay (I2t or Flat Response)
Fixed Rating Plug
Ampere
Rating
Catalogue
NumberLSIA 1050 LSIG 1050
3-Pole Standard Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 50 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRD316T107W CRD316T106W 800
1000
1200
1600
ORPR16A080
ORPR16A100
0RPR16A120
0RPR16A160
2000 CRD320T107W CRD320T106W 1000
1200
1600
2000
0RPR20A100
0RPR20A120
0RPR20A160
0RPR20A200
3-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 600 Volt Ac Rated 65 kAIC @ 600 Vac
1600 CRDC316T107W CRDC316T106W 800
1000
1200
1600
ORPR16A080
ORPR16A100
0RPR16A120
0RPR16A160
2000 CRDC320T107W CRDC320T106W 1000
1200
1600
2000
0RPR20A100
0RPR20A120
0RPR20A160
0RPR20A200
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C107 and 29C713 for Breaker; Number 29C891 for OPTIM Trip Unit
R Frame 2011 Page 89 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
90 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-17
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Note: Moulded case switch may trip above 17500 amperes.
Moulded Case Switches
Moulded case switches are used as compact switches in applications requiring high current switching capabilities. Moulded case
switches are constructed of circuit breaker components and are of the high instantaneous automatic type. Moulded case switches
are listed in accordance with CSA C22.2 No. 5 and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Standard UL 489 suitable for reverse feed use, and
as 100% rated devices.
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
@ 40°C
Complete without Terminals
3-Pole 4-Pole
Catalogue Number
1600 Type RD - High Instantaneous (K)
RD316WK RD416WK
2000 Type RD - High Instantaneous (K)
RD320WK RD420WK
2500 Type RD - High Instantaneous (K)
--
Moulded Case
Switch
Type
Number
of
Poles
Unfused Short Circuit Withstand Rating (Symmetrical
Amperes) (kA)
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)
240 480 600
RD 3,4 125 65 50
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C106 for Moulded Case Switch
R Frame 2011 Page 90 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 91
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-18
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Line and Load Terminals
Line and load terminals provide wire
connecting capabilities for specific
ranges of continuous current ratings and
wire types. All terminals comply with
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
Standards UL486A and UL486B and CSA
C22.2 No. 65. Unless otherwise
specified, R-frame circuit breaker line
load terminals are shipped separately for
field installation.
Ordering Information
R-frame circuit breakers have Cu/AI
terminals as standard and Cu only
terminals as an option. Specify if
factory installation is required.
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Terminal
Body Material
Wire
Type
Hardware AWG/kcmil Wire
Range/No. Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2Catalogue
Number
Wire Terminals
1600
1600
2000
Aluminum
Copper
Aluminum
Cu/AI
Cu
Cu/AI
English
English
English
500-1000 (4)
1-600 (4)
2-600 (6)
300-500
50-300
35-300
TA1600RD
T1600RD
TA2000RD ➀
Rear Connectors
2000
2000
2500
Copper
Copper
Copper
–
–
–
English
English
English
–
–
–
–
–
–
B2016RD
B2016RDL ➁
B2500RD ➂
Rear Connector (Cu)
B2016RD
B2016RDL (For 100% Appl.
(For 1600 A & 2000 A Frames)
B2500RD (For 2500 A Frame)
TA2000RD
Breaker Line/Load
Conductors
TA2000RD
Catalogue number includes bus connection, terminals,
and hardware for either line side or load side of 3-pole
breaker. Terminal rating: AL9CU.
For use with 100% rated 1600A and 2000A frame. Do not order
separately unless for replacement purposes. Is included in
breaker carton when 100% rated device is ordered.
For use with 2500-amp frame. Do not order separately
unless for replacement purposes. Included in breaker
carton when 2500A breaker is ordered.
R Frame 2011 Page 91 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
92 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
R-19
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
800-2500 Amperes R-Frame
Allowable Accessory Combinations
Different combinations of accessories can be supplied, depending on the types of accessories and the number of poles in the circuit
breaker.
Description
Reference
Page
3-Pole 4-Pole
Left Centre Right Left Centre Right Neu.
Internal Accessories
Alarm Lockout (Make/Break) INTA-4 ■■
Alarm Lockout (2Make/2Break) INTA-4 ■■
Auxiliary Switch (2A, 2B) INTA-7 ■■
Auxiliary Switch (4A, 4B) INTA-7 ■■
Shunt Trip – Standard INTA-14 ■■
Shunt Trip – Low Energy INTA-15 ■■
Undervoltage Release Mechanism INTA-22 ■■
Accessory Terminal Block INTA-23 ■■
External Accessories
Base Mounting Hardware EXTA-5
Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp EXTA-11 ●●
Key Interlock Kit EXTA-12 ■■■■■■
Walking Beam Interlock EXTA-13
Electrical (Motor) Operator EXTA-15 ■■■■■■
Drawout Cassette EXTA-6 ●●●
Handle Mechanisms EXTA-21 ■■■■■■
Handle Extension EXTA-27 ■■
Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test Kit (310 Only) EXTA-28 ●●●●●●●
OPTIM System Components
Breaker Interface Module (BIM) EXTA-29 ●
Digitrip OPTIMizer EXTA-29 ●
Auxiliary Power Module EXTA-29 ●
Modifications (Refer to Eaton)
Special Calibration 1.2 ●●●●●●●
Moisture Fungus Treatment 1.2 ●●●●●●●
Freeze-Tested Circuit Breakers 1.2 ●●●●●●●
Marine Application 1.2 ●●●●●●●
All accessories mount to the RH cavity which will accept one each shunt strip, UVR, auxiliary switch and alarm switch.
Mounts outside breaker.
Included with breaker.
■Applicable in indicated pole position ●Accessory available/Modification available
R Frame 2011 Page 92 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:31 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
93
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
MCP-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Circuit Protectors
Motor Circuit Protectors
Product Description
Designated as Eaton Types GMCP, HMCP, the instantaneous-
only motor circuit protector (MCP) is available in ratings from 3A
to 1200A for motor starter sizes 0 through 8. The MCP is designed to
comply with the applicable requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. Standard UL489, Canadian Standards Association
Standard C22.2 No. 5, and International Electrotechnical Commission
Recommendations IEC 157-1.
An innovative design of internal components allows higher MCP-
starter combination interrupting ratings. The MCP is marked to
permit proper electrical application within the assigned
equipment ratings.
The MCP is a recognized component (UL File E7819) and
complies with the applicable requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. Standard UL489. It is also designed to comply
with the applicable requirements of Canadian Standards
Association Standard C22.2 No. 5, International Electrotechnical
Commission Recommendations IEC 157-1, and nameplates bear
the CE marking
➀
.
Note:
Interrupting ratings are dependent on the starter it is used with.
Available with MCP labelled from Eaton in U.S.A. only.
MCP’s 2011 Page 93 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:33 PM
94 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
MCP-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Circuit Protectors
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an aid to understanding Catalogue numbers. It is not to be used to build Catalogue numbers for
circuit breakers or trip units.
MCP-3
Motor Circuit Protector Catalogue Number
HMCP 003 A0 C
Motor Circuit
Protective Type
HMCP
: 3 Poles
HM2P
: 2 Poles
➀
HMCPS
: 3 Poles
Continuous
Ampere Rating
003
007
015
025
030
050
070
100
150
250
400
600
Magnetic Trip
Range/NEMA Starter Size
A0
: 9-30/0
C0
: 21-70/0
E0
: 45-150/0
D0
: 40-60/0
H1
: 90-300/1
G2
: 80-120/2
K2
: 150-500/2
J2
: 115-170/2
M2
: 210-700/2
L3
: 160-240/3
R3
: 300-1000/3
T4
: 450-1500/4
U4
: 750-2500/4
A5
: 350-700/5
C5
: 450-900/5
D5
: 500-1000/5
F5
: 625-1250/5
G5
: 750-1500/5
J5
: 875-1750/5
K5
: 1000-2000/5
L5
: 1125-2250/5
W5
: 1250-2500/5
N5
: 1500-3000/5
R5
: 1750-3500/5
X5
: 2000-4000/5
Y5
: 2250-4500/5
L6
: 1800-6000/6
(Electronic)
X6
: 500-2500/6
(Electronic)
Y6
: 1000-4000/6
(Electronic)
X7
: 1600-6400/7
(Electronic)
Y8
: 2400-9600/8
(Electronic)
Suffix
C
: Non-Aluminum Terminals
W
: Without Terminals - (L, N Frames Only)
S
: Visa Window
➁
(F, J, K, L Frames Only)
No Suffix
: Aluminum Terminals (F, J Frames only)
Without Terminals (K Frame only)
GMCP 003 A0 C
Motor Circuit
Protective Device
GMCP
:3 Poles
Continuous
Ampere Rating
003
007
015
030
050
060
063
Magnetic Trip
Range/NEMA
Starter Size
A0
:15-30/0
C0
:35-70/0
E0
:75-150/0
H1
:150-300/1
K2
:250-500/2
J2
:300-600/2
M2
:320-630/2
Suffix
C
: Non-Aluminum
Terminals
On J and K Frame HMCP’s only.
When a “VISA” frame is required, add suffix “S” to MCP Catalogue number. ie. HMCP100R3S, HMCP250A5S, HMCP400D5S, HMCP600L6S.
MCP’s 2011 Page 94 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:33 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
95
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
MCP-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Circuit Protectors
G-Frame
600Y/347 Vac and 480 Vac , 250 Vdc Maximum
Modifications for GMCP
Internal Accessories
These modifications must be factory installed
➂
Note:
No UVR available on GMCP.
Instruction Leaflet 15552 for Alarm Switch
Instruction Leaflet 15551 for Auxiliary Switch
Instruction Leaflet 15550 for Shunt Trip
Instruction Leaflet 29C191 (DIN Rail Adapter)
MCP
Catalogue
Number
NEMA
Starter
Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➀
MCP Trip
Setting
➁
GMCP003A0C
03
A
B
C
D
E
F
1.1 -1.2
1.3 -1.5
1.6 -1.7
1.8 -1.9
2.0 -2.2
2.3-2.5
15
18
21
24
27
30
GMCP007C0C
07
A
B
C
D
E
F
2.6 -3.1
3.2-3.6
3.7-3.9
4.3 -4.7
4.8 -5.2
5.3 -5.7
35
42
49
56
63
70
GMCP015E0C
015
A
B
C
D
E
F
5.7 -6.8
6.9-7.9
8.0-9.1
9.2-10.3
10.4-11.4
11.5-12.6
75
90
105
120
135
150
GMCP030H1C
130
A
B
C
D
E
F
11.5-13.7
13.8-16.0
16.1-18.3
18.4-20.6
20.7-22.9
23.0-25.2
150
180
210
240
270
300
GMCP050K2C
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
19.3-22.9
23.0-26.8
26.9-30.6
30.7-34.5
34.6-38.3
38.4-42.1
250
300
350
400
450
500
GMCP060J2C
360
A
B
C
D
E
F
23.1-27.5
27.7-32.2
32.3-36.7
36.9-41.4
41.5-46.0
46.2-50.5
300
360
420
480
540
600
GMCP063M2C
363
A
B
C
D
E
F
24.2-32.1
29.1-34.8
33.9-39.4
38.8-46.4
43.6-48.9
48.5-53.7
320
380
440
500
570
630
Type
Accessory
Electrical Ratings Contact
Arrangement
Style
Number
Factory
SuffixVolts Frequency Amperes
Shunt Trip
➃
Shunt Trip
➃
120
240
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
1.1
2.1
1373D62G18
1373D62G19
S5
S6
Auxiliary Switch
➄
Auxiliary Switch
➄
240
240
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
6.0
6.0
1a/1b
2a/2b
1288C74G03
1288C73G03
A3
A6
Alarm Switch
➄
240 50/60 Hz 6.0 Make/Break
1288C75G03 B3
Auxiliary Switch
➄
/Alarm Switch
Combination
240 50/60 Hz 6.0 1a/1b and
Make/Break
1288C76G09 B13
External Mounted Accessories
Description
Number Units
in Package Style Number
Lock Dog (Non-Padlockable)
Mounting Hardware
DIN Rail Adapter
➅
1
1
1
1294C01H01
624B375G23
1225C79G02
Vari-Depth Handle Mechanism
➆
Description Catalogue Number
For Type 1 use
For Type 3R, 4X, 12 use
Close Coupled Black with Gray Handle
Close Coupled Red with Yellow Handle
HRGMV11L
HRGMV14L
HRGMC10
HRGMC30
Instruction Leaflet 15579
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an
intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
Only one accessory may be installed in LH or RH of GMCP.
LH only.
RH only.
For use with standard 35 mm DIN rail such as, 35 x 7.5 or 15 mm per DIN EN50022.
For use with GMCP only.
Note:
All GMCP 3 - 63A come with line and load steel body
terminals for Cu only wire.
MCP’s 2011 Page 95 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:33 PM
96 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
MCP-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Circuit Protectors
F-Frame
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
F-Frame
(Continued)
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
Instruction Leaflet 29C401
Note:
For HMCP 3 - 150A with suffix “C”, 3 - 100A units come with line
and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. 150A unit comes with line and
load stainless steel body terminals, 3T150FB.
Instruction Leaflet 29C407
Note:
HMCP 25 - 100A come with line and load steel body terminals,
3T100FB.
MCP
Catalogue
Number
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➀
MCP Trip
Setting
➁
HMCP003A0C
03
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
.69-.91
.92-1.0
1.1-1.2
1.3-1.5
1.6-1.7
1.8-1.9
2.0-2.2
2.3-2.5
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
HMCP007C0C
07
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1.5-2.0
2.1-2.5
2.6-3.1
3.2-3.6
3.7-3.9
4.3-4.7
4.8-5.2
5.3-5.7
21
28
35
42
49
56
63
70
HMCP015E0C
015
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
3.4-4.5
4.6-5.6
5.7-6.8
6.9-7.9
8.0-9.1
9.2-10.3
10.4-11.4
11.5-12.6
45
60
75
90
105
120
135
150
HMCP030H1C
130
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
6.9-9.1
9.2-11.4
11.5-13.7
13.8-16.0
16.1-18.3
18.4-20.6
20.7-22.9
23.0-25.2
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
HMCP050K2C
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
11.5-15.2
15.3-19.1
19.2-22.9
23.0-26.8
26.9-30.6
30.7-34.5
34.6-38.3
38.4-42.1
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
HMCP070M2C
270
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
16.1-21.4
21.5-26.8
26.9-32.2
32.3-37.5
37.6-42.9
43.0-48.3
48.4-53.7
53.8-59.1
210
280
350
420
490
560
630
700
HMCP100R3C
3 100
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
23.0-30.6
30.7-38.3
38.4-46.0
46.1-53.7
53.8-61.4
61.5-69.1
69.2-76.8
76.9-84.5
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
MCP
Catalogue
Number
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➀
MCP Trip
Setting
➁
HMCP150T4C
4 150
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
34.6-46.0
46.1-57.5
57.6-69.1
69.2-80.6
80.7-92.2
92.3-103.7
103.8-115.2
115.3-126.7
450
600
750
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
HMCP150U4C
4 150
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
57.0-75.0
76.0-95.0
96.0-114.0
115.0-130.7
➂
➂
➂
➂
750
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
Special Low Magnetic Protection Application MCP
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
MCP
Catalogue
Number
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
MCP Trip
Setting
➁
HMCPO25D0C
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25A
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
40
43
46
49
52
55
58
60
HMCP050G2C
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
50A
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
80
87
93
98
103
109
115
120
HMCP070J2C
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
70A
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
115
122
130
139
145
153
160
170
HMCP100L3C
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
100A
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
160
174
185
196
207
218
229
240
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate
cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
For Dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. C.E.C. 28-602 requires the ampere
rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere
rating.
MCP’s 2011 Page 96 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:33 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
97
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
MCP-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Circuit Protectors
MCPs for Application with Motor Starters Equipped with
Electronic Overload Relays
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
Instruction Leaflet 29C401
Type ELC Current Limiter Attachment (Size 0-4)
The type ELC current limiter attachment for the MCP is
designed to provide increased interrupting capacity. The
combination may be used for the application up to 200,000A
symmetrical at 600 Vac making the MCP suitable for use in
network distribution systems or other applications where
unusually high fault currents are available. The current limiter
connects to the load end of the MCP and is provided with
terminals suitable for copper or aluminum conductors.
(See table).
Limiters are coordinated with the MCP so that normal fault
currents are interrupted automatically by the MCP without any
damage to the limiter. Only the rare very high fault is opened by
the limiter. Faults that are interrupted by the limiter
also
magnetically trip the MCP, open
ing all three poles, preventing
single-phase operation.
Each of the three poles of the type ELC limiter is equipped with
an indicator that extends when a fault is interrupted by the
limiter.
Instruction Leaflet 29C401
MCP
Catalogue
Number
➀
NEMA
Starter
Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➁
MCP Trip
Setting
➂
HMCPS003A0C
03
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
.69 - .91
.92 -1.0
1.1-1.2
1.3-1.5
1.6-1.7
1.8-1.9
2.0-2.2
2.3-2.5
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
HMCPS007C0C
07
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1.5-2.0
2.1-2.5
2.6-3.1
3.2-3.6
3.7-3.9
4.3-4.7
4.8-5.2
5.3-5.7
21
28
35
42
49
56
63
70
HMCPS015E0C
015
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
3.4-4.5
4.6-5.6
5.7-6.8
6.9-7.9
8.0-9.1
9.2-10.3
10.4-11.4
11.5-12.6
45
60
75
90
105
120
135
150
HMCPS030H1C
130
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
6.9-9.1
9.2-11.4
11.5-13.7
13.8-16.0
16.1-18.3
18.4-20.6
20.7-22.9
23.0-25.2
90
120
150
180
210
240
270
300
HMCPS050K2C
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
11.5-15.2
15.3-19.1
19.2-22.9
23.0-26.8
26.9-30.6
30.7-34.5
34.6-38.3
38.4-42.1
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
HMCPS100R3C
3 100
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
23.0-30.6
30.7-38.3
38.4-46.0
46.1-53.7
53.8-61.4
61.5-69.1
69.2-76.8
76.9-84.5
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
HMCPS150T4C
4 150
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
34.6-46.0
46.1-57.5
57.6-69.1
69.2-80.6
80.7-92.2
92.3-103.7
103.8-115.2
115.3-126.7
450
600
750
900
1050
1200
1350
1500
HMCPS150U4C
4 150
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
57.0-75.0
76.0-95.0
96.0-114.0
115.0-130.7
➃
➃
➃
➃
750
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
Type ELC Current Limiter Terminal Wire Sizes
➄
Type ELC Current
Limiter
Maximum
Amperes
Standard Aluminum Terminals Non-standard Terminals (Steel)
Wire Range
AWG Metric (mm
2
)
Wire Range
AWG Metric (mm
2
)
50
100
150
#14-2
#1-4/0
#1-4/0
2.5-35
50-95
50-95
#14-2
➅
–
–
2.5-35
–
–
ELC Current Limiter Attachment
MCP Rating (Amperes) Catalogue Number
3
7
15
30
50
100
150
ELC3003R
ELC3007R
ELC3015R
ELC3030R
ELC3050R
ELC3100R
ELC3150R
HMCPS 3-100A come with line and load steel body terminals, 3T100FB. HMCPS 150A comes
with line and load steel body terminals, 3T150FB.
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA
value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate
cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
For Dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
Settings above 130 amperes are for special applications. C.E.C. 28-602 requires the ampere
rating of the disconnecting means to be not less than 115% of the motor full load ampere
rating.
Terminal wire connectors are UL listed for standard stranded wire sizes as defined in UL486A
or UL486B and CSA Standard C22.2 No. 65.
Optional on special order for copper cable only.
MCP’s 2011 Page 97 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:33 PM
98 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
MCP-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Circuit Protectors
Instruction Leaflet 29C402
J-Frame
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
MCP
Catalogue
Number ➀
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➁
MCP Trip
Setting ➂
HMCP250A5
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
27.0-30.7
30.8-33.8
33.9-36.9
37.0-40.3
40.4-43.8
43.9-46.9
47.0-50.7
50.8-53.8
53.9-57.2
350
400
440
480
525
570
610
660
700
HMCP250C5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
34.7-38.8
38.9-43.4
43.5-47.6
47.7-52.2
52.3-56.5
56.6-60.7
60.8-64.9
65.0-69.2
69.3-73.5
450
505
565
620
680
735
790
845
900
HMCP250D5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
38.5-43.4
43.5-48.0
48.1-53.0
53.1-57.6
57.7-62.3
62.4-67.3
67.4-71.9
72.0-76.9
77.0-81.6
500
565
625
690
750
810
875
935
1000
HMCP250F5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
48.1-53.8
53.9-59.9
60.0-66.1
66.2-72.3
72.4-78.4
78.5-83.8
83.9-89.9
90.0-96.1
96.2-102.0
625
700
780
860
940
1020
1090
1170
1250
HMCP250G5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
57.7-64.6
64.7-71.9
72.0-79.2
79.3-86.5
86.6-93.8
93.9-101.1
101.2-108.4
108.5-115.3
115.4-122.4
750
840
935
1030
1125
1220
1315
1410
1500
MCP
Catalogue
Number ➀
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➁
MCP Trip
Setting ➂
HMCP250J5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
67.4-75.3
75.4-83.8
83.9-92.3
92.4-100.7
100.8-109.2
109.3-117.6
117.7-126.1
126.2-134.6
134.7-142.8
875
980
1090
1200
1310
1420
1530
1640
1750
HMCP250K5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
77.0-86.6
86.6-96.1
96.2-105.7
105.8-115.3
115.4-124.9
125.0-134.6
134.7-144.2
144.3-153.8
153.9-163.3
1000
1125
1250
1375
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
HMCP250L5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
86.6-97.3
97.4-108.4
108.5-118.8
118.9-129.9
130.0-140.7
140.8-151.5
151.6-162.3
162.4-173.0
173.1-183.6
1125
1265
1410
1545
1690
1830
1970
2110
2250
HMCP250W5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
250
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
96.2-108.0
108.1-119.9
120.0-132.3
132.4-144.2
144.3-156.1
156.2-168.0
168.1-179.9
180.0-192.3
192.4-204.0
1250
1405
1560
1720
1875
2030
2185
2340
2500
Three-pole Catalogue numbers shown. Two-pole Catalogue numbers begin with”HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an
intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
For Dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
MCP’s 2011 Page 98 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:33 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 99
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
MCP-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Circuit Protectors
Instruction Leaflet 29C403
K-Frame
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum
MCP
Catalogue
Number ➀
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➁
MCP Trip
Setting ➂
HMCP400A5C
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
27.0 – 30.7
30.8 – 33.8
33.9 – 36.9
37.0 – 40.3
40.4 – 43.8
43.9 – 46.9
47.0 – 50.7
50.8 – 53.8
53.9 – 57.2
350
400
440
480
525
570
610
660
700
HMCP400D5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
38.5-43.4
43.5-48.0
48.1-53.0
53.1-57.6
57.7-62.3
62.4-67.3
67.4-71.9
72.0-76.9
77.0-81.6
500
565
626
690
750
810
875
935
1000
HMCP400F5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
48.1-53.8
53.9-59.9
60.0-66.1
66.2-72.3
72.4-78.4
78.5-83.8
83.9-89.9
90.0-96.1
96.2-102.0
625
700
780
860
940
1020
1090
1170
1250
HMCP400G5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
57.7-64.6
64.7-71.9
72.0-79.2
79.3-86.5
86.6-93.8
93.9-101.1
101.2-108.4
108.5-115.3
115.4-122.4
750
840
935
1030
1125
1220
1315
1410
1500
HMCP400J5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
67.4-75.3
75.4-83.8
83.9-92.3
92.4-100.7
100.8-109.2
109.3-117.6
117.7-126.1
126.2-134.6
134.7-142.8
875
980
1090
1200
1310
1420
1530
1640
1750
HMCP400K5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
77.0-86.5
86.6-96.1
96.2-105.7
105.8-115.3
115.4-124.9
125.0-134.6
134.7-144.2
144.3-153.8
153.9-163.3
1000
1125
1250
1375
1500
1625
1750
1875
2000
MCP
Catalogue
Number ➀
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➁
MCP Trip
Setting ➂
HMCP400L5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
86.6-97.3
97.4-108.4
108.5-118.8
118.9-129.9
130.0-140.7
140.8-151.5
151.6-162.3
162.4-173.0
173.1-183.6
1125
1265
1410
1545
1690
1830
1970
2110
2250
HMCP400W5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
96.2-108.0
108.1-119.9
120.0-132.3
132.4-144.2
144.3-156.1
156.2-168.0
168.1-179.9
180.0-192.3
192.4-204.0
1250
1405
1560
1720
1875
2030
2185
2340
2500
HMCP400N5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
115.4-129.9
130.0-144.2
144.3-158.4
158.5-173.0
173.1-187.6
187.7-201.9
202.0-216.1
216.2-230.7
230.8-244.9
1500
1690
1875
2060
2250
2440
2625
2810
3000
HMCP400R5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
134.7-151.5
151.6-168.4
168.5-185.3
185.4-201.9
202.0-218.8
218.9-235.7
235.8-252.6
252.7-269.2
269.3-285.7
1750
1970
2190
2410
2625
2845
3065
3285
3500
HMCP400X5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
153.9-173.0
173.1-192.3
192.4-211.5
211.6-230.7
230.8-249.9
250.0-269.2
269.3-288.4
288.5-307.6
307.7-326.9
2000
2250
2500
2750
3000
3250
3500
3750
4000
HMCP400Y5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
400
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
173.1 - 194.5
194.6 - 216.1
216.2 - 237.6
237.7 - 259.5
259.6 - 281.1
281.2 - 302.6
302.7 - 324.1
324.2 - 346.1
346.2 - 368.1
2250
2530
2810
3090
3375
3655
3935
4215
4500
Three-pole Catalogue numbers shown. Two-pole Catalogue numbers begin with”HM2P” in place of “HMCP.”
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an
intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
For Dc applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown.
MCP’s 2011 Page 99 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:33 PM
100 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
MCP-8
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Circuit Protectors
L-Frame
➀
Instruction Leaflet 29C404
Note: All HMCP 600A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page L-11 in the L-Frame MCCB section.
N-Frame
➀
Note: All HMCP 800A and 1200A come without terminals. For terminals, see Page N-12 in the N-Frame MCCB section.
600 Vac Maximum
MCP
Catalogue
Number
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➁
MCP Trip
Setting
HMCP600L6W
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
600
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
138.5 - 184.5
184.6 - 230.7
230.8 - 276.8
276.9 - 323.0
323.1 - 369.1
369.2 - 415.3
415.4 - 461.4
461.5 - 507.7
1800
2400
3000
3600
4200
4800
5400
6000
HMCP600X6W
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
600
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
38.5 - 46.1
46.2 - 61.4
61.5 - 76.8
76.9 - 96.1
96.2 - 115.3
115.4 - 153.7
153.8 - 192.2
192.3 - 230.7
500
600
800
1000
1250
1500
2000
2500
HMCP600Y6W
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
600
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
76.9 - 96.1
96.2 - 115.3
115.4 - 153.7
153.8 - 192.2
192.3 - 230.7
230.8 - 269.1
269.2 - 307.6
307.7 - 346.1
1000
1250
1500
2000
3500
3000
3500
4000
600 Vac Maximum
MCP
Catalogue
Number
NEMA
Starter Size
Continuous
Amperes
Cam
Setting
Motor Full Load
Amperes
➁
MCP Trip
Setting
HMCP800X7W
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
800
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
123.1 - 184.5
184.6 - 246.1
246.2 - 307.6
307.7 - 369.1
369.2 - 430.7
430.8 - 492.2
492.3 - 553.7
1600
2400
3200
4000
4800
5600
6400
HMCP12Y8W
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1200
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
184.6 - 276.8
276.9 - 369.1
369.2 - 461.4
461.5 - 553.7
553.8 - 646.1
646.2 - 738.4
738.5 - 830.7
2400
3600
4800
6000
7200
8400
9600
Equipped with electronic trip device.
Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an
intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used.
MCP’s 2011 Page 100 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:33 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
101
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
MPCB-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCB)
Product Description
Motor protection circuit
breakers (MPCBs) provide
CSA C22.2 No.5 and UL 489
branch circuit protection, UL
508 and CSA C22.2 No. 14
motor protection, and meet
IEC 60947-2 and 50947-4
requirements. Typical branch
motor loads are protected by
three-component starters,
consisting of breaker,
contactor and overload
relay, or fuse, contactor and
overload relay. The MPCB
application-specific protection
eliminates the need for motor
overload relay found in the
traditional three-component
starter assembly. The branch
motor load protection is
simplified to an MPCB and
contactor, reducing both
space requirements and
heat generation in customer
panels. Protection is provided
by application-specific
electronic trip units.
The electronic trip unit
provides typical motor
overload relay functionality
and short-circuit protection
against potential phase-to-
phase or phase-to-ground
faults.
●
Disconnecting means
●
Branch circuit short-circuit
protection
●
Overload protection
●
Class 5, 10, 15 and 20
●
Phase unbalance
protection
●
FDMP breaker trips
when there is a 40%
difference between any
phase compared to the
calculated three-phase
average
●
Phase loss protection
●
Active when the
maximum phase current
is greater than 50% of
FLA setting
●
Breaker will trip when
minimum phase current
is 25% or less than the
maximum phase current
●
Time delay of 1 or
2 seconds before
breaker trips
●
Thermal memory to
prevent immediate restart
after overload trip to allow
motor to cool down
The MPCB is based on
the Series C F-Frame.
Accessories for standard
Series C breakers apply to the
MPCB. Unlike Motor Circuit
Protectors (MCPs), MPCBs
are UL 489 and CSA C22.2
No.5 listed with 18 kA and
25 kA interruption ratings
@ 600 Vac.
MPCB 2011.fm Page 101 Monday, September 19, 2011 8:18 PM
102 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
MPCB-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
FDMP and HFDMP
Technical Data and Specifications
Specifications
Note
IEC ratings available only on FWMP and HFWMP.
Continuous Amperes
18 kA Without Phase Unbalance,
Class 10 Motor Protection Only
18 kA With Phase
Unbalance and Adjustable
Motor Class Protection
25 kA Without Phase Unbalance,
Class 10 Motor Protection Only
25 kA With Phase
Unbalance and Adjustable
Motor Class Protection
80
FDMP3080L FDMP3080JL HFDMP3080L HFDMP3080JL
100
FDMP3100L FDMP3100JL HFDMP3100L HFDMP3100JL
160
FDMP3160L FDMP3160JL HFDMP3160L HFDMP3160JL
205
FDMP3205L FDMP3205JL HFDMP3205L HFDMP3205JL
Feature FDMP HFDMP
Interruption rating at 240V 65 kA 100 kA
Interruption rating at 480V 35 kA 65 kA
Interruption rating at 600V 18 kA 25 kA
Icu/Ics at 240V 65 kA/33 kA
100 kA/50 kA
Icu/Ics at 415V 35 kA/18 kA
65 kA/33 kA
100% rated No No
FLA range (A) 40–205 40–205
Motor class protection 5, 10, 15, 20 5, 10, 15, 20
Phase unbalance protection (current)—active for phase current
>0.5 FLA setting
≥
40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds
≥
40% delta (single-phase): (three-phase avg.) for 5 seconds
Phase loss protection (current)—active for phase current
>0.5 FLA setting
Min. phase
≤
0.25 max. phase for 1 second Min. phase
≤
0.25 max. phase for 1 second
Thermal memory protection Yes Yes
High load indicator — —
Pre-detection relays — —
Internal accessories Factory installed Factory installed
Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR Aux. alarm, shunt trip, UVR
MPCB 2011.fm Page 102 Monday, September 19, 2011 8:18 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
103
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
ELCB-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
Typical Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
General Information
Earth Leakage Moulded Case Breakers
offer superior Class 1 ground fault
protection and improved ground fault
coordination capability, and are listed
under UL489 and 1053 as well as CSA
C22.2 No. 5 and 144 standards.
Earth leakage ground fault protection
differs from other types of systems in its
level of sensitivity. The sensitivity of
traditional devices is limited by the
cumulative error of the residual current
sensors and the placement of the phase
and neutral conductors inside the current
sensor.
Earth leakage breakers and motor
protectors are zero sequence sensing
devices. They are factory supplied with a
single sensor and ground fault relay built-
in. This technique allows for protection
sensitivities down to the 30 milliampere
level.
Earth leakage breakers and motor
protectors are provided with a full
complement of easy adjustments. The
ground fault pickup setting is adjustable
from 0.03 to 30 amperes in eight steps,
and the ground fault time delay setting is
adjustable from instantaneous to 2.0
seconds in six steps. When the pickup is
set to 30 mA, the time delay setting
defaults internally to instantaneous only.
Increased selectivity provides for
improved coordination with upstream
and downstream ground fault devices as
well as the flexibility to adjust for
transient currents.
Applications
Three-Phase, Four-Wire Loads
For three-phase applications with line-to-
neutral loads, select 4-pole earth leakage
breakers and wire the neutral through the
fourth (right) pole.
Three-Phase, Three-Wire Loads
For applications with only three-phase,
three-wire, line-to-line connected loads,
select 3-pole earth leakage breakers.
Single-Phase Loads
For single-phase, 3-wire applications, use
a 3-pole earth leakage breaker and
connect all conductors through the
breaker. For single-phase, 2-wire
applications, wire to L1 - L2 or L2 - L3.
General
Do not reverse feed. Do not apply on
400 Hz system. Voltage range: 110 - 480
Vac.
Standard Features
●
Built-in push-to-trip button for
functional testing.
●
Trip window indicates red when the
breaker has tripped on a ground fault.
●
Form C bell alarm contact
➀
for remote
indication when the breaker has
tripped under ground fault condition.
●
Lockable adjustment seal helps
prevent tampering with settings.
●
Line and load terminals for bare cable
connections.
Accessories
Optional Factory Installed
Internal Accessories
Earth leakage breakers use the same
internal accessories as standard F-, J-
and K-Frame Circuit Breakers. Internal
accessories fit in the right-hand pole
space and are available as factory
modifications only.
Optional External Accessories
Earth leakage breakers use the same
external accessories as the standard F-,
J- and K-Frame circuit breakers.
This Bell Alarm contact will not change state when the breaker has tripped on
overload or short circuit condition.
ELCB 2011 Page 103 Monday, September 19, 2011 8:36 PM
104 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
ELCB-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
Selection Guide and Ordering
F-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage
Ground Fault
Continuous Amperes Catalogue Number 3-Pole
3
➀
ELHMCP003A0C
7
➀
ELHMCP007C0C
15
➀
ELHMCP015E0C
25
➀
ELHMCP025X0C
30
➀
ELHMCP030H1C
50
ELHMCP050K2C
70
ELHMCP070M2C
100
ELHMCP100R3C
150
ELHMCP150T4C
150
ELHMCP150U4C
3
ELHMCP003A0LC
7
ELHMCP007C0LC
15
ELHMCP015E0LC
25
ELHMCP025D0C
30
ELHMCP030H1LC
50
ELHMCP050G2C
70
ELHMCP070J2C
100
ELHMCP100L3C
100
ELHMCP100K3C
HMCPs for Application with Motor Starters
Equipped with Electrical Overload Relays
3
➀
ELHMCPS003A0C
7
➀
ELHMCPS007C0C
15
➀
ELHMCPS015E0C
30
➀
ELHMCPS030H1C
50
ELHMCPS050K2C
100
ELHMCPS100R3C
150
ELHMCPS150T4C
150
ELHMCPS140U4C
J, K-Frame HMCP with Earth Leakage
Ground Fault
Continuous Amperes Catalogue Number 3-Pole
250
ELHMCP250A5
ELHMCP250C5
ELHMCP250D5
ELHMCP250F5
ELHMCP250G5
ELHMCP250J5
ELHMCP250K5
ELHMCP250L5
ELHMCP250W5
400
ELHMCP400D5
ELHMCP400F5
ELHMCP400G5
ELHMCP400J5
ELHMCP400K5
Information
F-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers – Catalogue Numbers
Amperes
25 kA at 480 VAC 65 kA at 480 VAC 100 kA at 480 VAC
3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
15
➀
20
➀
25
➀
30
➀
ELFD3015L
ELFD3020L
ELFD3025L
ELFD3030L
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ELHFD3015L
ELHFD3020L
ELHFD3025L
ELHFD3030L
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ELFDC3015L
ELFDC3020L
ELFDC3025L
ELFDC3030L
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
125
150
ELFD3035L
ELFD3040L
ELFD3045L
ELFD3050L
ELFD3060L
ELFD3070L
ELFD3080L
ELFD3090L
ELFD3100L
ELFD3110L
ELFD3125L
ELFD3150L
ELFD4035L
ELFD4040L
ELFD4045L
ELFD4050L
ELFD4060L
ELFD4070L
ELFD4080L
ELFD4090L
ELFD4100L
ELFD4110L
ELFD4125L
ELFD4150L
ELHFD3035L
ELHFD3040L
ELHFD3045L
ELHFD3050L
ELHFD3060L
ELHFD3070L
ELHFD3080L
ELHFD3090L
ELHFD3100L
ELHFD3110L
ELHFD3125L
ELHFD3150L
ELHFD4035L
ELHFD4040L
ELHFD4045L
ELHFD4050L
ELHFD4060L
ELHFD4070L
ELHFD4080L
ELHFD4090L
ELHFD4100L
ELHFD4110L
ELHFD4125L
ELHFD4150L
ELFDC3035L
ELFDC3040L
ELFDC3045L
ELFDC3050L
ELFDC3060L
ELFDC3070L
ELFDC3080L
ELFDC3090L
ELFDC3100L
ELFDC3110L
ELFDC3125L
ELFDC3150L
ELFDC4035L
ELFDC4040L
ELFDC4045L
ELFDC4050L
ELFDC4060L
ELFDC4070L
ELFDC4080L
ELFDC4090L
ELFDC4100L
ELFDC4110L
ELFDC4125L
ELFDC4150L
J-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers – Catalogue Numbers
Amperes
35 kA at 480 VAC 65 kA at 480 VAC 100 kA at 480 VAC
3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
ELJD3100
ELJD3125
ELJD3150
ELJD3175
ELJD3200
ELJD3225
ELJD3250
ELJD4100
ELJD4125
ELJD4150
ELJD4175
ELJD4200
ELJD4225
ELJD4250
ELHJD3100
ELHJD3125
ELHJD3150
ELHJD3175
ELHJD3200
ELHJD3225
ELHJD3250
ELHJD4100
ELHJD4125
ELHJD4150
ELHJD4175
ELHJD4200
ELHJD4225
ELHJD4250
ELJDC3100
ELJDC3125
ELJDC3150
ELJDC3175
ELJDC3200
ELJDC3225
ELJDC3250
ELJDC4100
ELJDC4125
ELJDC4150
ELJDC4175
ELJDC4200
ELJDC4225
ELJDC4250
K-Frame Earth Leakage Ground Fault Breakers – Catalogue Numbers
Amperes
35 kA at 480 VAC 65 kA at 480 VAC 100 kA at 480 VAC
3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
200
225
250
300
350
400
ELKD3200
ELKD3225
ELKD3250
ELKD3300
ELKD3350
ELKD3400
ELKD4200
ELKD4225
ELKD4250
ELKD4300
ELKD4350
ELKD4400
ELHKD3200
ELHKD3225
ELHKD3250
ELHKD3300
ELHKD3350
ELHKD3400
ELHKD4200
ELHKD4225
ELHKD4250
ELHKD4300
ELHKD4350
ELHKD4400
ELKDC3200
ELKDC3225
ELKDC3250
ELKDC3300
ELKDC3350
ELKDC3400
ELKDC4200
ELKDC4225
ELKDC4250
ELKDC4300
ELKDC4350
ELKDC4400
Standard Line and Load Terminals – Included with Breaker
Frame Wire Type
(Number) Range of
Conductors Terminal Material
F-Frame
F-Frame
35-100A
110-150A
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) #14-1/0
(1) #4-4/0
Steel
Stainless Steel
J-Frame 100-250A Cu/Al (1) #4-250 kcmil Aluminum
K-Frame
K-Frame
200-350A
400A
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(1) 250-500 kcmil
(2) 3/0-250 kcmil
Aluminum
Aluminum
The ground fault pickup setting is adjustable from 0.03 to 10 amperes.
Shaded gray areas denotes obsolete or discontinued products and services.
ELCB 2011 Page 104 Monday, September 19, 2011 8:36 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
105
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
ELCB-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers
Optional K-Frame Line and Load Terminals – Order Separately
Wire Type
(Number) Range of
Conductors Terminal Material Catalogue Number
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) 250 kcmil
(1) 500 kcmil
Aluminum
Aluminum
3TA401K
➀
Cu/Al
Cu/Al
(2) 250 kcmil
(1) 500 kcmil
Aluminum
Aluminum
4TA401K
➁
Cu (1) 3-350 kcmil Copper
T300K
Cu (1) 3-350 kcmil Copper
T300K
Cu (1) 250-500 kcmil Copper
T350K
Cu (1) 250-500 kcmil Copper
T350K
Cu (1) 3/0-250 kcmil Copper
3T400K
➀
Cu (1) 3/0-250 kcmil Copper
3T400K
➁
Package of 3 terminals.
Package of 4 terminals.
ELCB 2011 Page 105 Monday, September 19, 2011 8:36 PM
106 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories
Contents
Section
Page
Description Number
Internal Accessories
Alarm Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-2
Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-5
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination . . . . . . INTA-8
Shunt Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-10
Low Energy Shunt Trip. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-15
Undervoltage Release Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-16
Accessory Terminal Block (R-Frame) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-23
PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . INTA-23
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 106 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
107
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Alarm Switch
Alarm Switch General Information
For remote indication of automatic trip
operation. Does not function with manual
switching; however, it will operate when
either a shunt trip or undervoltage
release is operated.
A “make” contact closes and a “break”
contact opens when the alarm/lockout
switch operates. The switch
automatically resets when the circuit
breaker is reset.
Make
Break
Instruction Leaflet Number 15552
Alarm Switch
(RH 2-pole/ 3-pole)
Electrical Rating Contact
Arrangement
Style
Number
➁➂➃➈
Factory
SuffixVolts Frequency Amperes
Alarm Switch
240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/ 1 Break
1288C75G03 B3
Alarm Switch Auxiliary Switches Combination
240 50/60 Hz 6 1 Make/ 1 Break
and 1a/1b
1288C76G09 B13
F-Frame and HMCP (F)
Electrical Rating Data
➅
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50
➆
0.25
➆
2500
Single-Pole Circuit Breakers
125/250
28
28
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
➆
3
➆
5
➇
2000
Ordering Information
G-Frame
Note:
G-frame circuit breakers are
factory sealed. CSA and UL require
that internal accessories be installed at
the factory. Internal accessories are
CSA and UL listed for factory
installation.
Note:
F-frame circuit breakers are
factory sealed. CSA and UL require that
internal accessories be installed at the
factory. Internal accessories are CSA
and UL listed for factory
installation.
Endurance: 4000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads,18 AWG (16-.010).
A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.
Suitable for mounting in right pole only of 2- or 3-pole breaker.
Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers.
Endurance: 4000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
Non-inductive load.
Inductive (L/R = 0.026).
Not listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard pigtail lead exit location.
Standard mounting location.
Factory installation only. Leads exit load end of circuit breaker.
Pigtail Wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.8 mm2).
Pigtail leads exit right side of circuit breaker.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C180
Alarm Switch
Number of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted (F-Frame Breaker) (F-Frame HMCP)
Connection Type and Location Alarm Switch Kit
➈
Alarm Switch Kit
➈
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear
➉
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
Right
B01
B05
B02
B06
B03
B07
B04
B08
A1L1LPK
A1L1RPK
A1L1LTK
A1L1RTK
➄
MA1L1LPK
MA1L1RPK
MA1L1LTK
MA1L1RTK
2 Left
Right
B09
B12
B10
B13
–
–
B11
B14
A2L1LPK
A2L1RPK
A2L1LTK
A2L1RTK
➄
MA2L1LPK
MA2L1RPK
MA2L1LTK
MA2L1RTK
1 (Make
Only)
Single
Pole
B15
–––– – – –
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 107 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
108 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Alarm Switch
J-Frame and HMCP (J)
Electrical Rating Data
➀➁
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50
➂
0.25
➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C181
Alarm Switch
Number of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear
➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
➅
Right
B01
B05
B02
B06
B03
B07
B04
B08
A1L2LPK
A1L2RPK
A1L2LTK
A1L2RTK
➆
K-Frame and HMCP (K)
Electrical Rating Data
➁➇
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50
➂
0.25
➂
2500
L-, HMCP (L) and M-Frames
Electrical Rating Data
➁➇
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50
➂
0.25
➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C182
Alarm Switch
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear
➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
➅
Right
➈
B01
B05
B02
B06
B03
B07
B04
B08
A1L3LPK
A1L3RPK
A1L3LTK
A1L3RTK
➆
2 Left
➅
Right
➈
B09
B12
B10
B13
–
–
B11
B14
A2L3LPK
A2L3RPK
A2L3LTK
A2L3RTK
➆
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C183
Alarm Switch
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear
➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
➅
Right
➉
B01
B05
B02
B06
B03
B07
B04
B08
A1L4LPK
A1L4RPK
A1L4LTK
A1L4RTK
➆
2 Left
➅
Right
➉
B09
B12
B10
B13
–
–
B11
B14
A2L4LPK
A2L4RPK
A2L4LTK
A2L4RTK
➆
Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm
2
).
Non-inductive load.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard pigtail lead exit location, leads exit rear of breaker.
Standard mounting location.
Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers.
Endurance – 5,000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
For L-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 550 trip unit, installation of PowerNet or Zone
Interlock Kit restricts any other accessories from being installed in the right pole.
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 108 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
109
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Alarm Switch
N-Frame and HMCP (N)
Electrical Rating Data
➀➅
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50
➁
0.25
➁
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C184
Alarm Switch
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
➂
18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side
Rear
➃
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
Right
➃➈
B01
B05
B02
B06
B03
B07
B04
B08
A1L5LPK
A1L5RPK
A1L5LTK
A1L5RTK
➇
2 Left
Right
➃➈
B09
B12
B10
B13
–
–
B11
B14
A2L5LPK
A2L5RPK
A2L5LTK
A2L5RTK
➇
R-Frame
Electrical Rating Data
➄➅
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50
➁
0.25
➁
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C185
Alarm Switch (RH only)
Number of
Contacts
(Make and Break)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
➂
18-Inch Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Suffix Number
➆
Catalogue Number
➆
1
B05 A1L6RPK
2
B12 A2L6RPK
Endurance – 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Non-inductive load.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm
2
). Leads are red, black and blue.
A maximum of three ASL plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers.
For N-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 550 trip unit, installation of PowerNet or Zone Interlock Kit restricts any other accessories
from being installed in the right pole.
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 109 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
110 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch
Auxiliary Switch
General Information
The auxiliary switch provides circuit
breaker contact status information by
monitoring the position of the moulded
cross bar which contains the moving
contact arms. The auxiliary switch is
used for remote indication and interlock
system
verification, and consists of one or two
SPDT switches housed in a plug-in
module. Each SPDT switch has one “a”
and one “b” contact. When the circuit
breaker contacts are open, the “a”
contact is open and the “b” contact is
closed.
a
b
Ordering Information
G-Frame
Note:
G-frame circuit breakers are factory
sealed. CSA and UL require that internal
accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are CSA and UL
listed for factory installation.
Instruction Leaflet Number 15551
Auxiliary Switch
(RH 2-Pole / 3-Pole)
Electrical Ratings Contact
Arrangement
Style
Number
➀➁➂➇
Factory
SuffixVolts Frequency Amperes
240
240
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
6
6
1a/1b
2a/2b
1288C74G03
1288C73G03
A3
A6
F-Frame and HMCP (F)
Note:
F-frame circuit breakers are factory
sealed. CSA and UL require that internal
accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are CSA and UL listed
for factory installation.
Electrical Rating Data ➃➄
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
125 ➅
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
1
6
0.50 ➆
0.25 ➆
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C120
Auxiliary Switch
Number of
Contacts
(a and b)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location Auxiliary Switch Kits ➇
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➈
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left ➈
Right or
Neutral
A01
A15 ➉
A05
A18 ➉
A02
A16 ➉
A06
A19 ➉
A03
A17 ➉
A07
A20 ➉
A04
–
A08
–
A1X1PK
E1X1PK ➉
A1X1PK
E1X1PK
A1X1LTK
–
A1X1RTK
–
2 Left ➈
Right or
Neutral
A09
A21 ➉
A12
A23 ➉
A10
A22 ➉
A13
A24 ➉
–
–
–
–
A11
–
A14
–
A2X1LPK
E2X1LPK ➉
A2X1RPK
E2X1RPK ➉
A2X1LTK
–
A2X1RTK
–
Includes 24-inch external pigtail leads,
#18 AWG (16-.010).
A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted
in a three-pole circuit breaker.
Suitable for mounting in right pole only of
2- or 3-pole breaker.
Endurance: 4000 electrical operations plus 4000
mechanical operations.
Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
For use in electronic circuit of 100 micro-
amperes and 15 Vdc minimum.
Non-inductive load.
Not listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
125-volt (Max.), 50/60 Hz switch for use in electronic
circuit of 100 micro-amp and 15 Vdc minimum.
Suitable for use in the Neutral pole of a 4-pole circuit
breaker.
Pigtail leads exit right side of circuit breaker.
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 110 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 111
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch
J-Frame and HMCP (J)
Electrical Rating Data ➀➁
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C121
Auxiliary Switch
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(a and b)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted ➃
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
Right ➄
A01
A05
A02
A06
A03
A07
A04
A08
A1X2PK
A1X2PK
A1X2LTK
A1X2RTK ➅
2 Left
Right ➄
A09
A12
A10
A13
–
–
A11
A14
A2X2PK
A2X2PK
A2X2LTK
A2X2RTK ➅
K-Frame and HMCP (K)
Electrical Rating Data ➁➆
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C122
Auxiliary Switch
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(a and b)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
Right ➄➇
A01
A05
A02
A06
A03
A07
A04
A08
A1X3PK
A1X3PK
A1X3LTK
A1X3RTK ➅
2 Left
Right ➄➇
A09
A12
A10
A13
–
–
A11
A14
A2X3PK
A2X3PK
A2X3LTK
A2X3RTK ➅
3 Left
Right ➇
A18
A17
–
–
–
–
A15
A16
A3X3LPK
A3X3RPK
A3X3LTK
A3X3RTK ➅
Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
Non-inductive load.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
Suitable for use in the Neutral Pole of a 4-pole circuit breaker.
Endurance – 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 111 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
112 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch
L-, HMCP (L) and M-Frames
Electrical Rating Data ➀➁
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C123
Auxiliary Switch
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(a and b)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
Right ➄
A01
A05
A02
A06
A03
A07
A04
A08
A1X4PK
A1X4PK
A1X4LTK
A1X4RTK ➅
2 Left
Right ➄
A09
A12
A10
A13
–
–
A11
A14
A2X4PK
A2X4PK
A2X4LTK
A2X4RTK ➅
3 Left
Right ➄
A18
A17
–
–
–
–
A15
A16
A3X4PK
A3X4PK
A3X4LTK
A3X4RTK ➅
N-Frame and HMCP (N)
Electrical Rating Data ➁➆
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C124
Auxiliary Switch
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(a and b)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
Right ➄
A01
A05
A02
A06
A03
A07
A04
A08
A1X5PK
A1X5PK
A1X5LTK
A1X5RTK ➅
2 Left
Right ➄
A09
A12
A10
A13
–
–
A11
A14
A2X5PK
A2X5PK
A2X5LTK
A2X5RTK ➅
3 Left
Right ➄
A18
A17
–
–
–
–
A15
A16
A3X5LPK
A3X5RPK
A3X5LTK
A3X5RTK ➅
R-Frame
Electrical Rating Data ➇➈
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current Amperes
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C125
Auxiliary Switch (RH only)
Number of
Contacts
(a and b)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Suffix Number ➉Catalogue Number ➉
2A12 A2X6RPK
4A19 A4X6RPK
Endurance - 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
Non-inductive load.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
Suitable for use in the Neutral Pole of a 4-pole circuit breaker.
Endurance – 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Endurance: 500 electrical operations plus 2500 mechanical operations.
Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are red, black and blue.
A maximum of two auxiliary switches (any combination of 2a/2b or 4a/4b plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
For L-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 550 trip units, installation of PowerNet or Zone Interlock Kit restricts any other accessories from being installed in the right pole.
For N-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 550 trip units, installation of PowerNet or Zone Interlock Kit restricts any other accessories from being installed in the right pole.
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 112 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 113
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-8
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm
Switch Combination
a
b
General Information
Each catalogue number listed in the
following table includes one auxiliary
switch and one alarm switch. In an
auxiliary switch ASL switch combination,
the auxiliary switch is always mounted on
the side of the plug-in module next to the
centre pole of the circuit breaker.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C180
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted (F-Frame Breaker) (F-Frame HMCP)
Connection Type and Location Auxiliary Switch & Alarm Switch Combination Kit ➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
BlockSame Side Rear ➄Same Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
Left ➄
Right
C01
C04
C02
C05
C03
C06
AAL1LPK
AAL1RPK
AAL1LTK
AAL1RTK ➅
MAAL1LPK
MAAL1RPK
MAAL1LTK
MAAL1RTK ➅
Ordering Information
F-Frame and HMCP (F)
Note: F-frame circuit breakers are factory
sealed. CSA and UL require that internal
accessories be installed at the factory.
Internal accessories are CSA and UL
listed for factory installation.
Electrical Rating Data ➀➁
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
125
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
1
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
2500
2500
2200
2200
Endurance: 4000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical operations.
Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
Non-inductive load.
Not listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location.
Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers.
Endurance – 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
J-Frame
Electrical Rating Data ➆➁
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C181
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1a and 1b
and
1M and 1B)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➇
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➈
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
Right ➈
C01
C04
C02
C05
–
–
C03
C06
AAL2LPK
AAL2RPK
AAL2LTK
AAL2RTK ➅
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 113 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
114 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-9
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
K-Frame and HMCP (K)
Electrical Rating Data ➀➁
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C182
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
(1a and 1b
and
1M and 1B)
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1 Left
Right ➄➇
C01
C04
C02
C05
–
–
C03
C06
AAL3LPK
AAL3RPK
AAL3LTK
AAL3RTK ➅
L-, HMCP (L) and M-Frames
Electrical Rating Data ➀➀
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C183
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1A, 1B and
1 Make/
1 Break
Left
Right ➄➈
C01
C04
C02
C05
–
–
C03
C06
AA114LPK
AA114RPK
AA114LTK
AA114RTK ➅
2A, 2B and
1 Make/
1 Break
Left
Right ➄➈
C07
C10
C08
C11
–
–
C12
C13
AA214LPK
AA214RPK
AA214LTK
AA214RTK ➅
3A, 3B and
1 Make/
1 Break
Left
Right ➄➈
C14
C15
–
–
–
–
–
–
AA314LPK
AA314RPK
–
–
N-Frame and HMCP (N)
Electrical Rating Data ➆➁
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum
Current
Amperes
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage
600
125
250
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
6
0.50 ➂
0.25 ➂
2500
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C184
Auxiliary Switch and Alarm Switch Combination
Number of
Sets of
Contacts
Mounting
Location
(Pole)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➄
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
1A, 1B and
1 Make/
1 Break
Left
Right ➄➉
C01
C04
C02
C05
–
–
C03
C06
AA115LPK
AA115RPK
AA115LTK
AA115RTK ➅
2A, 2B and
1 Make/
1 Break
Left
Right ➄➉
C07
C10
C08
C11
–
–
C12
C13
AA215LPK
AA215RPK
AA215LTK
AA215RTK ➅
Endurance – 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
Non-inductive load.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation .
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker.
Endurance – 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
For L-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 550 trip units, installation of PowerNet or Zone
Interlock Kit restricts any other accessories from being installed in the right pole.
For N-Frame breakers equipped with OPTIM 550 trip units, installation of PowerNet or Zone
Interlock Kit restricts any other accessories from being installed in the right pole.
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 114 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 115
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-10
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Shunt Trip
Shunt Trip
ST
a
General Information
The shunt trip provides remote controlled
tripping of the circuit breaker. The shunt
trip consists of an intermittent rated
solenoid with a tripping plunger and a
cutoff switch assembled to a plug-in
module. When required for ground fault
protection applications, certain Ac rated
shunt trips, as noted in the Electrical
Rating Table, are suitable for operation at
55 percent of rated voltage.
NOTE: Shunt trips should not be used as
circuit interlocks using maintained pilot
devices.
Ordering Information
Select shunt trip catalogue number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range. Shunt trip coils are designed to be applied at
specific Ac or Dc voltages within the voltage range shown. Electrical ratings are also shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory
nameplates.
G-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 15550
Note: G-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. CSA and UL require that internal
accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are CSA and UL listed for
factory installation.
Shunt Trip (LH 3-Pole only)
Electrical Ratings
Catalogue Number ➀Suffix NumberVolts Frequency Amperes
120
240
12
24
24
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
Dc
Dc
60 Hz
1.1
2.1
2.8
5.7
–
1373D62G01
1373D62G02
1373D62G15
1373D62G16
1373D62G20
S1
S2
S3
S4
S7
Not listed with CSA and UL for field installation
Suitable for use in ground fault applications.
Pigtail leads exit left side of circuit breaker.
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 115 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
116 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-11
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Shunt Trip
F-Frame and HMCP (F)
Electrical Rating Data ➀➁➂
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
12
24
6.75 75
300
12
24
9 100
400
48
60
110
120
127
36 92
140
480
570
640
48
60
36 100
160
208
220
240
380
156 180
200
240
610
110
120
125
127
77 55
66
71
72
415
440
480
525
550
600
300 130
330
380
450
530
590
–
220
250
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
110
140
–
–
–
–
–Instruction Leaflet Number 29C140
Note: F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. CSA and UL requires that internal
accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are CSA and UL listed for
factory installation.
Shunt Trip
Voltage Rating
(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted
Connection Type and Location Shunt Trip Kits ➃
18-Inch Pigtail Leads ➄
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➅
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings
12-24 Vac or Vdc
48-127 Vac or 48-60 Vdc ➆
208-380 Vac or 110-127 Vdc
415-600 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
S01
S05
S09
S13
S02
S06
S10
S14
S03
S07
S11
S15
S04
S08
S12
S16
SNT1LP03K
SNT1LP08K
SNT1LP12K
SNT1LP18K
SNT1LT03K
SNT1LT08K
SNT1LT12K
SNT1LT18K
Right- or Neutral-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings ➇
12-24 Vac or Vdc
48-127 Vac or 48-60 Vdc➆
208-380 Vac or 110-127 Vdc
415-600 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
S17
S21
S25
S29
S18
S22
S26
S30
S19
S23
S27
S31
S20
S24
S28
S32
SNT1RP03K
SNT1RP08K
SNT1RP12K
SNT1RP18K
SNT1RT03K ➈
SNT1RT08K ➈
SNT1RT12K ➈
SNT1RT18K ➈
J-Frame and HMCP (J)
Electrical Rating Data ➀➁➉
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
12
24
931
173
12
24
8.4 50
247
48
60
36 686
1014
48
60
33.6 1094
1698
110
120
127
208
220
240
60.5 66
84
102
354
396
432
110
120
125
–
–
–
77
–
–
112
138
150
–
–
–
380
400
415
440
285 180
200
240
610
110
120
125
127
154 40
58
–
–
480
525
550
600
360 34
42
50
60
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C142
Shunt Trip
Voltage Rating
(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
18-Inch Pigtail Leads ➄
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings
12-24 Vac or Vdc
48-60 Vac or Vdc
110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc
380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
480-600 Vac
S41
S49
S09
S33
S17
S42
S50
S10
S34
S18
S43
S51
S11
S35
S19
S44
S52
S12
S36
S20
SNT2P04K
SNT2P06K
SNT2P11K
SNT2P14K
SNT2P18K
SNT2T04K
SNT2T06K
SNT2T11K
SNT2T14K
SNT2T18K
Right-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings
12-24 Vac or Vdc
48-60 Vac or Vdc
110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc
380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
480-600 Vac
S45
S53
S29
S33
S37
S46
S54
S30
S34
S38
S47
S55
S31
S35
S39
S48
S56
S32
S36
S40
SNT2P04K
SNT2P06K
SNT2P11K
SNT2P14K
SNT2P18K
SNT2T04K➈
SNT2T06K➈
SNT2T11K➈
SNT2T14K➈
SNT2T18K➈
Average unlatching time: 6 milliseconds.
Average circuit breaker contact total opening time: 18
milliseconds.
Endurance: 4000 electrical operations plus 4000
mechanical operations.
Not listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Pigtail wire size: No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2).
Standard pigtail lead exit location.
120 Vac marked suitable for ground fault protection
devices.
Standard mounting location.
Not for use on 4-pole circuit breakers.
Endurance – 6000 electrical operations plus 2000
mechanical operations.
Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices.
Marking label included with accessory kits.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing
element.
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 116 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 117
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-12
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Shunt Trip
K-Frame and HMCP (K)
Electrical Rating Data ➀➁➂
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
12
24
48
60
945
200
830
1280
12
24
48
60
8.4 35
170
710
1105
110 ➃
120 ➃
127 ➃
208 ➃
220 ➃
240 ➃
60 100
120
140
420
470
550
110
120
125
–
–
–
77
–
–
–
110
130
140
–
–
–
380
400
415
440
285 95
108
120
136
220
250
–
–
154 41
54
–
–
480
525
550
600
360 40
50
50
70
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–Instruction Leaflet Number 29C144
Shunt Trip
Voltage Rating
(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➄
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➅
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings ➅
12-24 Vac or Vdc
48-60 Vac or Vdc
110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc ➆
380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
480-600 Vac
S41
S49
S09
S13
S17
S42
S50
S10
S14
S18
S43
S51
S11
S15
S19
S44
S52
S12
S16
S20
SNT3P04K
SNT3P06K
SNT3P11K
SNT3P14K
SNT3P18K
SNT3T04K
SNT3T06K
SNT3T11K
SNT3T14K
SNT3T18K
Right-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings ➇
12-24 Vac or Vdc
48 - 60 Vac or Vdc
110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc ➆
380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
480-600 Vac
S45
S53
S29
S33
S37
S46
S54
S30
S34
S38
S47
S55
S31
S35
S39
S48
S56
S32
S36
S40
SNT3P04K
SNT3P06K
SNT3P11K
SNT3P14K
SNT3P18K
SNT3T04K ➈
SNT3T06K ➈
SNT3T11K ➈
SNT3T14K ➈
SNT3T18K ➈
Approximate unlatching time – 6 milliseconds.
Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time – 18 milliseconds.
Endurance – 5,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations.
Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
Suitable for use with Class 1 ground fault sensing element.
For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
Not for use on 4-pole circuit breaker.
For use with LT or MT (thermal-magnetic) 3-pole trip units only.
Suitable for use with the 48V and 60V rated Capacitor Trip Device (Style # 1283C62G03 and G02).
Suitable for use with the 120V rated Capacitor Trip Device (Style # 1283C62G01).
Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
L-, HMCP (L) and M-Frames
Electrical Rating Data ➀➁➂
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
12
24
945
200
12
24
935
170
48
60
34 830
1280
48
60
34 710
1105
110 ➃
120 ➃
127 ➃
208 ➃
220 ➃
240 ➃
60 100
120
140
420
470
550
110
120
125
–
–
–
77
–
–
110
130
140
–
–
–
380
400
415
440
266 95
108
120
136
220
250
–
–
154
–
–
–
41
54
–
–
480
525
550
600
336 40
50
50
70
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C146
Shunt Trip
Voltage Rating
(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➄
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➅
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings ➅
12-24 Vac or Vdc
48-60 Vac
48-60 Vdc
110-240 Vac ➆
110-125 Vdc
380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
480-600 Vac
S01
S05
S85
S09
S41
S13
S17
S02
S06
S86
S10
S42
S14
S18
S03
S07
S87
S11
S43
S15
S19
S04
S08
–
S12
S44
S16
S20
SNT4LP03K
SNT4LP05K
SNT4LP23K
SNT4LP11K
SNT4LP26K
SNT4LP14K
SNT4LP18K
SNT4LT03K
SNT4LT05K
SNT4LT23K
SNT4LT11K
SNT4LT26K
SNT4LT14K
SNT4LT18K
Right-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings ➉
12-24 Vac or Vdc
48-60 Vac
48-60 Vdc
110-240 Vac
110-125 Vdc
380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
480-600 Vac
S21
S25
S88
S29
S45
S33
S37
S22
S26
S89
S30
S46
S34
S38
S23
S27
S90
S31
S47
S35
S39
S24
S28
–
S32
S48
S36
S40
SNT4RP03K
SNT4RP05K
SNT4RP23K
SNT4RP11K
SNT4RP26K
SNT4RP14K
SNT4RP18K
SNT4RT03K ➈
SNT4RT05K ➈
SNT4RT23K ➈
SNT4RT11K ➈
SNT4RT26K ➈
SNT4RT14K ➈
SNT4RT18K ➈
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 117 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
118 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-13
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Shunt Trip
N-Frame and HMCP (N)
Electrical Rating Data ➀➁➂
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
Supply
Voltage
Minimum
Operating
Voltage VA
9
12
24
6
6
60
46
98
475
9
12
24
6
6
6
79
145
610
48
60
33.6 830
1280
48
60
33.6 710
1150
110 ➃
120 ➃
127 ➃
208 ➃
220 ➃
240 ➃
60 100
120
140
420
470
550
110
120
125
–
–
–
77
–
–
–
110
130
140
–
–
–
380
400
415
440
266 95
108
120
136
220
250
–
–
154
–
–
–
41
54
–
–
480
525
550
600
336 40
50
50
70
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Ordering Information
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C148
Shunt Trip
Voltage Rating
(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➄
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
Terminal
Block
Pigtail
Leads
Terminal
Block
Same
Side Rear ➅
Opposite
Side
Same
Side
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
Left-Pole Mounting Ac/Dc Ratings ➅
9-24 Vac or 9-24 Vdc
48-60 Vac
110-240 Vac ➃
110-125 Vdc ➇
380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
480-600 Vac
48-60 Vdc ➆
S01
S05
S09
S41
S13
S17
S21
S02
S06
S10
S42
S14
S18
S22
S03
S07
S11
S43
S15
S19
S23
S04
S08
S12
S44
S16
S20
S24
SNT5LP03K
SNT5LP05K
SNT5LP11K
SNT5LP26K
SNT5LP14K
SNT5LP18K
SNT5LP23K
SNT5LT03K
SNT5LT05K
SNT5LT11K
SNT5LT26K
SNT5LT14K
SNT5LT18K
SNT5LT23K
Approximate unlatching time – 6 milliseconds.
Approximate total circuit breaker contact opening time – 18 milliseconds.
Endurance – 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Supply voltages suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices. Marking label included with accessory kits.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
Suitable for use with the 48V and 60V rated Capacitor Trip Device (Style # 1283C62G03 and G02).
Suitable for use with the 120V rated Capacitor Trip Device (Style # 1283C62G01).
Internal Accessories 1-13 2011 Page 118 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:38 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
119
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-14
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Shunt Trip
R-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C150
Electrical Rating Data
Suffix
Number
Application Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings
➀➁➂➃➄➅
Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz)
Supply
Voltage (V)
Minimum
Operating
Voltage (V) I
p
(A)
I
rms
at
0.250s
(A)
I
rms
at
0.033s
(A) VA
One
Minute
Dielectric
Withstand
Voltage (V)
03/03K 24 50/60 24 16.8 71.1 – 50.3 1210 1050
24 Dc 24 16.8 – 36.1 – 870 1050
05/05K 48-60 50/60 48
60
34.0 13.1
17.2
– 9.2
12.2
450
740
1120
11/11K
➆
110-240 50/60 110
120
127
208
220
240
60.5 4.2
4.5
4.6
7.9
8.5
8.7
– 3.0
3.2
3.3
5.6
6.0
6.1
330
390
430
1170
1370
1470
1480
14/14K 380-440 50/60 380
415
440
266.0 4.5
5.0
5.3
– 3.2
3.6
3.7
1220
1500
1640
1880
220-250 Dc 220
250
154.0 – 2.4
2.7
– 530
680
1500
18/18K 480-600 50/60 480
525
550
600
336.0 0.6
0.7
0.7
0.8
– 0.4
0.5
0.5
0.6
200
270
280
360
2200
23/23K 48-60 Dc 48
60
34.0 – 9.8
11.6
– 470
700
1120
26/26K 110-125 Dc 110
120
125
77.0 – 3.3
3.6
3.8
– 370
440
480
1250
Shunt Trip (RH only)
Voltage Rating
(Ac Frequency = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kit s
➇
18-Inch Pigtail Leads
➈
Pigtail Leads
Suffix Number
➈
Catalogue Number
➈
24 Vac or Vdc
48-60 Vac
110-240 Vac
380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc
480-600 Vac
48-60 Vdc
➉
110-125 Vdc
S21
S25
S29
S33
S37
S88
S45
SNT6P03K
SNT6P05K
SNT6P11K
SNT6P14K
SNT6P18K
SNT6P23K
SNT6P26K
Approximate unlatching time of 6 milliseconds.
Average circuit breaker contact total opening time approximately 62 milliseconds, at rated voltage.
Endurance – 500 electrical operations and 2500 mechanical operations.
Shunt trip can be operated up to a maximum of six times per minute.
Maximum operating voltage – 110% of maximum voltage range rating.
Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm
2
). Leads are yellow and white.
Suitable for use with Class 1 GFP devices; marking label supplied with accessory kit.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
A maximum of two shunt trip plug-in modules may be installed in a circuit breaker.
Suitable for use with the 48V and 60V rated Capacitor Trip Device (Style # 1283C62G03 and G02).
Suitable for use with the 120V rated Capacitor Trip Device (Style # 1283C62G01).
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 119 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
120 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-15
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Low Energy Shunt Trip
Low Energy Shunt Trip
General Information
Low energy shunt trip devices are
designed to operate from low energy
output signals from dedicated current
sensors typically applied in ground fault
protection schemes. However, with a
proper control voltage source, they may
be applied in place of conventional trip
devices for special applications. Flux
paths surrounding permanent magnets
used in the shunt trip assembly hold a
charged spring poised in readiness to
operate the circuit breaker trip
mechanism. When a 100 microfarad
capacitor charged to 28 Vdc is discharged
through the shunt trip coil, the resultant
flux opposes the permanent magnet flux
field, which releases the stored energy in
the spring to trip the circuit breaker. As
the circuit breaker resets, the shunt trip
reset arm is actuated by the circuit
breaker handle, resetting the shunt trip.
The plug-in module is mounted in
retaining slots in the top of the trip unit.
Coil is intermittent-rated only. Cutoff
provisions required in control circuit.
NOTE:
Shunt trips should not be used as circuit interlocks using maintained contact
pilot devices.
Ordering Information
F-, J-, K-, L-, M-, N-, R-Frames and
HMCP (F), (J), (K), (L), (N)
Note:
F-frame circuit breakers are
factory sealed. CSA and UL require that
internal accessories be installed at the
factory. Internal accessories are CSA
and UL listed for factory installation.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C151
Low Energy Shunt Trip
➀
Mounting
Positions
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
➁
18-Inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear
➂
Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix Numbers Catalogue Numbers
F-Frame
Left Pole
Right Pole
➂
NO1
NO5
NO2
NO6
NO3
NO7
NO4
NO8
LST1LPK
LST1RPK
LST1LTK
LST1RTK
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C141
J-Frame
Left Pole
➂
Right Pole
NO1
NO5
NO2
NO6
NO3
NO7
–
–
LST2LPK
LST2RPK
–
–
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C143
K-Frame
Left Pole
➂
Right Pole
➃➄
NO1
NO5
NO2
NO6
NO3
NO7
–
–
LST3LPK
LST3RPK
–
–
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C145
L- and M-Frames
Left Pole
➂
Right Pole
➃
NO1
NO5
NO2
NO6
NO3
NO7
–
–
LST4LPK
LST4RPK
–
–
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C147
N-Frame
Left Pole
➂
NO1 NO2 NO3 – LST5LPK –
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C149
R-Frame
Right Pole
NO1 – – – LST6RPK –
Cutoff provisions required in control circuit.
Except F-Frame Breaker and HMCP, Field Installation kits for J-,K-,M-,N- and R-frames are listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
For use with thermal-magnetic trip units only.
Breakers with K-Frame OPTIM 550 can only accept accessories in left pole.
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 120 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
121
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-16
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Undervoltage Release
Mechanism
UV
General Information
The undervoltage release mechanism
monitors a voltage (typically a line
voltage) and trips the circuit breaker
when the voltage falls to between 70 and
35 percent of the solenoid coil rating.
The undervoltage release mechanism
consists of a continuous rated solenoid
with a plunger and tripping lever mounted
in a plug-in module. The tab on the
tripping lever resets the undervoltage
release mechanism when normal voltage
has been restored and the circuit breaker
handle is moved to the reset (or OFF)
position. With less than pickup voltage
applied to the undervoltage release
mechanism, the circuit breaker contacts
will not touch when a closing operation is
attempted.
Note:
Undervoltage release
mechanism accessories are not
designed for, and should not be used
as, circuit interlocks.
Ordering Information
Select handle reset undervoltage release mechanism catalogue number for the voltage within the indicated voltage range.
Undervoltage release mechanism coils are designed to be applied at specific Ac or Dc voltages within the voltage range shown.
Electrical ratings are shown on applicable circuit breaker accessory nameplates.
Instruction Leaflet Number 15553
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
(LH 3-Pole only)
Electrical Ratings
Style Numbers
➀➁➂
Factory SuffixVolts Frequency Amperes
120
24
48
60
110
208
220
240
380
415
440
480
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
50/60 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
0.05
0.22
0.11
0.10
0.049
0.026
0.025
0.024
0.015
0.013
0.012
0.01
1373D62G03
1373D62G04
1373D62G05
1373D62G06
1373D62G07
1373D62G08
1373D62G09
1373D62G10
1373D62G11
1373D62G12
1373D62G13
1373D62G14
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
Includes 24 inch external pigtail leads, #18 AWG (16-.010).
A maximum of two internal accessories may be mounted in a three-pole circuit breaker.
Not listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Pigtail leads exit left side of circuit breaker.
G-Frame
Note:
G-frame circuit breakers are
factory sealed. CSA and UL require that
internal accessories be installed at the
factory. Internal accessories are CSA and
UL listed for factory installation.
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 121 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
122 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-17
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism
F-Frame and HMCP (F)
Note:
F-frame circuit breakers are
factory sealed. CSA and UL require that
internal accessories be installed at the
factory.
Internal accessories are CSA and UL
listed for factory installation.
Electrical Rating Data
➀
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VAMin. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.
12 4.2 6.3 7.6 1.3
2.5
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.8
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.4 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 1.6
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 1.2
1.9
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 1.3
2.0
110
120
127
44.5 77.0 93.5 1.3
1.5
1.7
110
120
125
44.5 77.0 93.5 1.5
1.7
1.9
208
220
240
84.0 145.6 176.8 2.2
2.4
2.9
220
250
–
87.5
–
154.0
–
187.0
–
2.6
3.4
–
380
415
440
480
168.0 266.0 323.0 2.9
3.5
3.9
4.6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
525
550
600
210.0 367.0 446.0 4.3
4.8
5.8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C160 (MCCB AND MCS) and 29C179 (HMCP)
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Voltage Rating
(Ac Freq = 50/60
Hz)
Factory Mounted (For F-Frame Breaker and F-Frame HMCP) (F-Frame Breaker) (F-Frame HMCP)
Connection Type and Location Undervoltage Release Mechanism Kits
➁
18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal Block Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear
➂
Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix Numbers Catalogue Numbers
Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings
12 Vac
24 Vac
48 Vac
60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-480 Vac
525-600 Vac
U01
U05
U37
U97
U13
U17
U21
U25
U02
U06
U38
U98
U14
U18
U22
U26
U03
U07
U39
U99
U15
U19
U23
U27
U04
U08
U40
U100
U16
U20
U24
U28
UVH1LP02K
UVH1LP03K
UVH1LP22K
UVH1LP24K
UVH1LP08K
UVH1LP11K
UVH1LP15K
UVH1LP18K
UVH1LT02K
UVH1LT03K
UVH1LT22K
UVH1LT24K
UVH1LT08K
UVH1LT11K
UVH1LT15K
UVH1LT18K
MUVH1LP02K
MUVH1LP03K
MUVH1LP22K
MUVH1LP24K
MUVH1LP08K
MUVH1LP11K
MUVH1LP15K
MUVH1LP18K
MUVH1LT02K
MUVH1LT03K
MUVH1LT22K
MUVH1LT24K
MUVH1LT08K
MUVH1LT11K
MUVH1LT15K
MUVH1LT18K
Right-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings
➃➄
12 Vac
24 Vac
48 Vac
60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-480 Vac
525-600 Vac
U49
U53
U85
U101
U61
U65
U69
U73
U50
U54
U86
U102
U62
U66
U70
U74
U51
U55
U87
U103
U63
U67
U71
U75
U52
U56
U88
U104
U64
U68
U72
U76
UVH1RP02K
UVH1RP03K
UVH1RP22K
UVH1RP24K
UVH1RP08K
UVH1RP11K
UVH1RP15K
UVH1RP18K
UVH1RT02K
UVH1RT03K
UVH1RT22K
UVH1RT24K
UVH1RT08K
UVH1RT11K
UVH1RT15K
UVH1RT18K
MUVH1RP02K
MUVH1RP03K
MUVH1RP22K
MUVH1RP24K
MUVH1RP08K
MUVH1RP11K
MUVH1RP15K
MUVH1RP18K
MUVH1RT02K
MUVH1RT03K
MUVH1RT22K
MUVH1RT24K
MUVH1RT08K
MUVH1RT11K
MUVH1RT15K
MUVH1RT18K
Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
60 Vdc
110-127 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
U29
U33
U37
U97
U41
U45
U30
U34
U38
U98
U42
U46
U31
U35
U39
U99
U43
U47
U32
U36
U40
U100
U44
U48
UVH1LP20K
UVH1LP21K
UVH1LP22K
UVH1LP24K
UVH1LP26K
UVH1LP28K
UVH1LT20K
UVH1LT21K
UVH1LT22K
UVH1LT24K
UVH1LT26K
UVH1LT28K
MUVH1LP20K
MUVH1LP21K
MUVH1LP22K
MUVH1LP24K
MUVH1LP26K
MUVH1LP28K
MUVH1LT20K
MUVH1LT21K
MUVH1LT22K
MUVH1LT24K
MUVH1LT26K
MUVH1LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings
➃➄
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48 Vdc
60 Vdc
110-127 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
U77
U81
U85
U101
U89
U93
U78
U82
U86
U102
U90
U94
U79
U83
U87
U103
U91
U95
U80
U84
U88
U104
U92
U96
UVH1RP20K
UVH1RP21K
UVH1RP22K
UVH1RP22K
UVH1RP26K
UVH1RP28K
UVH1RT20K
UVH1RT21K
UVH1RT22K
UVH1RT22K
UVH1RT26K
UVH1RT28K
MUVH1RP20K
MUVH1RP21K
MUVH1RP22K
MUVH1RP22K
MUVH1RP26K
MUVH1RP28K
MUVH1RT20K
MUVH1RT21K
MUVH1RT22K
MUVH1RT22K
MUVH1RT26K
MUVH1RT28K
Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 4000 mechanical
operations.
Not listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard pigtail lead exit location.
Standard mounting location.
Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker.
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 122 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
123
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-18
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism
J-Frame and HMCP (J)
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C163
Electrical Rating Data
➀➁
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VAMin. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5
3.8
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
3.1
110
120
127
44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8
2.1
2.4
110
120
125
44.5 77.0 93.5
1.6
1.9
2.2
208
220
240
85.0 145.6 176.8 2.7
3.1
3.8
220
250
–
87.5
–
154.0
–
187.0
–
3.1
4.0
–
380
415
440
480
168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4
4.0
4.6
5.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Voltage Rating
(Ac Freq =
50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
➂
18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear
➃
Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix Numbers Catalogue Numbers
Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings
➄
12 Vac
24 Vac
48-60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-480 Vac
U05
U09
U13
U17
U21
U25
U06
U10
U14
U18
U22
U26
U07
U11
U15
U19
U23
U27
U08
U12
U16
U20
U24
U28
UVH2LP02K
UVH2LP03K
UVH2LP05K
UVH2LP08K
UVH2LP11K
UVH2LP15K
UVH2LT02K
UVH2LT03K
UVH2LT05K
UVH2LT08K
UVH2LT11K
UVH2LT15K
Right-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings
➅
12 Vac
24 Vac
48-60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-480 Vac
U37
U41
U45
U49
U53
U57
U38
U42
U46
U50
U54
U58
U39
U43
U47
U51
U55
U59
U40
U44
U48
U52
U56
U60
UVH2RP02K
UVH2RP03K
UVH2RP05K
UVH2RP08K
UVH2RP11K
UVH2RP15K
UVH2RT02K
UVH2RT03K
UVH2RT05K
UVH2RT08K
UVH2RT11K
UVH2RT15K
Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings
➄
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48-60 Vdc
110-127 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
T01
T05
T09
T13
T17
T02
T06
U10
T14
T18
T03
T07
T11
T15
T19
T04
T08
T12
T16
T20
UVH2LP20K
UVH2LP21K
UVH2LP23K
UVH2LP26K
UVH2LP28K
UVH2LT20K
UVH2LT21K
UVH2LT23K
UVH2LT26K
UVH2LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings
➅
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48-60 Vdc
110-127 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
T21
T25
T29
T33
T37
T22
T26
T30
T34
T38
T23
T27
T31
T35
T39
T24
T28
T32
T36
T40
UVH2RP20K
UVH2RP21K
UVH2RP23K
UVH2RP26K
UVH2RP28K
UVH2RT20K
UVH2RT21K
UVH2RT23K
UVH2RT26K
UVH2RT28K
Endurance: 6000 electrical operations plus 2000 mechanical operations.
For electrical rating data for manual, automatic and electrical reset undervoltage release mechanisms, refer to Eaton’s Electrical Group.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard pigtail lead exit location.
Standard mounting location.
Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breakers.
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 123 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
124 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-19
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism
K-Frame and HMCP (K)
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C166
Electrical Rating Data
➀
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VAMin. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5
3.8
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
3.1
110
120
127
44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8
2.1
2.4
110
120
125
44.5 77.0 93.5
1.6
1.9
2.2
208
220
240
85.0 145.6 176.8 2.7
3.1
3.8
220
250
–
87.5
–
154.0
–
187.0
–
3.1
4.0
–
380
415
440
480
168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4
4.0
4.6
5.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Voltage Rating
(Ac Freq =
50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
➁
18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear
➂
Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix Numbers Catalogue Numbers
Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings
➂
12 Vac
24 Vac
48-60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-480 Vac
U05
U09
U13
U17
U21
U25
U06
U10
U14
U18
U22
U26
U07
U11
U15
U19
U23
U27
U08
U12
U16
U20
U24
U28
UVH3LP02K
UVH3LP03K
UVH3LP05K
UVH3LP08K
UVH3LP11K
UVH3LP15K
UVH3LT02K
UVH3LT03K
UVH3LT05K
UVH3LT08K
UVH3LT11K
UVH3LT15K
Right-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings
➃➄
12 Vac
24 Vac
48-60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-480 Vac
U37
U41
U45
U49
U53
U57
U38
U42
U46
U50
U54
U58
U39
U43
U47
U51
U55
U59
U40
U44
U48
U52
U56
U60
UVH3RP02K
UVH3RP03K
UVH3RP05K
UVH3RP08K
UVH3RP11K
UVH3RP15K
UVH3RT02K
UVH3RT03K
UVH3RT05K
UVH3RT08K
UVH3RT11K
UVH3RT15K
Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings
➂
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48-60 Vdc
110-127 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
T01
T05
T09
T13
T17
T02
T06
T10
T14
T18
T03
T07
T11
T15
T19
T04
T08
T12
T16
T20
UVH3LP20K
UVH3LP21K
UVH3LP23K
UVH3LP26K
UVH3LP28K
UVH3LT20K
UVH3LT21K
UVH3LT23K
UVH3LT26K
UVH3LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings
➃➄
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48-60 Vdc
110-127 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
T21
T25
T29
T33
T37
T22
T26
T30
T34
T38
T23
T27
T31
T35
T39
T24
T28
T32
T36
T40
UVH3RP20K
UVH3RP21K
UVH3RP23K
UVH3RP26K
UVH3RP28K
UVH3RT20K
UVH3RT21K
UVH3RT23K
UVH3RT26K
UVH3RT28K
Endurance: 5,000 electrical operations plus 1,000 mechanical operations
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location — leads exit rear of breaker.
For use with KT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker.
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 124 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
125
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-20
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism
L-, HMCP (L) and M-Frames
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C170
Electrical Rating Data
➀
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VAMin. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5
3.8
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
3.1
110
120
127
44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8
2.1
2.4
110
120
125
44.5 77.0 93.5
1.6
1.9
2.2
208
220
240
85.0 145.6 176.8 2.7
3.1
3.8
220
250
–
87.5
–
154.0
–
187.0
–
3.1
4.0
–
380
415
440
480
168.0 266.0 323.0 3.4
4.0
4.6
5.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Voltage Rating
(Ac Freq =
50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits
➁
18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear ➂Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix Numbers Catalogue Numbers
Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings ➂
12 Vac
24 Vac
48-60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-480 Vac
U05
U09
U13
U17
U21
U25
U06
U10
U14
U18
U22
U26
U07
U11
U15
U19
U23
U27
U08
U12
U16
U20
U24
U28
UVH4LP02K
UVH4LP03K
UVH4LP05K
UVH4LP08K
UVH4LP11K
UVH4LP15K
UVH4LT02K
UVH4LT03K
UVH4LT05K
UVH4LT08K
UVH4LT11K
UVH4LT15K
Right-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings ➃➄
12 Vac
24 Vac
48-60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-480 Vac
U37
U41
U45
U49
U53
U57
U38
U42
U46
U50
U54
U58
U39
U43
U47
U51
U55
U59
U40
U44
U48
U52
U56
U60
UVH4RP02K
UVH4RP03K
UVH4RP05K
UVH4RP08K
UVH4RP11K
UVH4RP15K
UVH4RT02K
UVH4RT03K
UVH4RT05K
UVH4RT08K
UVH4RT11K
UVH4RT15K
Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings ➂
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48-60 Vdc
110-127 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
T01
T05
T09
T13
T17
T02
T06
T10
T14
T18
T03
T07
T11
T15
T19
T04
T08
T12
T16
T20
UVH4LP20K
UVH4LP21K
UVH4LP23K
UVH4LP26K
UVH4LP28K
UVH4LT20K
UVH4LT21K
UVH4LT23K
UVH4LT26K
UVH4LT28K
Right-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings ➃➄
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48-60 Vdc
110-127 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
T21
T25
T29
T33
T37
T22
T26
T30
T34
T38
T23
T27
T31
T35
T39
T24
T28
T32
T36
T40
UVH4RP20K
UVH4RP21K
UVH4RP23K
UVH4RP26K
UVH4RP28K
UVH4RT20K
UVH4RT21K
UVH4RT23K
UVH4RT26K
UVH4RT28K
Endurance: 5000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location — leads exit rear of breaker.
For use with LT (thermal-magnetic) trip units only.
Not for use on right pole of 4-pole circuit breaker.
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 125 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
126 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-21
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism
N-Frame and HMCP (N)
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C174
Electrical Rating Data ➀
50/60 Hz Dc
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VA
Supply
Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Pickup
Voltage
VAMin. Max. Max. Min. Max. Max.
12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.9 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 1.6
24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.9 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 2.5
3.8
48
60
21.0 33.6 40.8 2.0
3.1
110
120
127
44.5 77.0 93.5 1.8
2.1
2.4
110
120
125
44.5 77.0 93.5 1.6
1.9
2.2
208
220
240
84.0 145.6 176.8 2.7
3.1
3.8
220
250
87.5
–
154.0
–
187.0
–
3.1
4.0
380
415
480
500
175.0 266.0 323.0 3.4
4.0
4.6
5.4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Undervoltage Release Mechanism
Voltage Rating
(Ac Freq =
50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➁
18-inch Pigtail Leads Terminal Block
Pigtail Leads Terminal BlockSame Side Rear ➂Opposite Side Same Side
Suffix Numbers Catalogue Numbers
Left-Pole Mounting Ac Ratings ➂
12 Vac
24 Vac
48-60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-480 Vac
U05
U09
U13
U17
U21
U25
U06
U10
U14
U18
U22
U26
U07
U11
U153
U19
U23
U27
U08
U12
U16
U20
U24
U28
UVH5LP02K
UVH5LP03K
UVH5LP05K
UVH5LP08K
UVH5LP11K
UVH5LP29K
UVH5LT02K
UVH5LT03K
UVH5LT05K
UVH5LT08K
UVH5LT11K
UVH5LT29K
Left-Pole Mounting Dc Ratings ➂
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48-60 Vdc
110-127 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
T01
T05
T09
T13
T17
T02
T06
T10
T14
T18
T03
T07
T11
T15
T19
T04
T08
T12
T16
T20
UVH5LP20K
UVH5LP21K
UVH5LP23K
UVH5LP26K
UVH5LP28K
UVH5LT20K
UVH5LT21K
UVH5LT23K
UVH5LT26K
UVH5LT28K
Endurance: 3000 electrical operations plus 1000 mechanical operations.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
Standard mounting location – leads exit rear of breaker.
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 126 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 127
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-22
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories Undervoltage Release Mechanism
R-Frame
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C178
Ac Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings ➀➁
Catalogue
Suffix
Application
Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms)
Voltage
(V)
Supply
Voltage
(V)
Dropout Voltage
(V)
Pickup
Voltage
(V) Max.
VA
Min. ➂
UVR
Response
Initiation
➃
Circuit
Breaker
Contact
Separation
Maximum
Circuit
Breaker
Contact
Opening
Dielectric
➄
Withstand
Voltage (V)Min. Max.
02/02K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 2.3 5 46 77 1024
03/03K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 3.1 5 46 77 1048
05/05K 48-60 48
60
21.0 33.5 40.8 3.4
6.0
5 46 77 1120
08/08K 110-127 110
120
127
44.5 77.0 93.5 3.3
3.6
3.8
5 46 77 1254
11/11K 208-240 208
220
240
84.0 145.6 176.8 4.2
6.6
7.2
5 46 77 1480
29/29K 380-500 380
415
440
480
500
168.0 266.0 323.0 3.8
8.3
8.8
9.6
10.0
5 46 77 2000
Dc Undervoltage Release Mechanism (Handle Reset) Ratings ➀➁
Catalogue
Suffix
Application
Ratings Electrical Operating Ratings Approximate Operating Time (ms)
Voltage
(V)
Supply
Voltage
(V)
Dropout Voltage
(V) Pickup
Voltage
(V) Max.
VA
Min. ➂
UVR
Response
Initiation ➃
Circuit
Breaker
Contact
Separation
Maximum
Circuit
Breaker
Contact
Opening
Dielectric
➄
Withstand
Voltage (V)Min. Max.
20/20K 12 12 4.2 8.4 10.2 3.4 5 46 77 1024
21/21K 24 24 8.4 16.8 20.4 4.3 5 46 77 1048
23/23K 48-60 48
60
21.0 33.5 40.8 4.8
7.2
5 46 77 1120
26/26K 110-127 110
120
125
43.8 77.0 93.5 3.3
3.6
3.8
5 46 77 1250
28/28K 220-250 220
250
87.5 154.0 187.0 6.6
7.5
5 46 77 1500
Undervoltage Release Mechanism (RH only)
Voltage Rating
(Ac Freq = 50/60 Hz)
Factory Mounted Field Mounted
Connection Type and Location Field Installation Kits ➅
18-inch Pigtail Leads Pigtail Leads
Suffix Numbers ➆Catalogue Numbers ➆
12 Vac
24 Vac
48-60 Vac
110-127 Vac
208-240 Vac
380-500 Vac
12 Vdc
24 Vdc
48-60 Vdc
110-125 Vdc
220-250 Vdc
U37
U41
U45
U49
U53
U57
T21
T25
T29
T33
T37
UVH6RP02K
UVH6RP03K
UVH6RP05K
UVH6RP08K
UVH6RP11K
UVH6RP29K
UVH6RP20K
UVH6RP21K
UVH6RP23K
UVH6RP26K
UVH6RP28K
Endurance – 500 electrical operations plus 2500
mechanical operations.
Pigtail wire size – No. 18 AWG (0.82 mm2). Leads are
orange and brown.
UVR will override a momentary voltage dip up to the
response time shown.
Unlatching occurs 1 millisecond before
circuit breaker contacts begin to separate.
For 1 minute.
Listed with CSA and UL for field installation.
A maximum of two UVR plug-in modules may be installed
in a circuit breaker.
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 127 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
128 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
INTA-23
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Internal Accessories / Accessory Terminal Block / PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kit (OPTIM 550 only)
Accessory Terminal Block
(R-Frame)
(For Fixed Mounted Configuration)
General Information
Internal accessory wiring leads are
normally supplied with pigtail leads (No.
18 AWG) that exit from the right side of
the circuit breaker. Where specified,
fixed mounted accessory terminal blocks
are available. A maximum of one 24-
point terminal block can be installed on
the right side of the circuit breaker for
the internal accessories.
For convenience in determining the
appropriate number of terminal block
points required, refer to table at right.
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C312
One 24-point accessory terminal block provided with circuit breaker when ordered factory installed or shipped from warehouse
as separate item when ordered for field installation. See Digitrip RMS master connection diagram (IL 29C714).
Number of Control Wires For Each Internally Mounted Accessories
Type of Accessory
Number of Contacts Per Single
Accessory Required Number of Wires
Auxiliary Switch 2a/2b
4a/4b
6
12
Alarm (Signal)/
Lockout Switch
1m/1b
2m/2b
6
12
Shunt Trip N/A 2
Low Energy Shunt N/A 2
Undervoltage Release Mechanism N/A 2
Ordering Information ➀
Factory Installed Field Mounted
Suffix Number Catalogue Number
Q01 TBRDK
Eaton’s PowerNet and Zone Interlock Kits (OPTIM 550 only) K-, L-, and N-Frames
General Information
Eaton’s PowerNet Communications Kit can be ordered to add PowerNet
communications to an existing OPTIM 550 breaker in the field. An 18-inch wiring pigtail
is routed to the rear of the breaker: two wires for PowerNet and two wires for 24V Dc
(45 mA load). It is recommended that the power supply be an “isolated high quality”
unit.
Ordering Information ➀
Circuit
Breaker
PowerNet Kit
Zone Interlocking/
Ground Kit ➁
PowerNet & Zone Interlocking/
Ground Kit ➁
Catalogue
Number
Factory Install
Suffix ➂
Catalogue
Number
Factory Install
Suffix ➂
Catalogue
Number
Factory Install
Suffix ➂
K-Frame
L-Frame
N-Frame
ICK550K
ICK550L
ICK550N
PN
PN
PN
ZGK550K
ZGK550L
ZGK550N
ZG
ZG
ZG
ZGPK550K
ZGPK550L
ZGPK550N
ZGP
ZGP
ZGP
Installation of these kits restrict any other attachments from being installed in the RH pole.
Includes a ground fault alarm signal which can drive the Ground Fault Alarm unit (Catalogue Number GFAU).
For factory installation charge of these kits, please refer to the Breaker Accessories/Modifications sections in Eaton’s MCCB
Price List for details.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Numbers (K) 29C506, (L) 29C897, (N) 29C898
Internal Accessories 14-23 2011 Page 128 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:40 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
129
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Termination Hardware
Contents
Description Page Number
End Cap Kit, Keeper Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-2
Termination Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-3
Multiwire Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-4
Base Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-5
Drawout Cassette (R-Frame). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-6
Terminal Shields and End Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-7
Base Mounting Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EXTA-9
Handle Locking and Blocking Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EXTA-10
Mechanical Interlocking Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EXTA-12
Electrical Operator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EXTA-14
Plug-In Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EXTA-16
Rear Connecting Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EXTA-17
Panelboard Connecting Straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EXTA-20
Handle Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EXTA-21
Current Limiters, Alarms, Monitors and Test Kits . . . . . .EXTA-28
LFD Current Limiter
IQ Energy Sentinel
Ground Fault Alarm Unit
STK2 Portable Test Kit
OPTIM System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EXTA-29
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
Digitrip OPTMizer
Auxiliary Power Module
Potential Transformer Module
EXTA 2011 Page 129 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
130 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Termination Hardware
End Cap Kit
End Cap Kit
The End Cap Kit slides onto the line or
load conductor of the circuit breaker and
acts as a threaded adapter for the
conductor to accept a ring terminal or
other bolt-on connector. The end cap kit
is available with English and metric
thread sizes. (Field installation only). CSA
and UL listed.
End Cap Kit Ordering Information
Thread Type Thread Size Catalogue Number
2-Pole F-Frame
Imperial
Metric
10-32
M-5
KPEK12
KPEKM12
3-Pole F-Frame
Imperial
Metric
10-32
M-5
KPEK1
KPEKM1
4-Pole F-Frame
Imperial
Metric
10-32
M-5
KPEK14
KPEKM14
3-Pole J-Frame
Imperial
Metric
.312-32
M-8
KPEK2
KPEKM2
4-Pole J-Frame
Imperial
Metric
.312-32
M-8
KPEK24
KPEKM24
3-Pole K-Frame
Imperial
Metric
.312-32
M-8
KPEK3
KPEKM3
4-Pole K-Frame
Imperial
Metric
.312-32
M-8
KPEK34
KPEKM34
3-Pole L-Frame
Imperial
Metric
.312-32
M-8
KPEK4
KPEKM4
4-Pole L-Frame
Imperial
Metric
.312-32
M-8
KPEK44
KPEKM44
Keeper Nut
The Keeper Nut slides onto the line or
load conductor of the circuit breaker and
acts as a threaded adapter for the
conductor to accept a ring terminal or
other bolt-on connector. The keeper nut
is available with English and metric
thread sizes. Screws and washers are
supplied by customer. (Field installation
only). CSA and UL listed.
F-Frame Keeper Nut Ordering
Information
F-Frame Keeper Nut
K-Frame Keeper Nut Ordering
Information
K-Frame Keeper Nut
L-, M-, N-Frames
Not required. Terminals are threaded.
Thread Type Thread Size
Catalogue Number
Package of 12
(Priced Individually)
Imperial
Metric
10-32
M-5
KPR1A
KPR1AM
Thread
Type
Thread
Size
Line/
Load
End
Catalogue Number
(Package of 3)
Imperial .375-16 Line
Load
KPR3A
KPR3B
Metric M-8 Line
Load
KPR3AM
KPR3BM
.
EXTA 2011 Page 130 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
131
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Termination Hardware
Plug Nut
J-Frame Plug Nut
The Plug Nut is used in applications
where screw-connected ring-type
terminals are preferred to connect cables
to circuit breaker conductors. The plug
nut is press-fit into the opening in the
circuit breaker terminal conductor.
Screws and washers are supplied by
customer.
J-Frame Plug Nut Ordering
Information
Terminal Adapter
K-Frame Terminal Adapter Ordering
Information
K-Frame terminal adapter for use in replacing LB/DA
breakers.
K-Frame Terminal Adapter
Control Wire Terminal Kit
G-Frame Control Wire Terminal
F-Frame Kit
The Control Wire Terminal Kit provides a
means to tap off control power from a
main disconnect, using the provided
male end of a quick disconnect.
Note:
Not for use with 3T20FB terminal.
F-Frame Ordering Information
Package of 12 control wire terminal
tangs. Terminals must be ordered
separately. Priced individually.
F-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit
For use with steel terminal 3T100FB or stainless steel
terminal 3T150FB.
For use with Aluminum terminal TA225FD.
J- and K-Frame Kit
Not for use with T250KB terminals.
J- and K-Frame Ordering Information
Package of 12 control wire terminal
tangs. Terminals must be ordered
separately. Priced individually.
J- and K-Frame Control Wire Terminal
Kit Ordering Information
L-Frame Control Wire Terminal Kit
Ordering Information
Individually packed.
Terminal kits contain one terminal for each pole and one
terminal cover.
Thread Type Thread Size
Catalogue Number
Package of 6
Imperial
Metric
.250-20
M-6
PLN2
PLN2M
Line/Load End
Catalogue Number
Package of 3
Line & Load
TAD3
Description
Style
Number
Catalogue
Number
Control Wire
Terminal
(Kit of 12)
5652B38G01 GCWTK
Max. Amperes
Catalogue
Number
150
225
FCWTK
FCWTK225
Catalogue
Number
KCWTK
AWG Wire
Range/Number
Conductors
Metric
Wire
Range
mm
2
Catalogue
Number
Al/Cu
(2) 250 – 350 kcmil
120-150
TA602LDCW
Cu
(2) 3/0 – 350 kcmil
120-150
T602LDCW
Al/Cu
(2) 400 – 500 kcmil
185-240
2TA603LDKCW
2-Pole Kit
Al/Cu
(2) 400 – 500 kcmil
185-240
3TA603LDKCW
3-Pole Kit
Al/Cu
(2) 400 – 500 kcmil
185-240
4TA603LDKCW
4-Pole Kit
EXTA 2011 Page 131 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
132 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Multiwire Connectors
Multiwire Connectors
Field-installed Multiwire Connectors for
the load side (OFF) end terminals. They
are used to distribute the load from the
circuit breaker to multiple devices
without the use of separate distribution
terminal blocks.
Multiwire lug kits include mounting
hardware, insulators and tin-plated
aluminum connectors to replace three
mechanical load lugs. CSA and UL listed
for copper only as used on the load side
(OFF) end.
Multiwire Connectors
Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3)
Maximum
Amperes
Wires per
Terminal
Wire Size
Range AWG Cu
Kit Catalogue
Number
G-Frame
100
100
3
6
14-2
14-6
3TA100G3K
3TA100G6K
F-Frame
225
225
3
6
14-2
14-6
3TA150F3K
3TA150F6K
J-Frame
225
225
3
6
14-2
14-6
3TA250J3K
3TA250J6K
K-Frame
400
400
3
6
14-2/0
14-3
3TA400K3K
3TA400K6K
EXTA 2011 Page 132 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
133
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Base Mounting Hardware
Base Mounting Hardware
Ordering Information
Hardware for surface mounting of
circuit breakers is supplied only on
request. Hardware consists of mounting
screws and lockwashers. Order
hardware for circuit breaker pole
configurations as required.
Mounting Hardware
.
Screw Length
Inches (mm)
Catalogue
Number
G-Frame
.138-32 x 2.625
(66.7 mm) Std.
.138-32 x 3.000
(76.2 mm)
624B375G23
8703C80G05
Imperial Thread Mounting Hardware
Metric Thread Mounting Hardware
Number of
Poles Description
Type of
Mounting Catalogue Number
F-Frame
1 .164-32 x 3.188-inch Pan-Head Steel
Screws, Lockwashers, and Clamps
Individual
Group
(one set of hardware for two
circuit breakers)
MHDF11
MHDF21
2 .164-32 x 1.5-inch Pan-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
Individual
MHDF2
3, 4 .164-32 x 1.5-inch Pan-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
Individual
MHDF3
J-Frame
2, 3, 4 .250-20 x 2.75 inch Pan-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
Individual
BMH2
K-Frame
2, 3, 4 .250-20 x 1.5 inch Pan-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
Individual
MHDK3
L-Frame
2, 3, 4 .250-20 x 1.5 inch Filister-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
and Flat Washers
Individual
BMH4
M-Frame
2, 3 .3125-18 x 1.25 inch Filister-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
and Flat Washers
Individual
BMH5
N-Frame
2, 3, 4 .3125-18 x 1.25 inch Pan-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
Individual
BMH5
R-Frame
Supplied by customer
Number of
Poles Description
Type of
Mounting Catalogue Number
F-Frame
1 M4 – 0.7 x 80 mm Pan-Head Steel
Screws, Lockwashers, and Clamps
Individual
Group
(one set of hardware for two
circuit breakers)
4218B80G09
4218B80G10
2 M4 – 0.7 x 38 mm Pan-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
Individual
4218B80G11
3, 4 M4 – 0.7 x 38 mm Pan-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
Individual
BMH1M
J-Frame
2, 3, 4 M6 – 0.7 x 70mm Pan-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
Individual
BMH2M
K-Frame
2, 3, 4 M6 – 0.7 x 38mm Pan-Head
Steel Screws and Lockwashers
Individual
BMH3M
L-Frame
2, 3 — Individual
BMH4M
M-Frame
2, 3 — Individual
BMH5M
N-Frame
2, 3 — Individual
BMH5M
R-Frame
Supplied by customer
.
EXTA 2011 Page 133 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
134 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Drawout Cassette
Drawout Cassette
Product Description
The Drawout Cassette is currently for
use with the standard 3-pole 50 kA/
600V AC, 1600A and 2000A RD and RDC
circuit breakers only. It consists of two
separate components: the movable
mechanism which is factory mounted to
the circuit breaker frame (shown in
figure) and the stationary mechanism
which is housed in the cassette and
shipped separately.
The drawout mechanism has four
positions.
●
Connected — The breaker is fully
connected to the primary stabs and
secondary contacts.
●
Test — The breaker is not connected
to the primary stab but is connected to
the secondary contacts.
●
Disconnected — Both the primary
stabs and the secondary contacts are
disconnected.
●
Withdraw — The breaker can be
removed from the cassette.
RD Drawout Cassette Ordering
Information
Note:
Instruction Leaflet Number 32697
Movable mechanism must be ordered
with RD or RDC circuit breaker and is
shipped mounted to circuit breaker
frame. Stationary mechanism is ordered
separately.
All internal accessories must be factory
installed for use with drawout.
Description
Catalogue
Number
50 kA/600V AC Version
Movable
Mechanism
RD20DOM
Stationary
Mechanism
RD20DOS
(without shutters)
RD20DOSS
(with shutters)
65 kA/600V AC Version
Movable
Mechanism
RDC20DOM
Stationary
Mechanism
RDC20DOS
(without shutters)
RDC20DOSS
(with shutters)
.
EXTA 2011 Page 134 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
135
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-7
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Terminal Shields and End Covers
Terminal Shields
Terminal Shields provide protection
against accidental contact with live line
side terminations. Terminal shields are
fabricated from high dielectric insulating
material and fasten over the front
terminal access openings. Small
openings in the shields provide limited
access to the terminals for tightening
connectors. (Field installation only). CSA
listed.
G-Frame Terminal Shield
Number Units in Package
Catalogue
Number
10
GTSK3
F-Frame
F-Frame Terminal Shield
Number
of Poles Location
Standard (Package of 10)
(Priced Individually)
Special — For use when electrical operator is
mounted on circuit breaker
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
1
2
3
4
Line 625B229G06 (TS11K)
625B229G07 (TS12K)
625B229G08 (TS13K)
625B229G09 (TS14K)
—
—
4210B95G01
4210B95G02
L-Frame
L-Frame Terminal Shield
M-Frame
M-Frame Terminal Shield
Catalogue Number
(Package of 1)
314C420G05
Catalogue Number
(Package of 10)
208B966G01
J-Frame
J-Frame Terminal Shield
K-Frame
K-Frame Terminal Shield
Number of
Poles Location
Catalogue
Number
(Package of 10)
2,3
4
Line End
1266C07G01
6631C01G01
2,3
4
Load End
6641C16G01
6641C16G02
Number of
Poles Location
Catalogue
Number
2, 3
4
3
Line
Line
Load
TS33LN (Package of 10)
TS34LN (Package of 10)
TS33LD (Package of 1)
EXTA 2011 Page 135 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
136 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-8
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Terminal Shields and End Covers
Terminal End Covers
F-Frame
Product Description
The Terminal End Covers are designed
for use in motor control centre
applications where, because of confined
spaces, line side conductors are
normally custom fitted. The moulded
end covers are made of high dielectric
glass-polyester and slide over the line
ends of the circuit breaker. Close fitting
conductor openings are moulded into
the end covers. The end cover and
circuit breaker case fit together to form
terminal compartments that isolate
discharged ionizing gases during
circuit breaker tripping. Terminal end
covers are available with two conductor
opening diameters, 0.25-inch (6.4 mm)
and 0.41-inch (10.4 mm), and are listed
with CSA and UL. (Field installation only).
Ordering Information
The terminal end cover is available
for 3-pole circuit breakers only. Two
conductor opening sizes are available.
Specify quantity (one per circuit breaker)
when ordering.
F-Frame Terminal End Covers
Conductor Opening Diameter in
Inches (mm) Catalogue Number
0.25 (6.35 mm)
0.41 (10.41 mm)
TEC1
TEC2
Interphase Barriers
The interphase barriers provide
additional electrical clearance between
circuit breaker poles for special
termination applications. The barriers are
high dielectric insulating plates that are
installed in the moulded slots between
the terminals. (Field installation only).
Two per package.
Interphase Barriers
Frame
Catalogue
Number
F
J, K
L
IPB1
IPB3
IPB4
M
N
IPB4
IPB5
.
EXTA 2011 Page 136 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 137
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-9
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Base Mounting Adapters
Base Mounting Plate
Suitable for mounting (6) single-pole
circuit breakers.
Base Mounting Plate G-Frame
GD/GC/GHC /GCH Ordering
Information
Number Units
in Package
Catalogue
Number
1207B513G01
DIN Rail Adapter
For use with standard 35 mm DIN Rail
such as, 35 x 7.5 or 35 x 15 mm per DIN
EN50022.
Adapter mounting screws included are
for use with 2- and 3-pole circuit
breakers. Adapters for 1-pole circuit
breakers (pictured above) clip into the
base moulding.
DIN Rail Adapter G-Frame
GD/GC/GHC/GCH Ordering
Information
For use on 3-pole breakers only.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number
(1-2P) 15542 and (3P) 29C091
Key Operated Attachment
Key Operated Attachment
G-Frame GD/GC/GHC/GCH Ordering
Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C090
Key Operated Attachment
Poles
Number
Units in
Package Catalogue Number
1-2-Pole
3-Pole
10
10
1225C79G01
1225C79G02 (GDIN)
Number Units
in Package
Catalogue
Number
1GK0A
.
EXTA 2011 Page 137 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
138 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-10
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Handle Locking and Blocking Devices
Lock Dog (non-padlockable)
G-Frame GD/GC/GHC/GCH/GB/GHB/
GBH/GMCP Ordering Information
Non-padlockable
Handle Block
The Non-padlockable Handle Block
secures the circuit breaker handle
in either the ON or OFF position.
(Trip-free operation allows the circuit
breaker to trip when the handle block
holds the circuit breaker handle in the
ON position.) The device is positioned
over the circuit breaker handle and
secured by a setscrew to deter
accidental operation of the circuit
breaker handle. CSA and UL listed.
(Field installation only).
Ordering Information
Number Units
in Package
Catalogue
Number
11294C01H01
Frame
Catalogue
Number
F
J, K
L, M, N
LKD1
LKD3
LKD4
Snap-On Padlockable
Handle Lock Hasp
G-Frame GD/GC/GHC/GCH/GB/GHB/
GBH Ordering Information
Accepts .285 Lock Shank
Padlockable in the OFF position only.
The Snap-On Padlockable Handle Lock
allows the handle to be locked in the OFF
or ON position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to trip when the
handle lock holds the circuit breaker
handle in the ON position.) This device
was designed for use on the 1-pole
circuit breaker, but may be used on 1-, 2-,
3- and 4-pole styles. The handle lock
snaps onto the escutcheon area of the
handle with an optional retaining screw
for added secureness. The handle lock
will accommodate one padlock with a 1/
4-inch (6 mm) shackle. CSA and UL
listed. (Field installation only).
Ordering Information
Padlockable Handle Block
The device is positioned in the cover
opening to prevent handle movement.
Will accommodate one 5/16 padlock.
Ordering Information
Number Units
in Package
Catalogue
Number
10
10
1223C77G03 (GPLK)
1223C77G05 (GPLKOFF)
Frame
Catalogue
Number
FPHL1
.
Frame
Catalogue
Number
GGPHBOFF
J, K PHB3
EXTA 2011 Page 138 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 139
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-11
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Handle Locking and Blocking Devices
Padlockable Handle
Lock Hasp
The Padlockable Handle Lock Hasp
allows the handle to be locked in the ON
or OFF position. (Trip-free operation
allows the circuit breaker to trip when
the handle lock holds the circuit breaker
handle in the ON position.) The hasp
mounts on the circuit breaker cover
within the trimline. The cover is predrilled
on both sides of the operating handle so
that the hasp can be mounted on either
side of the handle. The hasp will
accommodate up to three padlocks with
1/4-inch (6 mm) shackles, one per circuit
breaker. Listed per UL File E7819. (Field
installation only.)
Ordering Information
For padlockable handle lock hasp to padlock handle in OFF
position only order either Catalogue Number.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C230 (F-
Frame); 29C232 (J-, K-Frames); 29C234 (Side
Mounted L-Frame and N-Frame, M-Frame);
29C234C (Top Mounted L-Frame and N-Frame,
Vertical Mounting M-Frame); and 29C240 (R-
Frame).
Cylinder Lock
The Cylinder Lock internally blocks
the trip bar in the tripped position to
prevent the circuit breaker from being
switched to ON. The cylinder lock is
factory installed in the left pole only
of the circuit breaker cover. Other
internally mounted accessories
cannot be installed in the same pole
as the cylinder lock. (Factory installation
only.)
Ordering Information
Description
Catalogue
Number
F-Frame
1-pole breakers PHL1
2-, 3-, 4-pole breakers PLK1
For Left Side Mounting PLK1LOFF
For Right Side Mounting PLK1ROFF
J, K-Frames
2-, 3-, 4-pole breakers PLK3
For Left Side Mounting PLK3LOFF
For Right Side Mounting PLK3ROFF
L-Frame (Side Mounted)
Lock ON or OFF HLK4
Lock OFF Only (Left-Hand Mount) HLK4LOFF
L-Frame (Top Mounted)
Lock ON or OFF HLK4S
Lock OFF Only HLK4SOFF
M-Frame
Lock ON or OFF HLK4
Lock OFF Only (Left-Hand Mount) HLK4LOFF
M-Frame (Vertical Mounting)
Lock ON/OFF HLK4S
Lock OFF Only HLK4SOFF
N-Frame
Side Mounted PLK5
Top Mounted (ON/OFF) PLK5S
Top Mounted (OFF Only) PLK5SOFF
R-Frame
Lock ON/OFF HLK6
Lock OFF Only HLK6OFF
Frame
Catalogue
Number
F, J, K Order by description
.
EXTA 2011 Page 139 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
140 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-12
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Mechanical Interlocking Devices
Key Interlock Kit
(Lock Not Included)
The Key Interlock is used to externally
lock the circuit breaker handle in the OFF
position. When the key interlock is
locked, an extended deadbolt blocks
movement of the circuit breaker handle.
Uniquely coded keys are removable only
with the deadbolt extended. Each coded
key controls a group of circuit breakers
for a given specific customer installation.
The key interlock assembly is CSA and
UL listed for field installation and
consists of a mounting kit and a
purchaser supplied deadbolt lock.
The mounting kit comprises a mounting
plate, which is secured to the circuit
breaker cover in either the left- or right-
pole position, key interlock mounting
screws, and a wire seal. Specific
mounting kits are required
for individual key interlock types.
Ordering Information
Key interlock mounting kits are for field
installation only. Select mounting kit
Catalogue Numbers to match type of
lock used. Key interlocks are supplied by
customer.
Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C231 (F-Frame); 29C233 (J-, K-Frames);
29C235 (L-, M-, N-Frames); and 29C240 (R-Frame)
Lock Manufacturer Lock Type
Bolt Projection in
Withdrawn Position
inches (mm)
Kit
Catalogue
Number
F-Frame
Superior
Kirk
Square D
Federal Pioneer
B-4003-1
F
SF
VF
.38 (9.5)
.38 (9.5)
None
.38 (9.5)
KYK1
Castell K or QK .38 (9.5) CTK1
J, K-Frames
Superior
Kirk
Square D
Federal Pioneer
B-4003-1
F
SF
VF
.38 (9.5)
.38 (9.5)
None
.38 (9.5)
KYK3
Castell K or QK .38 (9.5) CTK3
L-, M-, N-Frame
Superior
Kirk
Square D
Federal Pioneer
B-4003-1
F
SF
VF
.38 (9.5)
.38 (9.5)
None
.38 (9.5)
KYK4
Castell K or QK .38 (9.5) CTK4
R-Frame
Superior
Kirk
Square D
Federal Pioneer
B-4003-1
F
SF
VF
1.0 (25.4)
1.0 (25.4)
1.0 (25.4)
1.0 (25.4)
KYK6
Castell K or QK 1.0 (25.4) CTK6
EXTA 2011 Page 140 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 141
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-13
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Mechanical Interlocking Devices
Sliding Bar Interlock
The Sliding Bar Interlock provides
mechanical interlocking between
two adjacent 3-pole circuit breakers.
It is installed on the enclosure cover
between the circuit breakers. When the
sliding bar interlock handle is moved
from one side to the other, a bar extends
to alternately block movement of the
circuit breaker handles and prevents both
circuit breakers from being switched to
ON at the same time. Sliding bar
interlocks are not CSA and UL listed.
(Field installation only.)
Walking Beam Interlock
The Walking Beam Interlock provides
mechanical interlocking between two
adjacent circuit breakers of the same
pole configuration. The walking beam
interlock mounts on a bracket behind and
between the circuit breakers. A plunger
on each end of the beam is inserted
through an access hole in the back plate
and base of each circuit breaker. The
walking beam interlock prevents both
circuit breakers from being switched ON
at the same time.
If a walking beam interlock is installed,
the wiring troughs in the back of the
circuit breaker case are blocked by the
plungers and cannot be used for cross
wiring. Factory modified circuit breakers
are required for this application. UL File
E3816.
➤
➤
Ordering Information
The sliding bar interlock is available for
mounting between two adjacent 3-pole
circuit breakers with circuit breakers
centreline spacing as indicated in table
and enclosure front panel
thickness of 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3.2 or
4.8 mm). (For field installation only.)
Sliding Bar Interlock Ordering Information
Ordering Information
The walking beam interlock is available
for mounting between two adjacent
circuit breakers spaced 1/4-inch (6.4 mm)
apart and having the same pole
configuration. The two circuit breakers
must be factory modified to accept the
walking beam interlock assembly
(suitable for use with either 2-, 3- or 4-
pole circuit breakers).
With properly modified circuit breakers,
the walking beam interlock is suitable for
field installation. Order circuit breakers
specifying modification for walking beam
and select walking beam interlock from
table below. Circuit breakers and walking
beam interlock are boxed and shipped
separately.
Walking Beam Interlock Ordering Information
3-pole only.
Frame
Centreline Spacing in
Inches (mm)
Catalogue
Number Instruction Leaflet Number
F
J
K
4.19 (106.4)
4.38 (111.1)
5.75 (146.0)
SBK1
SBK2
SBK3
29C310
29C310
29C310
L, M
N
8.50 (215.9)
8.50 (215.9)
SBK4
SBK5
29C311
46A8396
Frame
Catalogue
Number Instruction Leaflet Number
F
K
L, M
WBL1
WBL3
WBL4A
29C300
29C301
29C302
N
R ➀
WBL5
WBL6
29C303
29C304
.
EXTA 2011 Page 141 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
142 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-14
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Electrical Operator
Electrical Operator
Product Description
The Electrical (Solenoid) Operator is
a single solenoid mechanism that
enables local and remote circuit breaker
ON, OFF, and reset switching. The
electrical operator is mounted on the
circuit breaker cover within the trimline
of the circuit breaker. The electrical
operator uses a unique bistable latch that
allows the device to operate using one
solenoid. The accessory provides high-
speed switching with a maximum
operating time of 5 cycles (80 ms),
making it suitable for generator
synchronizing applications.
Means are provided for remote electrical
operation and for local manual operation.
A special slide includes provisions for
padlocking the circuit breaker handle in
the OFF position. The slide will accept
three padlock shackles with a maximum
diameter of 1/4-inch (6 mm) each.
An interlock electrically disconnects the
solenoid when the electrical operator
cover is removed. The Rating Data
Tables provide electrical rating data for
the electrical (solenoid) operator.
The Electrical (Motor) Operator allows
the circuit’s breaker to be opened,
closed or reset remotely. It also has
a lock-off capability and provisions
for manual operation.
The Electrical (Motor) Operator contains
a reversible motor connected to a ball
screw. The ball screw drives the circuit
breaker handle. Limit switches and
relays are used to control the motor.
EO
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data
CSA and UL listed .
Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage.
Use current-limiting type fuse where required.
The electrical operator design is endurance tested for 10,000 electrical operations.
F-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C200
F-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Ordering Information
Motor operators M0P1P07, M0P1P03DC, M0P05DC and M0P1P07DC are replaced by M0PFD motor operators listed in table.
J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data
Tolerance: +10%, -15% of nominal voltage.
CSA and UL listed.
The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6,000 electrical operations.
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 ms).
J-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C202
Operating
Voltage (V) Frequency Inrush Current Amperes
Maximum Operating
Time
Fuse
Amperes
120
240
50/60 Hz AC 10
5
5 cycles
(80 ms)
3
2
Operating
Voltage (V) Frequency
Terminal Block 18-Inch (457.2 mm) Pigtail Lead
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
120
240
AC EOP1T07
EOP1T11
EOP1P07
EOP1P11
120
240
DC EOP1T07DC
EOP1T11DC
EOP1P07DC
EOP1P11DC
Operating
Voltage (V) Frequency
Terminal Block
Catalogue
Number
120
24
125
208-250
220-250
50/60 Hz AC
DC
DC
50/60 Hz AC
DC
MOPFD120C
MOPFD24D
MOPFD120C
MOPFD240C
MOPFD240C
Operating Voltage (V) Inrush Current (A) Fuse (A)
120
240
30
16
6
4
Operating
Voltage (V) Frequency
Terminal Block
Catalogue
Number
120
240
50/60 Hz AC EOP2T07
EOP2T11
120
240
DC EOP2T07DC
EOP2T11DC
EXTA 2011 Page 142 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 143
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-15
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Electrical Operator
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Rating Data
Tolerance: +10%, -15% of nominal voltage.
CSA and UL listed.
The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6,000 electrical operations.
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Maximum operating time: 5 cycles (80 ms).
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Ordering
Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C202 (AC EOP)
Instruction Leaflet Number 29C211 (DC EOP)
K-Frame Electrical (Solenoid) Operator Base Mounting Kit
L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data
CSA and UL listed.
The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 6,000 electrical operations.
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
Maximum operating time: 12 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe
duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.
Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage.
L- and M-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Ordering
Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C203
N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data
CSA and UL listed.
Frequency: 50/60 Hz.
The electrical operator design has been endurance tested for 2,500 electrical operations.
Maximum operating time: 12 cycles max. Operator is an intermittent duty device. The safe
duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not exceed one per minute.
Tolerance: +10%, –15% of nominal voltage.
N-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C204
R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Rating Data
Operator is an intermittent duty service. The safe duty cycle (OFF to ON to OFF) should not
exceed one per minute.
Electric Operating time at rated voltage; (a) To turn breaker ON – 1/2 second max. (b) To turn
breaker OFF – 1/2 second max.
Motor operating temperature; Class “A” temperature limits apply.
A minimum 1 kVA power source is recommended for motor operation.
Applied voltage should be no less than 85% or no more than 110% of rated.
R-Frame Electrical (Motor) Operator Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C205
For Incom compatible version, order E0P6T08CK.
.
Operating
Voltage (V) Inrush Current (A) Fuse (A)
120
240
30
16
6
4
Operating
Voltage (V) Frequency
Terminal Block
Catalogue
Number
120
240
50/60 Hz AC EOP3MT07
EOP3MT11
120
240
DC EOP3MT07DC
EOP3MT11DC
Frame
Catalogue
Number
KBBMK3 (For use with Busbar connected Bkr)
Operating
Voltage (V) Inrush Current Amperes
120 AC
208
240
31
13
12
125 DC
24
21
50
Operating Voltage
(V) Frequency
Terminal Block
Catalogue
Number
120
208
240
480
50/60 Hz EOP4MT07
EOP4MT11
EOP4MT11A
EOP4MT15
125
24
DC EOP4MT26
EOP4MT21
Operating
Voltage (V) Frequency Inrush Current (A) Fuse (A)
120
208
240
480
AC 31
21
19
—
6
—
4
—
24
48
125
DC 50
80
21
—
—
—
Operating Voltage
(V) Frequency
Pigtail Leads
Catalogue
Number
120
208
240
480
50/60 Hz EOP5T07
EOP5T09
EOP5T11
EOP5T15
24
48
125
DC EOP5T21
EOP5T22
EOP5T26
Operating
Voltage (V) Frequency Motor Inrush Current (A)
120
240
24
48
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
DC
DC
40
27
58
53
Operating Voltage
(V) Frequency
Factory Installed Terminal Block
Catalogue
Number
120
240
48
50/60 Hz
50/60 Hz
DC
EOP6T08K
EOP6T11K
EOP6T21K
.
EXTA 2011 Page 143 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
144 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-16
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Plug-in Adapters
Plug-in Adapters
Product Description
Plug-in Adapters simplify installation and
front removal of circuit breakers.
Individual line and load plug-in adapters
are available for rear connection
applications on 2-, 3- and 4-pole circuit
breakers. Common mounting plates for
line- and load-end adapters are available.
One plate is required per breaker.
One Plug-in Adapter Kit is required for
line-end and one for load-end.
F-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)
100A maximum.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 13782
J-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)
Use 3-pole mounting plate for 2-pole circuit breaker.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 149321
K-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)
Use 3-pole mounting plate for 2-pole circuit breaker.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 15378.
L-Frame Ordering Information (Threaded Stud Type)
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C314.
M-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 15073.
N-Frame Ordering Information (Flat Bar Type)
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 15073.
Plug-in Adapters (IEC rated only)
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
100 – 225 1480D13G01 (PAD12D) 1480D13G02 (PAD13D) 1480D13G07
Mounting Plate 176C511H01 507C047H01 —
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
Terminal
End
2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
250 Line
Load
1 Line and
1 Load
1260C86G05
1260C86G07
506C144G27
1260C86G06
1260C86G08
506C144G28
1231C67G01
1231C67G02
—
Mounting Plate PMP23 —
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
2-Pole 3-Pole 4-Pole
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
400 PAD32 PAD33 —
Mounting Plate PMP33 —
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
600 (Threaded Stud Type) 506C059G03 506C059G04
600 (Flat Bar Type) 1288C19G01 1288C19G02
Mounting Plate 504C824H01 504C824H01
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
800 2614D53G05 2614D53G06
Mounting Plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01
Continuous Current
Rating (Amperes)
2-Pole 3-Pole
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
1200 2614D53G03 2614D53G04
Mounting Plate 1290C73H01 1290C73H01
Frame Number of Poles Standard Certification Catalogue Number
FD 3 IEC PAD3F
FD 4 IEC PAD4F
JD 3 IEC PAD3JD
KD 3 IEC PAD3K
LD 3 IEC PAD3LD
LD 4 IEC PAD4LD
EXTA 2011 Page 144 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 145
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-17
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Rear Connecting Studs
Rear Connecting Studs
.
Product Description
Rear Connecting Studs are available
in several sizes to accommodate
specific fixed-mounted circuit breaker
applications.
Each rear connecting stud assembly
consists of one stud and one tube. To
maintain proper clearances between
poles, select alternate long and short
stud assemblies for circuit breakers with
more than one pole. One assembly is
required for line-end and one for load-end
of each pole. Tubes must be ordered
separately. Connecting studs are
available only with English thread sizes.
F-Frame Rear Connecting Stud
F-Frame Ordering Information
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalogue
Number
Panel Thickness
in Inches (mm)
Tube Length
in Inches (mm) Tube Catalogue
Number
Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
ABC DEF
For 15A to 100A Circuit Breakers
100A Short
100A Short
100A Short
100A Short
451D874G01
451D874G01
451D874G01
451D874G01
1.00 (25.4)
.69 – .94 (17.5 to 23.8)
.38 – .63 (9.5 to 15.9)
.25 – .31 (6.4 to 7.9)
.69 (17.5)
1.38 (34.9)
1.69 (42.9)
2.00 (50.8)
—
—
—
—
32B9446H20
32B9446H21
32B9446H22
32B9446H23
—
—
—
—
3.63 (92.1) .31
(7.9) – 18
100A Long
100A Long
100A Long
100A Long
451D874G02
451D874G02
451D874G02
451D874G02
1.00 (25.4)
.69 – .94 (17.5 to 23.8)
.38 – .63 (9.5 to 15.9)
.25 – .31 (6.4 to 7.9)
—
—
—
—
3.44 (87.3)
3.75 (95.2)
4.06 (103.1)
4.38 (111.3)
32B9446H24
32B9446H25
32B9446H26
32B9446H27
6.13 (155.6) —
—
—
—
For 110A to 225A Circuit Breakers
225A Short
225A Short
225A Short
225A Short
374D883G01
374D883G01
374D883G01
374D883G01
1.00 (25.4)
.69 – .94 (17.5 to 23.8)
.38 – .63 (9.5 to 15.9)
.25 – .31 (6.4 to 7.9)
.69 (17.5)
1.38 (34.9)
1.69 (42.9)
2.00 (50.8)
—
—
—
—
374D883H06
374D883H07
374D883H08
374D883H09
—
—
—
—
4.25 (108.0) .44
(11.1) – 14
225A Long
225A Long
225A Long
225A Long
374D883G02
374D883G02
374D883G02
374D883G02
1.00 (25.4)
.69 – .94 (17.5 to 23.8)
.38 – .63 (9.5 to 15.9)
.25 – .31 (6.4 to 7.9)
—
—
—
—
3.44 (87.3)
3.75 (95.2)
4.06 (103.1)
4.38 (111.3)
374D883H10
374D883H11
374D883H12
374D883H13
7.50 (190.5) —
—
—
—
E
B
AC
D
Mounting Panel
Breaker Mounting
Surface
“F” Thread
.75
(19.1)
.06
(1.5)
EXTA 2011 Page 145 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
146 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-18
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Rear Connecting Studs
J-Frame Ordering Information
J-Frame Rear Connecting Studs
K-Frame Ordering Information
K-Frame Rear Connecting Studs
.
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Stud
Catalogue
Number
Panel Thickness
in Inches (mm)
Tube Length
in Inches (mm) Tube
Catalogue
NumberABC
250A Short
250A Short
250A Short
250A Long
250A Long
250A Long
5010D23G01
5010D23G01
5010D23G01
5010D23G02
5010D23G02
5010D23G02
.75 – 1.00 (19.1 – 24.5)
.50 – .75 (12.7 – 19.1)
.25 – .50 (6.4 – 12.7)
.75 – 1.00 (19.1 – 24.5)
.50 – .75 (12.7 – 19.1)
.25 – .50 (6.4 – 12.7)
.84 (21.4)
1.09 (27.7)
1.03 (26.2)
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.88 (98.6)
4.13 (104.9)
4.38 (111.3)
456D983H05
456D983H06
456D983H07
5010D23H05
5010D23H06
5010D23H07
Stud
Length
Stud
Catalogue
Number
Panel Thickness
in Inches (mm)
Tube Length
in Inches (mm) Standard Tube
Catalogue
Number
Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
ABC DEF
400A Short
400A Short
400A Short
400A Long
400A Long
400A Long
6642C14G02
6642C14G04
6642C14G06
6642C14G03
6642C14G05
6642C14G07
.75 – 1 (19.1 – 24.5)
.5 – .75 (12.7 – 18.4)
.25 – .5 (6.35 – 12.7)
.75 – 1 (19.1 – 24.5)
.5 – .75 (12.7 – 18.4)
.25 – .5 (6.35 – 12.7)
.84 (21.3)
1.09 (27.69)
1.03 (26.16)
—
—
—
—
—
—
3.78 (96.0)
4.03 (102.4)
4.28 (108.7)
313C909H17
313C909H18
313C909H19
313C909H20
313C909H21
313C909H22
—
—
—
—
6.58 (167.1)
—
3.66 (93.0)
—
—
—
—
—
.75 – 16 (19.1 – 406.4)
—
—
—
—
—
Mountin
g
Pane
l
D
o
N
ot
Use
M
o
r
e
Th
a
n 1
0
F
t
. L
bs.
Torque to Ti
g
hten Nut
s
C
A
.31
(
7.9
)
–
1
8
Thr
ead
Breaker
r
B
6
.
66
(
169.2
)
.
06
(
1.5
)
.
59
(
15.0
)
159
1
.
59
(
40.4
)
.
03
(
.7
)
.50
(
12.7
)
–
13 Thread
h
r
e
363
3
.
63
(92
.
2)
(92 2)
Mountin
g
Pane
l
Breaker Mountin
g
Su
rf
ace
“
F
”
Thr
ead
C
A
A
A
D
B
E
.
06
(
1.5
)
167
1
.
67
(42.4)
42 4
EXTA 2011 Page 146 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 147
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-19
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
External Accessories Rear Connecting Studs
L-Frame Ordering Information
L-Frame Rear Connecting Stud
Stud Length (A)
in Inches (mm)
Stud Catalogue
Number
5.47 (138.9)
7.97 (202.4)
10.47 (265.9)
314C960G07
314C960G08
314C960G09
A
A
A
I
n
sulato
r
s
Nut
Rear
C
onnectin
g
S
Stud
Was
h
er
Insulatin
g
Pane
l
Ci
r
cuit
B
r
eaker
.44
(
11.2
)
M-Frame Ordering Information
Not CSA and UL Listed.
N-Frame Ordering Information
Not CSA and UL Listed.
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Diameter,
in Inches (mm)
and Thread
Extension
Back of Breaker,
in Inches (mm)
Stud
Catalogue
Numbers
225
400
400
400
600
600
600
800
800
800
.50 (12.7) – 13
.75 (19.1) – 16
.75 (19.1) – 16
.75 (19.1) – 16
1.00 (25.4) – 12
1.00 (25.4) – 12
1.00 (25.4) – 12
1.13 (28.7) – 12
1.13 (28.7) – 12
1.13 (28.7) – 12
3.66 (93.0)
5.91 (150.1)
8.41 (213.6)
10.91 (277.0)
5.91 (150.1)
8.41 (213.6)
10.91 (277.0)
5.91 (150.1)
8.41 (213.6)
10.91 (277.0)
314C960G01
314C960G04
314C960G05
314C960G06
314C960G07
314C960G08
314C960G09
314C960G10
314C960G11
314C960G12
Stud
Ampere
Rating
Diameter,
in Inches (mm)
and Thread
Extension
Back of Breaker,
in Inches (mm)
Stud
Catalogue
Numbers
800
800
800
1200
1200
1.13 (28.7) – 12
1.13 (28.7) – 12
1.13 (28.7) – 12
1.25 (31.8) – 12
1.25 (31.8) – 12
5.5 (139.7)
8 (203.2)
10.5 (266.7)
5.5 (139.7)
10.5 (266.7)
623B222G01
623B222G02
623B222G03
373B375G04
373B375G03
EXTA 2011 Page 147 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
148 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-20
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Panelboard Connecting Straps
Panelboard Connecting Straps
Product Description
Panelboard Connecting Straps are used to connect the circuit
breaker terminals to the panelboard bus. The panelboard
connecting straps are available with various ratings for outside
and centre poles. (Field installation only.)
Panelboard connecting straps are available to meet the needs of
most standard panelboard applications. Style numbers for
mounting brackets for CDP panelboard installations are also
included.
Refer to panelboard manufacturer for compatibility.
F-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
F-Frame Mounting Bracket
J-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
J-Frame Mounting Bracket
K-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
K-Frame Mounting Bracket
L-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
L-Frame Mounting Bracket
M-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
M-Frame Mounting Bracket
N-Frame Panelboard Connecting Straps
N-Frame Mounting Bracket (Four[4] Required)
Bus Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Pole Connector Type
Centre Outside
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
2.75 (69.9)
2.75 (69.9)
2.75 (69.9)
50
100
150
673B142G02
673B142G02
673B142G04
673B142G09
673B142G10
673B142G03
3.5 (88.9)
3.5 (88.9)
3.5 (88.9)
50
100
150
1253C72G01
1253C73G03
1253C73G01
1253C72G03
1253C73G06
1253C73G05
Number
of Poles
Catalogue
Number
2
3
624B600H02
624B600H01
Bus Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Pole Connector Type
Centre Outside
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
3.5 (88.9) 250 2600D26G01 2600D26G02
Number
of Poles
Catalogue
Number
2, 3 1576707
Bus Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Pole Connector Type
Centre Outside
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
3.5 (88.9) 400 4212B78G02 4212B77G01
Number
of Poles
Catalogue
Number
2, 3 208B264H01
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Pole Connector Type
Centre Outside
Catalogue Number
Catalogue
Number
600 624B609G01 506C052G01
Number
of Poles
Catalogue
Number
2, 3 208B297H01
Bus Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Connector
Type
Pole Connector Type
Catalogue
Number
3.5 (88.9) 800 Short
Medium
Long
314C996G01
314C996G02
314C996G03
Catalogue
Number
315C270H01
Bus Spacing
in Inches
(mm)
Continuous
Current Rating
(Amperes)
Connector
Type
Pole Connector Type
Catalogue
Number
3.5 (88.9) 1200 Short
Medium
Long
505C606G04
505C606G05
505C606G06
Catalogue
Number
315C270H01
.
EXTA 2011 Page 148 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 149
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-21
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Handle Mechanisms
Handle Mechanisms
Overview
Handle Mechanisms are used to
operate moulded case circuit breakers,
moulded case switches and motor
circuit protectors. They are available in
three basic configurations — Flange
Mounted, Through-the-Door and Direct
(Close-Coupled) — providing safe,
dependable operation and ease of
installation.
●Flange Mounted
●Flex Shaft
●Through-the-Door
●Series C Rotary
●Universal Rotary
●Direct (Close-Coupled)
●Euro IEC
●G Direct
Handle mechanisms are typically used on
enclosed circuit breakers, control panels
and motor control centres in many
different applications. Eaton has a handle
mechanism for virtually any need.
Flange Mounted Handle
Mechanisms
Flex Shaft™
Flange Mounted Handle Mechanisms
mount on the flange of an enclosure
door. The Flex Shaft™ is an extra heavy-
duty mechanism that includes a flexible
shaft in various lengths, 3 feet (.9 m)
through 10 feet (3 m) for use with various
size enclosures.
The Flex Shaft Handle will accept up to
three padlock shackles, each with a
maximum diameter of 3/8-inch
(9.5 mm). Can be used with NEMA 1, 3R
and 12 fabricated enclosures. An optional
handle is available for Flex Shaft that is
suitable for use with NEMA 4 and 4X
environments. Flex Shaft comes preset
from the factory, requiring only minor
field adjustments on installation, which
takes about 10 minutes — a significant
time savings compared to installation of
other types of flange handle
mechanisms. The Flex Shaft mechanism
also takes up less interior enclosure
space than competitive designs and the
handle fits standard flange cutouts. Flex
Shaft handle can be remotely mounted
from breaker, where an operator can use
it by “funneling” the cable through
conduit.
Flex Shaft is UL Listed under File E64893
and meets CSA requirements.
Note: Refer to Eaton’s Catalogue “Your Electrical Solutions” (3rd Edition), section 3, Pages 3 - 76
for information on type Vari-Depth, Slide Plate, MC, SM and AMT handle mechanisms.
EXTA 2011 Page 149 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
150 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-22
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Handle Mechanisms
Flex Shaft Ordering Information
Flex Shaft Ordering Information (Continued)
Note: Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. Add Suffix X to complete Catalogue Number.
Add Suffix I to complete Catalogue Number for IEC handle.
Original narrow handle design (No C Suffix) is available. Remove C from Catalogue Number.
Note: When selecting the length of shaft, ensure minimum bending radius of 4 inches
(101.6 mm) is maintained to operate properly, for G, F, J, K Frames. (5 inches [127mm] for L, N, R
Frames)
The standard method of shipment includes the mechanism preset at the factory; however, minor
field adjustments may be required.
Note: Dual breakers operator available on F-Frame only.
Only the F, J & K can mount LH & RH, all others RH only.
Suitable for GHC, GCH and GD circuit breakers and moulded case switches; not suitable for GMCP.
Breaker Frame
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
3 (.9) 4 (1.2) 5 (1.5) 6 (1.8)
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
G
F
F0S03C
F1S03C
F0S04C
F1S04C
F0S05C
F1S05C
F0S06C
F1S06C
F (Dual)
J
K
F1S03CD
F2S03C
F3S03C
F1S04CD
F2S04C
F3S04C
F1S05CD
F2S05C
F3S05C
F1S06CD
F2S06C
F3S06C
L and MDL
N
R
N/A
N/A
N/A
F4S04C
F5S04C
F6S04
F4S05C
F5S05C
F6S05
F4S06C
F5S06C
F6S06
Breaker Frame
Flexible Shaft Length in Feet (m)
7 (2.1) 8 (2.4) 9 (2.7) 10 (3.0)
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
G
F
N/A
F1S07C
N/A
F1S08C
N/A
F1S09C
N/A
F1S10C
F (Dual)
J
K
F1S07CD
F2S07C
F3S07C
F1S08CD
F2S08C
F3S08C
F1S09CD
F2S09C
F3S09C
F1S10CD
F2S10C
F3S10C
L and MDL
N
R
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F4S10C
F5S10C
N/A
Flex Shaft Accessories
(F- through R-Frame)
Type C361 NEMA 12 Safety Door Hardware
Type C361 Door Hardware Kits are
designed to function with the Flex Shaft
operating mechanisms.
These kits are designed to use with
small enclosures up to 40 inches,
intermediate 40-60 inches or larger floor
cases over 60 inches to provide
enclosure sealing and protection against
unauthorized entry. These kits can be
used on enclosure flanges with material
thickness ranging from 16 gauge through
3/16 inches with flanges on the right side
only. Door hardware kits are to be
installed in a commercially available
enclosure. Consult the enclosure
manufacturer application data for proper
kit selection.
Type C361 NEMA 12 Safety Door
Hardware for Flex Shaft
Customer: Consult with box manufacturer for correct door
hardware and any adapters required for assembly.
The 1/4 inch x 1/2 inch (6.35 x 12.7 mm) standard mill
rectangular locking bar is not supplied with these kits.
Third roller latch for use with 4 or 6 inch (101.6 or 152.4
mm) handle when 3 point latching is required.
Flange Mounted Instruction Leaflets
Handle Length
in Inches (mm)
Catalogue
Number
4 (101.6)
6 (152.4)
C361KJ4
C361KJ6
Roller Latch C361KR
Breaker Frame Instruction Leaflet Number
Flex Shaft
G IL01219014
F
J
K
15609
15605
15604
L and M
N
R
15606
15606
15606
.
EXTA 2011 Page 150 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 151
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-23
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Handle Mechanisms
Through-the-Door
Handle Mechanisms
Series C Rotary
Universal Rotary
Through-the-Door Handle Mechanisms
mount on the front of an enclosure or
cabinet door and externally operate the
circuit breaker via a variable depth shaft
or a linear operator (Type MC). Each
rotary type handle mechanism includes a
handle, base operating mechanism and
shaft that can be cut to various lengths.
Series C Rotary handle mechanisms are
for use with Moulded Case Circuit
Breakers (F, J, K, L, MDL, N), Moulded
Case Switches and Motor Circuit
Protectors.
Series C Rotary is suitable for use with
NEMA 1, 3R, 12 and 4/4X enclosure
types. Type 4/4X application requires
special handle, see “Ordering
Information”.
The Universal Rotary handle mechanisms
are for use with Moulded Case Circuit
Breakers (G, F, J, K, L, MDL), Moulded
Case Switches and Motor Circuit
Protectors.
The Universal Rotary is suitable for use
with NEMA 1 and 12 enclosure types.
All Rotary handle mechanisms include a
handle “Lock Off”, to prevent turning the
breaker ON while in the OFF position. All
Rotary handles indicate ON/OFF/Tripped/
Reset positions, however, Universal
Rotary has the added feature of
international markings for ON (I) and OFF
(O).
Series C Rotary handle is metal, Universal
Rotary handle is made of moulded
material. Series C Rotary handle is black
and Universal Rotary is available in black
or yellow/red.
Series C Rotary handle was
ergonomically designed with extra
clearance for a “gloved hand” to operate.
Handle has a 45 degree rotation.
Universal Rotary has a 90 degree rotation
(“pipe valve” operation) where ON is
vertical and OFF is horizontal. Shafts
include a support brace to ensure proper
alignment. In addition, the 16-inch (406.4
mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm) extra long
shafts include an adjustable support
bracket.
Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary, are
UL Listed and meet CSA requirements.
Universal Rotary also meets IEC947-1/2
for international compliance. Rotary UL
File Number E64893.
Features Comparison of Series C Rotary and Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism
Type 4/4X application requires special handle. See “Ordering Information.”
All rotary handle mechanisms include a handle “Lock Off” to prevent turning the breaker ON while in the OFF position.
Series C Rotary handle was ergonomically designed with extra clearance for a “gloved hand” to operate. Handle has a 45-degree rotation. Universal Rotary has a 90-degree rotation (“pipe valve”
operation) where ON is vertical and OFF is horizontal. Shafts include a support brace to ensure proper alignment.
Rotary
NEMA Enclosure Type
Handle
Lock-Off
Handle Indication: ON/
OFF TRIPPED/RESET
International
Markings ON (I)
OFF (O)
Handle
Material
Available
Handle Colours
Handle
Rotation
Shaft Lengths
(Inches)1 3R 12 4/4X
Series C Rotary X X X X X X — Metal Black 45 deg. 6, 12, 16, 24
Universal
Rotary
X — X — X X X Moulded
Plastic
Yellow/Red/
Black
90 deg. 6, 12
EXTA 2011 Page 151 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
152 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-24
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Handle Mechanisms
Series C Rotary Handle Mechanism Ordering Information
Complete Catalogue Number includes the standard handle, mechanism, shaft and support brace/bracket. Type 4/4X handle mechanisms are available. Add suffix X to complete catalogue number.
Standard handle is designed suitable for Types 1, 3R and 12 enclosures. For International type standard handle, contact Eaton for style numbers.
Breaker mechanism includes a shaft support bracket and its parts.
Longer shafts,16-inch (406.4 mm) and 24-inch (609.6 mm), include an adjustable support extension.
IEC Handle Mechanism supplied with Metric thread mounting hardware.
Complete Catalogue Number includes a handle, mechanism and shaft.
For International type 4/4X handle, contact Eaton for style numbers.
Shaft
Length
Inches (mm)
Complete
Catalogue
Number
(Domestic)
Separate Catalogue Number Complete Catalogue Number (International)
Standard Handle
(Domestic) Mechanism Shaft IEC IP65 IEC IP66
F-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
16 (406.4)
24 (609.6)
HM1R06
HM1R12
HM1R16
HM1R24
6648C22G25
6648C22G25
6648C22G25
6648C22G25
6648C23G11
6648C23G11
6648C23G11
6648C23G11
4217B37G08
4217B37G05
4217B37G06
4217B37G07
WHM1R06
WHM1R12
WHM1R16
WHM1R24
WHM1R06X
WHM1R12X
WHM1R16X
WHM1R24X
J-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
16 (406.4)
24 (609.6)
HM2R06
HM2R12
HM2R16
HM2R24
6648C22G01
6648C22G01
6648C22G01
6648C22G01
6648C23G21
6648C23G21
6648C23G21
6648C23G21
4217B37G08
4217B37G05
4217B37G06
4217B37G07
WHM2R06
WHM2R12
WHM2R16
WHM2R24
WHM2R06X
WHM2R12X
WHM2R16X
WHM2R24X
K-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
16 (406.4)
24 (609.6)
HM3R06
HM3R12
HM3R16
HM3R24
6648C22G01
6648C22G01
6648C22G01
6648C22G01
6648C23G25
6648C23G25
6648C23G25
6648C23G25
4217B37G08
4217B37G05
4217B37G06
4217B37G07
WHM3R06
WHM3R12
WHM3R16
WHM3R24
WHM3R06X
WHM3R12X
WHM3R16X
WHM3R24X
L- and MDL-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
16 (406.4)
24 (609.6)
HM4R06
HM4R12
HM4R16
HM4R24
6648C22G11
6648C22G11
6648C22G11
6648C22G11
6648C23G19
6648C23G19
6648C23G19
6648C23G19
4217B37G08
4217B37G05
4217B37G06
4217B37G07
WHM4R06
WHM4R12
WHM4R16
WHM4R24
WHM4R06X
WHM4R12X
WHM4R16X
WHM4R24X
MD-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
16 (406.4)
24 (609.6)
HM7R06
HM7R12
HM7R16
HM7R24
6648C22G21
6648C22G21
6648C22G21
6648C22G21
6648C23G17
6648C23G17
6648C23G17
6648C23G17
4217B37G08
4217B37G05
4217B37G06
4217B37G07
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
N-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
16 (406.4)
24 (609.6)
HM5R06
HM5R12
HM5R16
HM5R24
6648C22G21
6648C22G21
6648C22G21
6648C22G21
6648C23G08
6648C23G08
6648C23G08
6648C23G08
4217B37G08
4217B37G05
4217B37G06
4217B37G07
WHM5R06
WHM5R12
WHM5R16
WHM5R24
WHM5R06X
WHM5R12X
WHM5R16X
WHM5R24X
.
Type 4/4X handles are similar to standard
handles except they include an internal
neoprene gasket. Due to gasketing effect
between the handle and the housing, the
handle may not indicate a tripped
position.
Type 4/4X Handles Assembly
(Domestic)
Series C Rotary Handle
Mechanism Accessories
As an option, an auxiliary switch is
offered so that the control panel builder
may electrically indicate the status of the
breaker. This accessory would be
mounted on the mechanism and comes
with 24-inch (609.6 mm) pigtail leads.
Series C Rotary Handle Mechanism
Auxiliary Switch
Frame Style Number
F 6648C22G27
J, K 6648C22G03
L, MDL 6648C22G13
MD, N 6648C22G23
Catalogue Number
5108A61G01
EXTA 2011 Page 152 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 153
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-25
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Handle Mechanisms
Universal Rotary Handle Mechanism Ordering Information
Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separate
Shaft Length
in Inches (mm)
Handle
Colour
Complete
Catalogue Number
G-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
GHMVD06B
GHMVD12B
GHMVD24B
GHMVD06R
GHMVD12R
GHMVD24R
F-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
FHMVD06B
FHMVD12B
FHMVD24B
FHMVD06R
FHMVD12R
FHMVD24R
J-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
JHMVD06B
JHMVD12B
JHMVD24B
JHMVD06R
JHMVD12R
JHMVD24R
K-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
KHMVD06B
KHMVD12B
KHMVD24B
KHMVD06R
KHMVD12R
KHMVD24R
L-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
24 (609.6)
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
LHMVD06B
LHMVD12B
LHMVD24B
LHMVD06R
LHMVD12R
LHMVD24R
MDL-Frame
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
6 (152.4)
12 (304.8)
Black
Black
Red
Red
MHMVD06B
MHMVD12B
MHMVD06R
MHMVD12R
.
Series C G-Frame Vari-Depth Handle Mechanism (Not Shown)
For Use With: Handle Color Complete
Catalogue NumberEnclosure Breaker Black
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R/12/4X
NEMA 3R/12/4X
GCH/GC/GHC/GD
GCH/GC/GHC/GD
GCH/GC/GHC/GD
GCH/GC/GHC/GD
Yellow
Black
Yellow
Black
HRGCV11L
HRGCV31L
HRGCV14L
HRGCV34L
NEMA 1
NEMA 1
NEMA 3R/12/4X
NEMA 3R/12/4X
GMCP
GMCP
GMCP
GMCP
Yellow
Black
Yellow
Black
HRGMV11L
HRGMV31L
HRGMV14L
HRGMV34L
Through-the-Door Handle Mechanism Instruction Leaflets
Number
Breaker
Frame Series C Rotary
Universal
Rotary
G—29C250
F
J
K
L
MDL
N
15594
15599
15600
15601
15601
15602
29C250
29C250
29C250
29C250
29C250
—
EXTA 2011 Page 153 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
154 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
Euro IEC Direct
Euro IEC Direct Ordering Information
G Direct
G Direct Ordering Information
Suitable for use on 2 or 3 Pole G-Frame.
Frame Black Handle Red Handle
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
F
J
K
HMCC1B
HMCC2B
HMCC3B
HMCC1R
HMCC2R
HMCC3R
L and M
N
R
HMCC4B
HMVD5B
HMVD6B
HMCC4R
—
—
Frame Black Handle Yellow Handle
with Shroud without Shroud with Shroud without Shroud
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
GD/
GHC/GCH
HRGCC1S HRGCC10 HRGCC3S HRGCC30
GMCP HRGMC1S HRGMC10 HRGMC3S HRGMC30
EXTA-26
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Handle Mechanisms
Direct (Close-Coupled)
Handle Mechanisms
Product Description
Direct (Close-Coupled) Handle
Mechanisms mount directly to the circuit
breaker. They are used in shallow
enclosures where the standard variable
depth Through-the-Door type
mechanism is not practical or cannot be
used. They are typically for applications
where high volume, standardized
enclosures are being fabricated.
The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism
can be used on F- through R-Frames.
The G Direct is available with a black or
yellow handle, and with or without a
shroud. It is suitable for use with NEMA
1 enclosures. It is for use only with the
G-Frame (GD, GHC, GCH, GMCP).
An escutcheon ring and interlock clip are
provided as standard. The standard
design includes a lock-off feature.
The Euro IEC Direct handle mechanism is
IEC-240-1. G Direct is UL listed and
meets CSA requirements.
EXTA 2011 Page 154 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 155
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-27
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Handle Mechanisms
Handle Extension Handle Extension is not included with J-,
K-, L- and M-Frame breakers. It must be
purchased separately.
Handle Extension
Handle Extension is included with
breaker with N- and R-Frame breakers.
Handle Extension
.
Frame
Style
Number
J, K
L, M
HEX3
HEX4
Frame
Style
Number
N
R
HEX5
HEX6
EXTA 2011 Page 155 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
156 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-28
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories Current Limiters, Alarms, Monitors and Test Kits
Type LFD Current Limiter
The LFD Current Limiter is an accessory
that bolts to the load end of a standard
FDB, FD, HFD or FDC thermal-magnetic
circuit breaker, providing 200,000A
interrupting capacity at up to 600V AC.
LFD current limiters for thermal-
magnetic circuit breakers are listed with
CSA and UL. (UL File E47239).
The LFD Current Limiter can also be used with the 3-pole
FDE, HFDE or FDCE electronic circuit breakers.
Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C407
IQ Energy Sentinel
The IQ Energy Sentinel is a highly
accurate, microprocessor-based, breaker-
mounted device designed to monitor
power and energy readings. It represents
an alternative to watt meters, watt-hour
meters, and watt demand meters.
Key advantages include savings in space,
lower installation costs, and remote
monitoring capability.
The IQ Energy Sentinel mounts on the load
side of a Series C F-Frame (150 ampere)
circuit breaker. It can be applied on three-
phase, four-wire systems, or single-phase,
three-wire systems with voltage
connected through phases A and C.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 17437
For more information see Descriptive
Bulletin 8178.
Ground Fault Alarm Unit
The Ground Fault Alarm Unit is a
remotely mounted device with a
combination indicating light/test button
that will light when the breaker trips or
alarms on ground fault. The Ground Fault
Alarm Unit requires a separate 120V AC
power source to power the light and the
internal relay which has 1NO and 1NC
contacts for remote indication. The
Ground Fault Alarm Unit can be panel
mounted for ordering with an optional
face mounting bracket.
For use on Digitrip 310 LSG and LSIG trip
units K- through N-Frame and Digitrip
Optim 550/1150 LSIG and LSIA trip unit
c/w Zone interlocking feature (K-, L- & N-
Frame).
GF Alarm Unit Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C614
Diagram
Solid-State (Electronic)
Portable Test Kit
The Solid-State (Electronic) Portable Test
Kit provides verification of performance
of all ratings of Digitrip 310 electronic trip
units installed in circuit breakers while in
service under varying load and/or phase
imbalance. The test kit operates on 120-
volt, 50/60 Hz power; it includes
complete instructions and test times for
testing long time, short time/
instantaneous operation and optional
ground fault operation of the circuit
breaker.
Test Kit Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Number 270
Circuit Breaker Rating
Amperes Catalogue Number
15 – 70
80 – 150
LFD3070R
LFD3150R
Description
Catalogue
Number
Ground Fault Alarm
Unit
GFAU
Face Mounting
Bracket
1264C67G01
Description
Catalogue
Number
Solid-State (Electronic)
Portable Test Kit
STK2
.
EXTA 2011 Page 156 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 157
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-29
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories OPTIM System Components
Breaker Interface
Module (BIM)
The Breaker Interface Module (BIM) is a
panel mounted user interface device that
is mounted on the front of an electrical
assembly or at a remote location. The
BIM is used to access, configure, test
and display information for OPTIM trip
units and other devices. The BIM
consists of four display windows, eight
function buttons, 18 LEDs, and a
graphical time/current curve to provide
breaker status, operational information,
protection status and energy monitoring.
A 24V DC power supply is required to
provide power to the BIM. This is
supplied by the switchboard builder to
Eaton’s specifications. The BIM is a
member of Eaton’s PowerNet family of
communicating devices that connects
OPTIM trip units, Digitrip RMS 810/910
trip units and energy sentinels as a
subnetwork system. The BIM can also
be connected to a main network via a
PONI module to PowerNet software.
Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C893
Digitrip OPTIMizer
The Digitrip OPTIMizer is a hand-held
programmer that is used to access,
configure, test and display information
from OPTIM trip units. The OPTIMizer
plugs into the front of an OPTIM trip unit
via an eight-pin telephone jack and is
powered by a nine-volt battery or the
auxiliary power module. One highlighted
feature is the “Copy” and “Download”
commands. Setting up multiple OPTIM
trips can be finished in minutes and with
no errors. An Auxiliary Power Module
connection provides a trip test when
control power is not present at the
breaker. The OPTIMizer is supplied as a
standard package to include the
programmer, the eight-pin connection
cord, battery and carrying case. The
Auxiliary Power Module is optional.
Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C892
Note: 24V DC Power Supply
A 24V DC power supply is required for all
Digitrip OPTIM trip units that are required to
communicate either on the main Eaton
PowerNet network or as a subnetwork to a
BIM. The breaker’s load is 45 mA of current.
Typically one power supply is required per
switchboard and can provide control power to
a BIM and the OPTIM trip units. The 24V DC
power supply should be an “isolated high
quality” power supply with a “CE” label, and is
normally provided by the switchboard
manufacturer to Eaton’s recommendations.
Auxiliary Power Module
The Auxiliary Power Module is a power
supply requiring 120V AC input at 50 or
60 Hz that provides a 32V DC output. The
Auxiliary Power Module provides control
power for testing an OPTIM trip unit
when other means of control power is
not available or for continuous OPTIMizer
operation versus temporary with a battery.
The Auxiliary Power Module connects
into the top of the Digitrip OPTIMizer via
a keyed receptacle. The main application
for the Auxiliary Power Module would be
for the testing of a stand-alone non-
communicating OPTIM breaker that
ordinarily would not have control power.
Note: The OPTIMizer can work off of 32V DC
control power, although 24V DC is the standard
on OPTIM breakers.
Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C890
Catalogue
Number
BIMII
Catalogue
Number
OPTIMizer – Standard Package
Catalogue
Number
PRTBAPMDV
EXTA 2011 Page 157 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
158 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EXTA-30
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
External Accessories OPTIM System Components
Potential Transformer Module
The Potential Transformer Module is required for Digitrip OPTIM
1050 to provide a voltage input to allow the trip unit to monitor
power and energy as well as power factor. The Potential
Transformer Module is a 6 VA transformer with a primary
voltage input of up to 600V line to line. Three 0.1 ampere fuses
are provided on the primary of the transformer and can be used
for isolation purposes during dielectric testing. The device is
normally panel mounted and can feed up to 16 OPTIM trip units.
Module Ordering Information
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 29C894 Diagram
Description
Catalogue
Number
Potential Transformer Module DOPTMLN
EXTA 2011 Page 158 Thursday, October 6, 2011 10:37 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
159
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM-1
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Dimensions Frame Size GD and GDB
Dimensions
GD-Frame, 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
GDB-Frame, 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Off
3.00
(76.2)
4.88
(123.8)
2.63
(66.7)
Front View Side View
3.00
(76.2)
Max.
2.63
(66.7)
4.00
(101.6)
Front View
Side View
Dimensions 2011 Page 159 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:45 PM
160 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM-2
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Dimensions Frame Size GC/GHC/GCH and GB/GHB/GBH
GC/GHC/GCH-Frame, 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
GB/GHB/GBH-Frame, 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.97
(24.6)
3.22
(81.7) OFF
3.00
(76.2)
4.88
(123.8)
2.81
(71.4)
Front View Side View
3.00
(76.2)
2.63
(66.7)
4.00
(101.6)
Front View
Side View
Dimensions 2011 Page 160 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:45 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
161
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM-3
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Dimensions Frame Size FD and JD
FD-Frame, 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
JD-Frame, 2- and 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3.38
(85.7)
6.00
(152.4)
4.13
(104.9)
On
Off
Front View Side View
4.13
(104.8)
10.00
(254.0)
ON
OFF
4.06
(103.2)
0.34 R
(8.7 R)
1.56
(39.7) 0.78
(19.8)
3.94
(100.0)
2.92
(74.2)
0.88
(22.2)
3.33
(84.5)
0.72
(18.2)
1.38
(34.9)
1.75
(44.5)
2.75
(69.9)
3.50
(88.9)
C
LHandle
BreakerC
L
Front View
Side View
0.19 R
(4.8) R
0.50 (12.7)
Diameter
3 Megger Holes
if Required
Front View Cutout
Dimensions 2011 Page 161 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:45 PM
162 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM-4
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Dimensions Frame Size KD and LD
KD-Frame, 2- and 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
LD-Frame, 2- and 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
5.49
(139.4)
ON
OFF
10.13
(257.2)
4.31
(109.6)
0.34 R
(8.7 R)
0.19 R
(4.8 R)
3.75
(95.3)
0.83
(21.0) 1.64
(41.7)
1.25
(31.8)
1.31
(33.3)
2.63
(66.7)2.39
(60.7)
4.78
(121.5)
C
LHandle
Front View Side View
Front Cover Cutout
10.75
(273.1)
8.25
(209.6)
3.81
(96.8)
8.21
(208.6)
Handle
7.28
(184.9)
0.19 R
(4.8) R
3.64
(92.5)
1.50
(38.1)
2.29
(58.2)
1.33
(33.7)
1.72
(43.7)
3.44
(87.3)
3.28
(83.3)
0.25 (6.4) R
Breaker
C
L
C
L
Front View
Side View
Front Cover Cutout
Dimensions 2011 Page 162 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:45 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
163
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM-5
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Dimensions Frame Size MDL and ND
ND-Frame, 2- and 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
MDL-Frame, 2- and 3-Pole — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
16.00
(406.4) ON/I
OFF/O
8.25
(209.6)
5.50
(139.7)
3.44
(87.3)
1.72
(43.6)
1.91
(48.4)
3.68
(93.2)
1.50
(38.1)
3.19
(80.9) 6.38
(161.9)
0.19 R
(4.8 R)
0.25 R
(6.4 R)
C
LHandle
C
LHandle
Front View Side View
Front Cover Cutout
16.00
(406.4)
8.25
(209.6)
4.06
(103.2)
3.44
(87.3)
1.72
(43.7)
C
LBreaker R 0.25
(6.4)
R 0.19
(4.8)
1.50
(38.1)
3.64
(92.5)
7.28
(184.9)
0.97
(24.6)
3.28
(83.3)
1.33
(33.7)
Handle
C
L
Front View Side View
Drilling Plan
Dimensions 2011 Page 163 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:45 PM
164 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM
DIM-6
Series C Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Dimensions Frame Size RD
RD-Frame, 3-Pole, 1600 and 2000 Amperes — Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CSA is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association. National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection
Association, Quincy, Mass. NEMA is the registered trademark and service mark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. UL is a registered trademark
of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. Kirk is a registered trademark of the Kirk Key Interlock Company LLC. Square D is a federally registered trademark of SNA
Holdings Inc. Federal Pioneer is a federally registered name of Electro-Mechanical Corporation. Cutler-Hammer is a federally registered trademark of Eaton
Corporation.
Push
To
Tri p
9.69
(246.1)
5.09
(129.4)
7.25
(184.2)
14.50
(368.3)
C
LBreaker
Handle
C
L
11.13 (0.4) Dia.
(4 Holes) Use 4,
0.38 (Mil) Dia. Bolts
for Mounting Breaker
7.75
(196.9)
15.00
(381.0)
0.16
(4.0)
R Typ.
6.65
(166.7) 12.91
(327.8)
Front View
Side View
15.50
(393.7)
9.00
(228.6)
16.00
(406.4)
Dimensions 2011 Page 164 Saturday, September 17, 2011 2:45 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
165
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-1
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Non-fused
Type FCL Breaker
Type FCL Current Limit-R Thermal-Magnetic Circuit
Breakers — Non-fused
Product Description
●
15 to 100 amperes, 480V AC
●
Non-interchangeable trip, line and load terminals included
Standards and Certifications
●
Listed with Canadian Standards Association and Underwriters
Laboratories except as noted
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B phase applications, refer to
Eaton.
Line and Load Terminals
Breakers listed include line and load terminals. Terminals are
CSA and UL listed for wire sizes and types listed below. When
used with aluminum cable, use joint compound. To order
optional aluminum terminals, add Suffix
Z
to breaker Catalogue
Number listed.
Line and Load Terminals
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs. (Kg)
Product Selection
Type FCL Circuit Breakers
2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the
centre pole.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Volts AC
(50/60 Hz)
Interrupting Capacity
(Symmetrical Amperes)
(kA)
FCL
240
480
200
150
Maximum Breaker Amperes Wire Type AWG Wire Range
Standard Pressure Terminals
100 Al/Cu 14 – 1/0
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
50
100
Al/Cu
Al/Cu
14 – 4
4 – 4/0
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2 – 3 4.13
(104.8)
8.8
(222.3)
3.4
(85.7)
2-Pole 9 (4.1)
3-Pole 9 (4.1)
Max. Cont. Amp Rating
@ 40°C
2-Pole
3-Pole
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
FCL2015L
FCL2020L
FCL2025L
FCL2030L
FCL2035L
FCL2040L
FCL2045L
FCL2050L
FCL2060L
FCL2070L
FCL2080L
FCL2090L
FCL2100L
FCL3015L
FCL3020L
FCL3025L
FCL3030L
FCL3035L
FCL3040L
FCL3045L
FCL3050L
FCL3060L
FCL3070L
FCL3080L
FCL3090L
FCL3100L
CLCP 2011 Page 165 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
166 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-2
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Non-Fused
Type LCL Breaker
Type LCL Current Limit-R
Electronic Circuit Breakers —
Non-fused
Product Description
●
125 to 400 amperes, 600V AC with
solid-state trip units
Standards and Certifications
●
Listed with Canadian Standards
Association and Underwriters
Laboratories except as noted.
Technical Data
and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489
Interrupting Capacity Ratings
On all 3-phase Delta, Grounded B phase
applications, refer to Eaton.
.
Circuit
Breaker
Type
Volts AC
(50/60 Hz)
Interrupting Capacity
(Symmetrical
Amperes) (kA)
LCL
240
480
600
200
200
100
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (Kg)
Product Selection
Standard Breakers 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
Complete breaker requires frame, rating plug and terminals.
Standard Breakers 600V AC, 50/60 Hz
2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the centre pole.
CSA and UL listed recognized component.
Note:
Instruction Leaflet Number 15257
Breakers with Built-in Ground Fault Protection
Complete breaker requires frame, rating plug and terminals — extra current
transformer included for neutral.
Breakers with Built-in Ground Fault Protection
2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the centre pole.
Note:
Instruction Leaflet Number 15495
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2 – 3 16 (406.40) 8.25 (209.56) 4.0625 (103.19)
Standard With Ground Fault
2-Pole
32 (14.515) —
3-Pole
32 (14.515) 36 (16.329)
Frame Only
Poles
Standard
(Long Delay, Short Time Trip and
Current Limiting)
Short Time Only
and Current Limiting
Long Delay, Short Time Trip and
Adjustable Short Delay Time (.08-
.28 seconds) and Current Limiting
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Types LCL and LCLA 250 Ampere Frame (125 – 250 Amperes)
2
3
LCL2250F
LCL3250F
LCL2250FM
LCL3250FM
LCLA2250F
LCLA3250F
Type LCL and LCLA 400 Ampere Frame (200 – 400 Amperes)
2
3
LCL2400F
LCL3400F
LCL2400FM
LCL3400FM
LCLA2400F
LCLA3400F
Frame Only
Poles
Standard
(Long Delay, Short Time Trip, Current Limiting
and Ground Fault Trip)
Long Delay, Short Time Trip and Adjustable
Short Delay Time (.06-.22 seconds),
Ground Fault Trip and Current Limiting
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Types LCLG and LCLGA 250 Ampere Frame (125-250 Amperes)
3
LCLG3250F LCLGA3250F
Types LCLG and LCLGA 400 Ampere Frame (200-400 Amperes)
3
LCLG3400F LCLGA3400F
CLCP 2011 Page 166 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
167
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-3
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current limiting Circuit Protectors Non-Fused
Terminals (Order Separately)
Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are CSA and UL
listed for wire type and range listed below. When used with
aluminum cable, use joint compound.
Note:
Terminals shipped separately from breaker.
Terminals
Rating Plug Selection Data
Rating plugs listed below are for both standard breakers and
breakers with built-in ground fault protection.
Rating Plugs Only (For 2- or 3-Pole Frames)
Adjustable 70 to 100% except as noted.
Adjustable 75 to 100%.
Adjustable 50 to 100%.
.
Max.
Breaker
Amps
Wire Range, Type,
Number of Cables
Terminal
Catalogue
Number
Standard Copper Pressure Terminals
225
400
(1) 6 AWG – 350 kcmil Cu
(1) 4 AWG – 250 kcmil Cu, plus
(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Cu
T225LA
T401LA
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
225
400
(1) 6 AWG – 350 kcmil Cu, or
(1) 4 AWG – 350 kcmil Al
(1) 4 AWG – 250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus
(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA225LA1
TA400LA1
Cont.
Amp
Rating
Magnetic Trip
Setting, Amps
Fixed
Rating Plugs
Adjustable
Rating Plugs
Low High
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Types LCL and LCLA 250 Ampere Frames
125
150
175
200
225
250
375
450
525
600
675
750
1125
1350
1575
1800
2025
2250
2LCL125
2LCL150
2LCL175
2LCL200
2LCL225
2LCL250
—
—
A2LCL175
A2LCL200
A2LCL225
A2LCL250
Types LCL and LCLA 400 Ampere Frames
200
225
250
275
300
350
400
400
450
500
550
600
700
800
1600
1800
2000
2200
2400
2800
3200
4LCL200
4LCL225
4LCL250
4LCL275
4LCL300
4LCL350
4LCL400
—
—
—
—
A4LCL300
A4LCL350
A4LCL400
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLCP 2011 Page 167 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
168 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-4
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused
Type FB Tri-Pac Breaker
Type FB Tri-Pac
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit
Breakers — Fused
Product Description
●
15 to 100 amperes, 600V AC,
250V DC, replaceable current limiters
Standards and Certifications
●
Listed with Canadian Standards
Association and Underwriters
Laboratories except as noted.
Technical Data
and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489 Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
●
600V AC maximum: 200,000 amperes
symmetrical
Based on NEMA Test Procedures
●
250V DC maximum: 100,000 amperes
●
On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase
applications, refer to Eaton.
Line and Load Terminals
Breakers listed include line and load
terminals. Terminals are CSA and UL
listed for wire sizes and types listed
below. When used with aluminum cable,
use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add Suffix
Z
to
breaker Catalogue Number listed.
Line and Load Terminals
Maximum
Breaker Amps Wire Type
AWG Wire
Range
Standard Pressure Terminals
100 Al/Cu 14 – 1/0
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
50
100
Al/Cu
Al/Cu
14 – 4
4 – 4/0
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs.
Product Selection
Type FB Tri-Pac Circuit Breakers
2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the centre pole.
Note:
Instruction Leaflet Number 14536 (for fuse replacement)
Replacement Current Limiters and Housing Assembly
Current Limiters: One required per pole.
Replacement Current Limiters
Note:
Refer to CAT.71.01.T.E for complete application information.
Current Limiter Housing Assembly Complete with Current Limiter
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2 – 3 4.125 (104.78) 8.75 (222.25) 3.5 (88.90)
Breaker
Complete Breaker
2-Pole 3-Pole
FB Tri-Pac 10.5 11.5
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating
@ 40°C
2-Pole
➀
3-Pole
Catalogue Number
(Current Limiters
Included)
Catalogue Number
(Current Limiters
Included)
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
90
100
FB2015PL
FB2020PL
FB2030PL
FB2040PL
FB2050PL
FB2060PL
FB2070PL
FB2090PL
FB2100PL
FB3015PL
FB3020PL
FB3030PL
FB3040PL
FB3050PL
FB3060PL
FB3070PL
FB3090PL
FB3100PL
Application
Catalogue
Number
Supplied as standard in Type FB Tri-Pac breakers rated 15 – 100 amperes.
Replaces 200FBP03 formerly supplied on 15 – 40 ampere ratings, and 500FBP07 formerly supplied on 50
– 100 ampere ratings.
100FBP06
Ampere
Rating Poles
Catalogue
Number
15 – 100
15 – 100
2
3
176C593G09
176C593G10
.
CLCP 2011 Page 168 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
169
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-5
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused
Type LA Tri-Pac Breaker
Type LA Tri-Pac
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit
Breakers — Fused
Product Description
●
70 to 400 amperes, 600V AC,
250V DC
●
2-, 3-Pole, interchangeable trip,
replaceable current limiters
Standards and Certifications
●
Listed with Canadian Standards
Association and Underwriters
Laboratories, except as noted.
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489 Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
●
600V AC maximum: 200,000 amperes
symmetrical
Based on NEMA Test Procedures
●
250V DC maximum: 100,000 amperes
●
On all 3-phase Delta, Ground B phase
applications, refer to Eaton.
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs.
Product Selection
Type LA Tri-Pac Circuit Breakers
Set on high side, adjustable to lower limits.
Terminals shipped separately from breakers.
2-pole breakers or trips are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the centre pole.
Note:
Instruction Leaflet Number 14551 for Trip Unit and Fuse
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2 – 3 8.25 (201.0) 16 (406.4) 4.75 (113.5)
Breaker
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
LA Tri-Pac 29.75 34 23.5 25 2.25 3
Cont.
Amp
Rating
@40°C
Magnetic Trip
Setting Amps
Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Units, Limiters and Terminals
Includes Pressure
Type Copper
Terminals
Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Current Limiter
1 Required
per Pole
Low High
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
2 Poles, 600V AC, 250V DC
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
350
450
500
625
750
875
1000
1125
1250
1500
1750
2000
700
900
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
3000
3500
4000
LA2070PR
LA2090PR
LA2100PR
LA2125PR
LA2150PR
LA2175PR
LA2200PR
LA2225PR
LA2250PR
LA2300PR
LA2350PR
LA2400PR
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2400PRF
LA2070PT
LA2090PT
LA2100PT
LA2125PT
LA2150PT
LA2175PT
LA2200PT
LA2225PT
LA2250PT
LA2300PT
LA2350PT
LA2400PT
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
400LAP10
400LAP10
400LAP10
400LAP10
400LAP10
3 Poles, 600V AC, 250V DC
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
350
450
500
625
750
875
1000
1125
1250
1500
1750
2000
700
900
1000
1250
1500
1750
2000
2250
2500
3000
3500
4000
LA3070PR
LA3090PR
LA3100PR
LA3125PR
LA3150PR
LA3175PR
LA3200PR
LA3225PR
LA3250PR
LA3300PR
LA3350PR
LA3400PR
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3400PRF
LA3070PT
LA3090PT
LA3100PT
LA3125PT
LA3150PT
LA3175PT
LA3200PT
LA3225PT
LA3250PT
LA3300PT
LA3350PT
LA3400PT
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
200LAP08
400LAP10
400LAP10
400LAP10
400LAP10
400LAP10
.
CLCP 2011 Page 169 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
170 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-6
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused
Current Limiters
Included with complete breaker, one required per pole.
Current Limiters
Not listed with CSA and UL.
Protection based on 100,000 ampere maximum fault, 480V maximum.
Note:
New limiters suitable for replacement in existing breakers by using
plug-in conductor from old limiter (instructions included with limiter).
Instruction Leaflet Number 14824
Terminals (Order Separately)
Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are CSA and UL
listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add Suffix
Z
to complete breaker Catalogue
Number.
Note:
Terminals shipped separately from breakers.
Terminals
Optional terminal.
Note:
Instruction Leaflet Number 13732
Application Catalogue Number
Supplied as standard on ratings through 200 amperes.
200LAP08
Supplied as standard on 225 through 400 ampere ratings, optional on
lower ratings when a higher “cross-over point” is desired. (Above two
limiters replace 800LAP12 formerly supplied as standard on all ratings,
600LAP09 optional on all ratings through 300 amperes, 300LAP05
optional on ratings through 150 amperes, and special rating limiter
1000LAP14.)
400LAP10
Special rating where a higher “cross-over point” is desired on 200
ampere and higher ratings (Replaces limiter 1500LAP20)
500LAP15
Maximum
Breaker
Amperes
Wire Range, Type,
Number of Cables
Terminal
Catalogue
Number
Standard Copper Pressure Terminals
225
225
400
(1) 6 AWG – 350 kcmil Cu
(1) 6 AWG – 250 kcmil Cu
(1) 4 AWG – 250 kcmil Cu, plus
(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Cu
T225LA
T225LBF
T401LA
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
225
400
(1) 6 AWG – 350 kcmil Cu, or
(1) 4 AWG – 350 kcmil Cu/Al
(1) 4 AWG – 250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus
(1) 3/0 – 600 kcmil Al/Cu
TA225LA1
TA400LA1
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLCP 2011 Page 170 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 171
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-7
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused
Type NB Tri-Pac Breaker
Type NB Tri-Pac
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit
Breakers — Fused
Product Description
●300 to 800 amperes, 600V AC,
250V DC
Note: DC rating applies to 350 amperes
maximum thermal or to magnetic
only breakers.
●2-, 3-Pole, interchangeable trip,
replaceable current limiters
Standards and Certifications
●Listed with Canadian Standards
Association and Underwriters
Laboratories except as noted
Technical Data and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489 Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
●600V AC maximum: 200,000 amperes
symmetrical
Based on NEMA Test Procedures
●250V DC maximum: 100,000 amperes
Note: DC rating applies to 350 amperes
maximum thermal or to magnetic only
breakers.
●On all 3-phase Delta, grounded
B phase applications, refer to
Eaton.
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Approximate Shipping Weight, Lbs.
Product Selection
Type NB Tri-Pac Circuit Breakers
DC rating applies to 350 amperes maximum thermal or to magnetic only breakers.
2-pole breakers or trips are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from the centre pole.
60 Hz AC only.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 13771 for Trip Unit and Fuse
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2 – 3 8.25 (209.56) 22 (558.80) 5.5 (139.70)
Breaker
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
NB Tri-Pac 62 75 58 65 3.5 4
Cont.
Amp
Rating
@40°C
Magnetic Trip
Setting Amperes
Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Units, Limiters and Terminals
Includes Pressure
Type Copper
Terminals Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Current Limiter
1 Required
per Pole
Low High
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
2 Poles, 600V AC, 250V DC
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
1500
1750
2000
2500
3000
3000
3000
3000
3500
4000
5000
6000
6000
6000
NB2300P
NB2350P
NB2400P
NB2500P
NB2600P
NB2700P
NB2800P
NB2800PF
NB2800PF
NB2800PF
NB2800PF
NB2800PF
NB2800PF
NB2800PF
NB2300PT
NB2350PT
NB2400PT
NB2500PT
NB2600PT
NB2700PT
NB2800PT
500NBP12
500NBP12
500NBP12
500NBP12
800NBP20
800NBP20
800NBP20
3 Poles, 600V AC Only
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
1500
1750
2000
2500
3000
3000
3000
3000
3500
4000
5000
6000
6000
6000
NB3300P
NB3350P
NB3400P
NB3500P
NB3600P
NB3700P
NB3800P
NB3800PF
NB3800PF
NB3800PF
NB3800PF
NB3800PF
NB3800PF
NB3800PF
NB3300PT
NB3350PT
NB3400PT
NB3500PT
NB3600PT
NB3700PT
NB3800PT
500NBP12
500NBP12
500NBP12
500NBP12
800NBP20
800NBP20
800NBP20
.
CLCP 2011 Page 171 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
172 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-8
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused
Current Limiters
Included with complete breaker, one required per pole.
Current Limiters
Terminals (Order Separately)
Two terminals are required per pole. Terminals are CSA and UL
listed for wire size and type listed below. When used with
aluminum conductors, use joint compound. To order optional
aluminum terminals, add Suffix Z to complete breaker Catalogue
Number.
Note: Shipped separately from breaker.
Terminals
Application
Catalogue
Number
Supplied as standard on ratings through 500 amperes. 500NBP12
Supplied as standard on 600 – 800 ampere
ratings, optional on lower ratings when a higher “cross-over point” is
desired.
Above two limiters replace 1000NBP14 formerly supplied on ratings
up to 600 amperes, 1500NBP20 supplied on 700 amperes, and
2500NBP25 supplied on 800 amperes.
800NBP20
Max.
Amp
Rating
Wire Range, Type,
Number of Cables
Terminal
Catalogue
Number
Standard Copper Pressure Terminals
350
700
800
(1) 1 AWG – 600 kcmil Cu
(2) 2/0 – 500 kcmil Cu
(3) 3/0 – 500 kcmil Cu
T350NB
T700NB1
T1000NB1
Optional Al/Cu Pressure Terminals
700
800
800
(2) 1 AWG – 500 kcmil Al/Cu
(3) 3/0 – 400 kcmil Al/Cu
(3) 500 – 750 kcmil Al/Cu
TA700NB1
TA1000NB1
TA1201NB1
CLCP 2011 Page 172 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 173
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-9
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused
Type PB Tri-Pac Breaker
Product Selection
Type PB Tri-Pac Circuit Breakers
.
Cont.
Amp
Rating
@40°C
AC Magnetic Trip Setting
(Set on High Side, Adjustable
to Lower Limits)
Complete Breaker Shipped as Frame, Trip Unit Current Limiters and Connectors
Includes Rear
“T” Connectors Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Current Limiter
1 Required per Pole
Low High
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
2 Poles, 600V AC
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
1400
1600
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
2000
2500
3000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
6000
7000
8000
PB2600PR
PB2700PR
PB2800PR
PB2900PR
PB21000PR
PB21200PR
PB21400PR
PB21600PR
PB21600PRF
PB21600PRF
PB21600PRF
PB21600PRF
PB21600PRF
PB21600PRF
PB21600PRF
PB21600PRF
PB2600PRT
PB2700PRT
PB2800PRT
PB2900PRT
PB21000PRT
PB21200PRT
PB21400PRT
PB21600PRT
1000PBPR20
1000PBPR20
1000PBPR20
1000PBPR20
1000PBPR20
1600PBPR30
1600PBPR30
1600PBPR30
3 Poles, 600V AC Only
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
1400
1600
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
2000
2500
3000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
6000
7000
8000
PB3600PR
PB3700PR
PB3800PR
PB3900PR
PB31000PR
PB31200PR
PB31400PR
PB31600PR
PB31600PRF
PB31600PRF
PB31600PRF
PB31600PRF
PB31600PRF
PB31600PRF
PB31600PRF
PB31600PRF
PB3600PRT
PB3700PRT
PB3800PRT
PB3900PRT
PB31000PRT
PB31200PRT
PB31400PRT
PB31600PRT
1000PBPR20
1000PBPR20
1000PBPR20
1000PBPR20
1000PBPR20
1600PBPR30
1600PBPR30
1600PBPR30
Magnetic only trip units are available. Order by description.
2-pole breakers are supplied in 3-pole frames with current carrying parts omitted from centre pole.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 14503
Product Description
●600 to 1600 amperes, 600V AC,
60 Hz AC, 250V DC
Note: Higher frequency calibration not
available. Minimum of 50 Hz calibration
available on special order.
Note: 250V DC rating applies only to
magnetic only breakers.
●2-, 3-pole interchangeable trip,
replaceable current limiters
Standards and Certifications
●Listed with Canadian Standards
Association and Underwriters
Laboratories except as noted
Technical Data
and Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489 Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
●600V AC maximum: 200,000 amperes
symmetrical
Based on NEMA Test Procedures
●250V DC: 100,000 amperes
●On all 3-phase Delta, grounded
B phase applications, refer to
Eaton.
Dimensions/Weights
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Approximate Shipping Weight in Lbs. (Kg)
Number of Poles Width Height Depth
2 – 3 12.063 (306.4) 22.13 (562.0) 9.06 (230.2)
Breaker
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit
2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
PB Tri-Pac 148 (67.2) 179 (81.3) 106 (48.1) 120 (54.5) 18 (8.2) 23 (10.4)
Type PB Tri-Pac Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers — Fused
CLCP 2011 Page 173 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
174 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-10
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Fused
Current Limiters
Included with complete breaker, one required per pole.
Current Limiters
Bus Bar Connectors
“T” Connector for Cu/Al Bus
Two required per pole. For rear bus connection.
Accepts up to four bus bolts. May be rotated 90°.
Bus Bar Connectors
Note: Not listed with CSA and UL.
Cable Connector (Optional)
For “T” connector. Accepts four 600 kcmil
copper cables.
Cable Connector (Optional)
Special Breakers
Magnetic Only Type Tri-Pacs available on request.
Note: Not listed with CSA and UL.
Application
Catalogue
Number
Supplied as standard on ratings through 1000 amperes. (Replaces
limiter 1500PBPR30 formerly supplied on 600 and 700 ampere ratings,
and 3000 PBPR27 supplied on 800-1000 ampere ratings.)
1000PBPR20
Supplied as standard on 1200 through 1600 ampere ratings. Optional
on lower ratings where a higher “cross-over point” is desired.
(Replaces limiter 4000PBR30 formerly supplied on 1200 through 1400
ampere ratings, and 5000PBPR42 supplied on 1600 ampere ratings.)
1600PBPR30
Catalogue Number
BA2000PB
Catalogue Number
505C706G04
.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLCP 2011 Page 174 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 175
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-11
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories
Options and Accessories
Alarm Switch
For light or alarm indication when breaker
trips. Does not function with manual
operation. Automatically resets when
breaker is relatched. Standard leads
extend 18 inches (457.2 mm) outside of
breaker. Not field mountable.
Alarm Switch
When alarm switch is used in conjunction with auxiliary
switch, the auxiliary switch is rated 250 volts max., 5
amperes maximum.
Alarm Switch Contact Rating
(Non Inductive) LA Tri-Pac: 10 amperes,
120V AC; 5A, 240V AC.
Breaker
Frame
Normal
Pole Meeting
Contact Operation
(Specific Type Desired)
FCL
LA Tri-Pac
NB Tri-Pac
PB Tri-Pac
LCL
centre
Left
Left
Left
Left
Make or Break
Make or Break
Make or Break
Make or Break
Make or Break
Auxiliary Switch
For auxiliary control circuits. Miniature
switches mount within breaker.
Commonly used for remote indication of
open or closed breaker and electrically
interlocking component control circuits.
“A” contacts are closed when breaker is
closed. “B” contacts are open when
breaker is closed. Standard leads extend
18 inches (457.2 mm) outside
of breaker.
Note: Left-hand mounting is standard unless
otherwise specified.
Auxiliary Switch Attachment Kits for Field Mounting
All switches are multiples of 1A-1B with a common electrical connection (see Figure ).
Field mounting voids CSA and UL listing of breaker except on LCL, NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac breakers.
For DC applications refer to Eaton.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 14535 NB Tri-Pac; 14534 PB Tri-Pac; 15279 LCL
Factory Mounted Auxiliary Switches
Note: Left-hand mounting is standard
unless otherwise specified.
All of the above auxiliary switches can be
specified for factory mounting at the
same price as listed for the kit. These
attachments have the leads out the side
of the breaker and are CSA and UL listed
when factory mounted unless other non-
CSA/UL-listed modifications are used
(except as noted).
Factory mounted switches only can
be supplied for the following breakers:
FB Tri-Pac, LA Tri-Pac. Order by
description.
Note: Right-hand mounting for FB Tri-Pac only.
Auxiliary Switches
Breaker
Type
1A-1B 2A-2B Maximum
AC Voltage
Rating
Maximum
Non-Inductive
Amperes
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
For Right-Hand Mounting
FCL
NB Tri-Pac
PB Tri-Pac
LCL
1369D79G03
4980D16G05
2602D32G14
—
—
4980D16G06
2602D32G15
—
240
480
480
480
5
10
10
6 (10@240)
For Left-Hand Mounting
FCL
NB Tri-Pac
PB Tri-Pac
LCL
1369D79G03
4980D16G12
2602D32G11
1372D49G03
—
4980D16G13
2602D32G12
1372D49G06
240
480
480
480
5
10
10
6 (10@240)
.
Bl
ac
k L
ead
Bl
ue
L
ead
R
ed
L
ead
CLCP 2011 Page 175 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
176 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-12
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories
Shunt Trip
For tripping breaker from a remote point.
A solenoid device mounts within breaker
case. Breaker trips when coil is
energized.
Shunt trips should not be used as
circuit interlocks using maintained
contact pilot devices.
A cutoff switch breaks the circuit to the
momentary rated coil when breaker
opens. Available for control voltages up
to 250V DC or 600V AC. Voltage and
frequency must be specified. Standard
leads extend 18 inches (457.2 mm)
outside of breaker.
Shunt Trip for Field Mounting
120V AC ratings suitable for 55% pickup for ground fault applications.
Not field mountable on non-automatic breakers (MCS).
Field mounting voids breakers’ CSA and UL listing except on NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Numbers 15194 (FCL); 14919 (NB Tri-Pac); 14940 (PB Tri-Pac)
Factory mounted shunt trips only can be supplied for FB Tri-Pac and LA Tri-Pac
breakers. Order by description.
Note: Right-hand mounting for FB Tri-Pac only, not CSA and UL listed.
Left-Hand Mounting Kits for Type LCL
Current Limiting Breakers
CSA and UL listing pending. Refer to Eaton.
Rated 48V minimum for ground fault applications.
Also available factory mounted for 24V DC. Order by
description.
Not for ground fault.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 15279
Shunt Trip Coil Data for Type LCL
Current Limiting Breakers
Voltage/Hz
Breaker Type
FCL NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Right-Hand Mounting
600/50 – 60 Hz
480/50 – 60 Hz
240/50 – 60 Hz
208/50 – 60 Hz
120/50 – 60 Hz
60/50 – 60 Hz
48/50 – 60 Hz
24/50 – 60 Hz
250 DC
125 DC
60 DC
48 DC
24 DC
12 DC
1369D80G15
1369D80G16
1369D80G17
1369D80G18
1369D80G19
1369D80G20
1369D80G21
1369D80G22
1369D80G23
1369D80G24
1369D80G25
1369D80G26
1369D80G27
1369D80G28
2606D58G15
2606D58G16
2606D58G17
2606D58G18
2606D58G19
2606D58G20
2606D58G21
2606D58G22
2606D58G23
2606D58G24
2606D58G25
2606D58G26
2606D58G27
2606D58G28
2606D59G15
2606D59G16
2606D59G17
2606D59G18
2606D59G19
2606D59G20
2606D59G21
2606D59G22
2606D59G23
2606D59G24
2606D59G25
2606D59G26
2606D59G27
2606D59G28
Left-Hand Mounting
600/50 – 60 Hz
480/50 – 60 Hz
240/50 – 60 Hz
208/50 – 60 Hz
120/50 – 60 Hz
60/50 – 60 Hz
48/50 – 60 Hz
24/50 – 60 Hz
250 DC
125 DC
60 DC
48 DC
24 DC
12 DC
1369D80G01
1369D80G02
1369D80G03
1369D80G04
1369D80G05
1369D80G06
1369D80G07
1369D80G08
1369D80G09
1369D80G10
1369D80G11
1369D80G12
1369D80G13
1369D80G14
2606D58G01
2606D58G02
2606D58G03
2606D58G04
2606D58G05
2606D58G06
2606D58G07
2606D58G08
2606D58G09
2606D58G10
2606D58G11
2606D58G12
2606D58G13
2606D58G14
2606D59G01
2606D59G02
2606D59G03
2606D59G04
2606D59G05
2606D59G06
2606D59G07
2606D59G08
2606D59G09
2606D59G10
2606D59G11
2606D59G12
2606D59G13
2606D59G14
Description
Catalogue
Number
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt
trip from external 32 to 120V (DC to
60 Hz) source.
1372D49G22
Provision to trip flux transfer shunt
trip from external 240 to 600V (50/
60 Hz) source.
1372D49G32
Shunt Trip
Voltage
Rating
Coil Inrush
Amperes Volt-Amperes
120 AC .15 18
.
CLCP 2011 Page 176 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 177
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-13
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories
Standard Undervoltage Release
For undervoltage protection. A solenoid
device mounts within breaker case.
Coil must be energized before closing
breaker. Trips breaker when voltage
drops below 40 to 60% of coil rating.
Picks up and seals in at 80% of coil
rating. For line voltages up to 250V DC or
600V AC. Externally mounted resistors
are supplied for certain ratings. Standard
leads extend 18 inches (457.2 mm)
outside of breaker.
Note: U.V.R. attachments are not designed for,
and should not be used as, circuit interlocks. For
further information, refer to Eaton.
Factory Mounted Undervoltage Releases
NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac undervoltage
releases can be specified for factory
mounting at the same price as the kit.
These attachments have the leads out
the side and are UL listed when factory
mounted unless other non-CSA/UL listed
modifications are used.
Note: Right-hand mounting considered
standard unless specified otherwise.
Factory mounted undervoltage releases
only can be supplied for the following
breakers: FB Tri-Pac, LA Tri-Pac and FCL;
LCL 120V AC only. Order by description.
Note: Right-hand mounting for FB Tri-Pac only.
UL listing pending for LCL.
Undervoltage Release Attachment Kits for Field Mounting
Field mounting voids CSA/UL listing of breaker except on NB Tri-Pac and PB Tri-Pac.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 14961 (NB Tri-Pac); 13231 (PB Tri-Pac)
Undervoltage Release Coil Data
Undervoltage Release Coil Data
Attachment
Voltage/Hz
Breaker Type
For Right-Hand
Mounting
For Left-Hand
Mounting
NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac PB Tri-Pac
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
24/60
48/60
120/60
208/60
240/60
480/60
600/60
12 DC
24 DC
48 DC
60 DC
125 DC
250 DC
—
—
373D632G01
373D632G19
373D632G02
373D632G03
373D632G04
372D032G01
372D032G02
372D032G03
—
372D032G04
372D032G05
—
5674D29G16
5674D29G09
5674D29G10
5674D29G11
5674D29G13
5674D29G14
4976D85G01
4976D85G02
4976D85G03
4976D85G04
4976D85G07
4976D85G08
—
—
373D632G05
373D632G20
373D632G06
373D632G07
373D632G08
372D032G06
372D032G07
372D032G08
—
372D032G09
372D032G10
—
5674D29G08
5674D29G01
5674D29G02
5674D29G03
5674D29G05
5674D29G06
4976D85G11
4976D85G12
4976D85G13
4976D85G14
4976D85G17
4976D85G18
Voltage
Rating
Breaker Type
FB Tri-Pac LCL
Coil Amperes
Series Resistance
(Ohms) Total VA Coil Amperes Total VA
600 AC
480 AC
240 AC
208 AC
120 AC
60 AC
48 AC
24 AC
250 AC
125 AC
60 AC
48 AC
24 AC
12 AC
0.020
0.016
0.021
0.019
0.023
0.203
0.245
0.250
0.026
0.026
0.248
0.260
0.141
0.286
25,000
25,000
6,000
6,000
—
250
150
50
5,000
—
200
150
—
—
12.0
7.7
5.1
4.0
2.8
12.2
11.8
6.0
6.5
3.3
14.9
12.5
3.4
3.5
—
—
—
—
.05
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Voltage
Rating
Breaker Type
LA Tri-Pac, PB Tri-Pac NB Tri-Pac
Coil
Amperes
External Series
Resistance
(Ohms)
Total
VA
Coil
Amperes
External Series
Resistance
(Ohms)
Total
VA
600 AC
480 AC
240 AC
208 AC
120 AC
48 AC
250 AC
125 AC
60 AC
48 AC
24 AC
12 AC
0.029
0.014
0.036
0.036
0.073
0.152
0.035
0.039
0.034
0.040
0.069
0.136
20,000
—
—
—
—
—
5,000
1,500
—
—
—
—
17.4
6.8
8.7
7.5
8.8
7.3
8.8
4.9
2.1
2.0
1.7
1.7
0.016
0.013
0.013
0.018
0.023
—
0.013
0.013
—
0.012
0.023
0.048
35,000
30,000
—
—
—
—
16,500
6,500
—
600
—
—
9.6
6.3
3.2
3.8
2.8
—
3.3
1.7
—
0.6
0.6
0.6
.
CLCP 2011 Page 177 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
178 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-14
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories
Rear Connected Studs
For complete stud assembly, order
a stud and appropriate tube based
on thickness of customer’s mounting
panel. A short stud must be assembled
adjacent to a long stud to maintain
clearances required by CSA and UL. Two
studs are required per pole.
Note: Not CSA and UL listed.
Note: Two 400 ampere LA studs of the same
length have sufficient clearance; however,
customer connections may make it necessary
to use a short stud adjacent to a
long stud.
Panelboard Connecting Straps
For connecting line end of breakers to
panelboard bus.
Note: Not Underwriters Laboratories listed.
Panelboard Connecting Straps
Ampere
Rating
Connector
Type
Catalogue
Number
Power Panelboards (Convertible) for FB Tri-
Pac and FCL Breakers Bus Spacing 3.5-inch
(88.9 mm)
50
50
100
100
150
150
Centre
Outside
Centre
Outside
Centre
Outside
1253C72G01
1253C72G02
1253C73G03
1253C73G04
1253C73G01
1253C73G02
3-Pole Mtg. Bracket
2-Pole Mtg. Bracket
624B600H01
624B600H02
For LCL Breakers Bus Spacing 3.5-inch
(88.9 mm)
400
400
400
Short
Medium
Long
1275C85G01
1275C85G02
1275C85G03
Mtg. Bracket Kit
(1 Required)
751B044G01
Studs for FCL and FB Tri-Pac
Included at no charge when ordered with stud.
Studs for LCL, LA Tri-Pac and NB Tri-Pac
150, 250, 300 and 400 ampere frames only.
Plug-In Adapter Kits
For rear connected applications such as
switchboards. Facilitates ease of
installation and front removal of breaker.
Includes conductor for mounting on
breaker, plug-in mounting blocks with
matching conductor, rear studs and
mounting hardware. Order two mounting
block style numbers when line and load
are required; order one mounting block
style number when either line or load is
required.
FB Tri-Pac and FCL Breakers
(Flat Bar Type)
These plug-in adapter kits are CSA and UL listed as
recognized components.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 13782
LCL Breakers (Threaded Stud Type)
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 15329
NB Tri-Pac Breakers (Flat Bar Type)
Not CSA and UL listed.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 15073
LA Tri-Pac Breakers
(Threaded Stud Type)
Not CSA and UL listed.
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 15329
Mounting Panel
Thickness
Inches (mm)
Stud Tube
Length
Catalogue
Number
Length
Inches (mm)
Catalogue
Number
FCL and FB Tri-Pac Breakers
1.00 (25.4)
.68 - .94 (17.5 - 23.8)
.38 - .63 (9.5 - 15.9)
.25 - .31 (6.4 - 7.9)
Short
Long
Short
Long
Short
Long
Short
Long
451D874G01
451D874G02
451D874G01
451D874G02
451D874G01
451D874G02
451D874G01
451D974G02
1.06 (26.9)
3.44 (87.3)
1.38 (35.1)
3.75 (95.3)
1.69 (42.9)
4.06 (103.1)
2.00 (50.8)
4.38 (110.7)
32B4446H20
32B9446H24
32B9446H21
32B9446H25
32B9446H22
32B9446H26
32B9446H23
32B9446H27
Stud Ampere
Rating
Diameter, Inches
and Thread
Extension Back of
Breaker, Inches
Stud
Catalogue Number
LCL, LA Tri-Pac Breakers
400
400
400
.75 (19.1) – 16
.75 (19.1) – 16
.75 (19.1) – 16
5.47 (138.9)
7.97 (202.4)
10.47 (265.9)
05B7383G15
05B7383G16
05B7383G17
NB Tri-Pac Breakers
450
450
450
800
800
1.13 (28.7) – 12
1.13 (28.7) – 12
1.13 (28.7) – 12
1.25 (31.7) – 12
1.25 (31.7) – 12
5.50 (139.7)
8.00 (203.2)
10.50 (266.7)
5.50 (139.7)
10.50 (266.7)
623B222G01
623B222G02
623B222G03
373B375G04
373B375G03
Description
Catalogue
Number
1 Mounting Block, Line or
Load
2-Pole, 100 Ampere
2-Pole, 150 Ampere
3-Pole, 100 Ampere
3-Pole, 150 Ampere
1480D13G06
Description
Catalogue
Number
2 Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
2-Pole
3-Pole
313C644G25
313C644G26
1 Mounting Block, Line and Load
2-Pole
3-Pole
450D010G15
450D010G16
Description
Catalogue
Number
1 Mounting Block, Line or Load
NB Tri-Pac, 2 Poles
NB Tri-Pac, 3 Poles
2614D53G03
2614D53G04
Description
Catalogue
Number
2 Mounting Blocks, Line and Load
2-Pole
3-Pole
313C644G41
313C644G42
1 Mounting Block, Line Only
2-Pole
3-Pole
450D010G17
450D010G19
1 Mounting Block, Load Only
2-Pole
3-Pole
450D010G18
450D010G20
.
CLCP 2011 Page 178 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 179
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-15
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories
Mounting Block for NB Tri-Pac Breakers
Mounting Block
Not CSA and UL listed.
Insulated base with front removeable bolted connection.
Extended Line Terminal Shields
For shielding line side terminal
connections. One shield required per
breaker. Order separately when needed.
Sold only in lots of 10, including
hardware.
Extended Line Terminal Shields
Not CSA and UL listed.
Insulated base with front removeable bolted connection.
Base Mounting Hardware
Order separately when needed.
Base Mounting Hardware
Moisture-Fungus-Corrosion
Treatment
Treatment can be provided to meet
customer’s specific atmospheric
conditions. Moisture-fungus treating
material used meets JAN-T-152;
treatment meets MIL-V-173a. Requests
and orders should specify government
specifications or conditions to be met.
Note: Not CSA and UL listed.
Handle Locks
Non-padlockable
For prevention of unintentional operation
of breaker. Fits over breaker handle and
may be removed.
Padlockable
For prevention of unauthorized operation
of breaker. Is non-removable once
installed on breaker.
Note: All breakers are trip free and will trip
with handle locks attached. Cannot be used
when handle extension is used.
Handle Locks
Not CSA and UL listed.
Handle Extension
Handle Extension
Included with frame.
Kirk Key
Interlock
Availability: FB, LA,
NB, PB Tri-Pacs.
Permits interlocking
of two breakers or one breaker with
other devices. Before breaker can be
closed, key must be inserted and turned
in breaker interlock. Breaker must be
opened before key can be removed.
It can then be inserted in interlock or
other devices to permit their closure.
Requests and orders should completely
outline interlocking scheme, ultimate
user and his address.
Note: Not available for FCL or LCL breakers.
Note: Not available on motor operated
breakers.
Mechanical Interlocks
For mechanically interlocking a pair of
breakers so that only one may be closed
at one time, but both may be open
simultaneously.
Walking Beam Type
Mounts on panel (not included) at rear of
breaker. Standard breaker spacing: LA
Tri-Pac, NB Tri-Pac: 8-1/2 inches centre to
centre; FB Tri-Pac: 4-3/8 inches centre to
centre; PB Tri-Pac: 12-1/4 inches centre to
centre. Order as a set of two special
factory drilled breakers and one walking
beam interlock. Specify breaker type,
panel thickness and centre-to-centre
dimension of breakers.
Note: Not CSA and UL listed. Not available on
drawout breakers. Not available for FCL or LCL
breakers.
Sliding Bar Type (Field Mountable)
Mounts on panel (not included)
fitting over front of breakers.
Standard breaker spacing: LA Tri-Pac, NB
Tri-Pac: 8-1/2 inches (215.9 mm);
FB Tri-Pac: 4-3/16 inches (106.4 mm)
centre to centre.
Note: Not CSA and UL listed. Not available on
drawout breakers. Not available for FCL or LCL
breakers. Not available on motor operated
breakers.
Ampere
Rating
Number
of Poles
Catalogue
Number
NB Tri-Pac
800
800
2
3
4990D16G04
4990D16G03
Breaker
Frame
Catalogue
Number
FB Tri-Pac, FCL
LA Tri-Pac
NB Tri-Pac
625B229G01
314C420G05
208B996G02
Breaker
Frame
Catalogue
Number
FB Tri-Pac, FCL
LA Tri-Pac
NB Tri-Pac
PB Tri-Pac
21C6782G18
21C6782G05
1091716
624B375G22
Breaker
Frame
Catalogue
Number
Non-padlockable (No FCL, LCL)
FB Tri-Pac
LA Tri-Pac
NB Tri-Pac
29B2721H01
28B4596G01
28B4596G01
Padlockable (No FCL, LCL, NB Tri-Pac)
FB Tri-Pac
LA Tri-Pac
765A754G01
373B591G02
Breaker
Frame
Catalogue
Number
LA Tri-Pac
NB Tri-Pac
PB Tri-Pac
372B399G01
1251C65G01
315C882G01
CLCP 2011 Page 179 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
180 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-16
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories
Motor Operators
Motor operators provide complete
remote control by means of a
pushbutton or similar pilot device.
Positive switching action is accomplished
by use of an operating arm engaging the
breaker handle. The unit is energized
momentarily to actuate the lever arm
moving it to either the ON or OFF
position. The control is broken by an
internal cutoff switch. Means for
emergency manual operation is
provided.
Note: The pilot device must be maintained
contact type for FB Tri-Pac, FCL mechanisms;
momentary contact type for all others.
Motor operators are available with
motors rated 120V AC, 208V AC, and
240V AC.
Note: AC voltage rated operators are CSA and
UL listed as recognized components.
The 480V operators utilize a 120V AC
motor in conjunction with a 480/240 to
120V dual voltage transformer. (On LA
and larger operators, the transformer is
supplied for separate mounting by the
customer.)
Note: The motor operator is intended only for
infrequent operation in line with CSA and UL
endurance standard for moulded case circuit
breakers.
Motor Operator Selection
Note: Instruction Leaflet Number 13148 (FCL); 15334 (LCL); 13148 (FB Tri-Pac); 15533 (LA Tri-Pac); 15534 (NB Tri-Pac); 14444 (PB Tri-Pac)
Back Mounting Plates
Motor Data
For FB Tri-Pac/FCL Breakers
For NB Tri-Pac Breakers
For LA Tri-Pac Breakers
For PB Tri-Pac Breakers
Type
Breaker
AC Voltage DC Voltage
120 208 240 480 125 24
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
FCL
LCL
FB Tri-Pac
LA Tri-Pac
NB Tri-Pac
PB Tri-Pac
656D148G15
5664D54G83
656D148G11
2607D97G22
5664D54G65
5661D52G01
656D148G10
5664D54G86
656D148G04
2607D97G25
5664D54G68
5661D52G04
656D148G17
5664D54G84
656D148G13
2607D97G23
5664D54G66
5661D52G02
656D148G17
5664D54G85
656D148G13
2607D97G24
5664D54G67
5661D52G03
—
5664D54G77
—
2607D97G44
5664D54G82
5661D52G17
—
5664D54G88
—
—
—
—
Type
Breaker
120, 208, 240, 480 Volts AC
Catalogue
Number
FB-P/FCL 1282C01G01
Type
Breaker
Motor Inrush Current, Ampere (Peak) Continuous Current (RMS) Operating Time,
Open or CloseType hp 120 Volts 208 Volts 240 Volts 120 Volts 208 Volts 240 Volts
FB Tri-Pac
LA Tri-Pac
NB Tri-Pac
PB Tri-Pac
Split Phase
Reversing
Reversing
Reversing
1/75
—
—
—
10
8
11
20
4
5
7
12
5
4
6
11
2.3
—
—
—
1.17
—
—
—
1.65
—
—
—
1.5 Seconds
12 Cycles
12 Cycles
10 Cycles
.
CLCP 2011 Page 180 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 181
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
CLCP-17
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Current Limiting Circuit Protectors Accessories
Drawout Frame
These drawout frames are for use with
standard 3-pole Eaton moulded case
circuit breakers. They consist of two
separate parts; stationary mounting frame
and movable carrier frame. Slide rails are
drawer-type, and a screw mechanism is
used to engage or withdraw the movable
carrier frame.
The drawout frames have three positions:
connected, test and disconnected. The
frames do not include a safety tripping
interlock, or secondary contacts. These
are optional items and may be ordered at
additional cost.
Breakers mounted in the drawout frames
can be equipped with standard breaker
accessories including shunt trip,
undervoltage release, auxiliary switch,
alarm switch and motor operator.
Secondary Contacts
These are used to disconnect auxiliary
circuits when attachments such as shunt
trip or motor operator are used. Available
in multiples of four contacts with a
maximum of 32 contacts for the NB Tri-
Pac. They must be factory mounted.
Order by description as similar to
stationary or moving frame and specify
number of contacts required.
Standard Installation
●Order one stationary mounting frame
and one movable carrier frame.
●Order breakers without terminals or
rear connectors.
●Order any attachments desired (shunt
trip, undervoltage release, etc.).
●Order secondary contacts as required:
●A shunt trip, undervoltage release or
alarm switch requires two
contacts
●A 1A-1B auxiliary switch requires
three contacts
●A motor operator requires a
maximum of four contacts
●Others as required
Racking Crank
A special crank to engage or withdraw
the moving portion of the drawout.
A standard 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) hex socket
with extension can be used for this
purpose.
Racking Crank
Cell Switches Mounted on Drawout Frames,
All Ratings
Up to four switches can be provided.
Order by description.
Each switch provides NO and NC contact
that transfers before reaching the test
position when being withdrawn, and after
the test position when being racked in.
Handle mechanisms
For selection data, see Electrical
Aftermarket Products and Services
Catalogue CA08105001E (pages 3 - 77).
Catalogue Number
765A767G01
.
Selection Data
Drawout for FB and LA Tri-Pac, FCL and LCL Circuit Breakers are not available. PB Tri-Pac movable is available factory-installed
only. Order by description.
Breaker Type
Stationary Mounting Frame Movable Carrier Frame
Catalogue Number Catalogue Number
NB Tri-Pac 2603D85G09 2608D34G12
CLCP 2011 Page 181 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:19 PM
182 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EGCB-1
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Product Description
Engine generator Special Application
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers are
designed specifically for application on
diesel engine powered standby
generators where high interrupting circuit
breakers are not required. The JG
through NG breakers are equipped with a
special trip unit, that includes standard
thermal (overload) protection and special
low magnetic pickup range (FG includes
a fixed thermal/magnetic pickup). The
standard thermal trip unit provides
overload protection conductors per the
National Electric Code. The low magnetic
pickup range is approximately two to five
times the continuous rating and
provides closer low level short circuit
protection when applied on generators
that have very low short circuit capacity.
This combination allows the user to
customize the breaker to the generator
output.
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers are
suitable for reverse feed applications.
Catalogue Numbering System
This information is presented only as an
aid to understanding catalogue numbers.
It is not to be used to build catalogue
numbers for circuit breakers.
FG breakers include both line and load
side terminals.
JG and KG breakers with “W” catalogue
number suffix do not include any
terminals.
JG, KG, LG, and NG breakers without
“W” catalogue number suffix include
both line and load terminals.
Contact Eaton for additional ratings and
internal/external accessories.
Technical Data and
Specifications
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489 Interrupting
Capacity Ratings
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical
Amperes)
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)
240 18,000
480 14,000
600 10,000
IEC 947-2 Interrupting Capacity
Ratings
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical
Amperes)
Volts Ac (50/60 Hz)
220, 240 18,000/9,000
380, 415 14,000/7,000
660, 690 10,000/5,000
Standards and Certifications
Engine generator Special Application
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers are
designed to conform with the following
standards:
●
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.,
Standard UL 489, Special Application
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers and
Circuit Breaker Enclosures File E7819
●
Canadian Standards Association
Standard C22.2 No. 5, Service
Entrance and Branch Circuit Breakers
●
International Electrotechnical
Commission Recommendations IEC
947-2, Circuit Breakers
Conformance with these standards
satisfies most local and international
codes, assuming user acceptability and
simplified application.
FG 3 100 W
Trip
Amperes
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
450
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
Suffix
W: Without
Terminals
Number of
Poles
3
Frame
FG
JG
KG
LG
NG
EGCB 2011 Page 182 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:27 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
183
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EGCB-2
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
The following table lists FG through NG engine generator breakers with the maximum generator kVA and kW rating. Engine generator
breakers are applied at 115% of the generator full load current rating. The maximum kW rating is based on three-phase generators at
80% power factor.
Magnetic Pickup
Range
Maximum Generator Rating 60 Hz Engine Generator
Breaker Catalogue
Number
➃
240 Vac 480 Vac 600 Vac
kVA
➀
kW
➁
kVA
➀
kW
➁
kVA
➀
kW
➁
Thermal Magnetic
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
5
7
9
11
4
6
7
9
11
14
18
22
9
12
14
17
14
18
23
27
11
14
18
22
FG3015
FG3020
FG3025
FG3030
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
13
14
16
18
10
12
13
14
25
29
32
36
20
23
26
29
32
36
41
45
25
29
32
36
FG3035
FG3040
FG3045
FG3050
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
22
25
29
32
17
20
23
26
43
51
58
65
35
40
46
52
54
63
72
81
43
51
58
65
FG3060
FG3070
FG3080
FG3090
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
Fixed
36
40
45
54
63
72
81
29
32
36
43
51
58
65
72
79
90
108
126
144
162
58
64
72
87
101
116
130
90
99
113
135
158
181
203
72
79
90
108
126
144
162
FG3100
FG3110
FG3125
FG3150
FG3175
FG3200
FG3225
350-700
350-700
63
72
51
58
126
144
101
116
158
181
126
144
JG3175W
➂
JG3175
JG3200W
➂
JG3200
350-700
350-700
81
90
65
72
162
181
130
144
203
226
162
181
JG3225W
➂
JG3225
JG3250W
➂
JG3250
500-1000
500-1000
108
126
87
101
217
253
173
202
271
316
217
253
KG3300W
➂
KG3300
KG3350W
➂
KG3350
1000-2000 144 116 289 231 361 289
KG3400W
➂
KG3400
Electronic
500-2500 162 130 325 260 406 325
LG3450
500-2500
500-2500
181
217
144
173
361
433
289
347
451
542
361
433
LG3500
LG3600
500-2500
500-2500
253
289
202
231
505
578
404
462
632
722
505
578
NG3700
NG3800
1250-5000
1250-5000
325
361
260
289
650
722
520
578
812
903
650
722
NG3900
NG31000
1250-5000 433 347 867 693 1083 867
NG31200
Breaker continuous current is based on 115% of the generator full load ampere rating.
Based on three-phase generators at 80% power factor.
Without terminals.
FG, JG, KG include Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units, LG and NG include Electronic Trip Units.
EGCB 2011 Page 183 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:27 PM
184 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EGCB-3
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers Enclosures
Enclosure Description
Type 1 General Purpose
●
Surface or Flush Mounting
●
15-1200 Ampere Range
●
600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc
Type 1 enclosed breakers are designed
for use in commercial buildings,
apartment buildings and other areas
where a general purpose enclosure is
applicable. The breaker is front operable
and is capable of being padlocked in
either the On or Off position. Ratings
through 1200 amperes are listed with
CSA and Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
as approved for service entrance
application. Both surface and flush
mounted enclosures are available.
Type 3R Rainproof
Surface Mounting
●
Interchangeable Hubs
(Through 400 Amperes)
●
15-1200 Ampere Range
●
600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc
This general purpose outdoor service
centre employs a circuit breaker inside a
weatherproof sheet steel breaker
enclosure to serve as a main disconnect
and protective device for feeder circuits.
Ratings through 1200 amperes are listed
by CSA and Underwriters Laboratories,
Inc. as suitable for service entrance
application.
Type 12 Dustproof
Surface Mounting
●
No Knockouts or Other Openings
●
15-1200 Ampere Range
●
600 Volts Ac, 500 Volts Dc
The Type 12 enclosure is designed in line
with specifications for special industry
application where unusually severe
conditions involving oil, coolant, dust and
other foreign materials exist in the
operating atmosphere. The handle
padlocks in the Off position and the cover
is interlocked with the handle
mechanism to prevent opening the cover
with the circuit breaker in the On
position. Ratings through 1200 amperes
are listed by CSA and U.L., Inc. as
suitable for service entrance application.
Enclosure Selection Data
Breaker
Frame
(Amperes)
Enclosure
Type Class
Dimensions
App.
Wt.
Lbs.
Conduit Sizes,
Inches
Catalogue
Number
ABCDE
Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm Inches mm
Inche
s
m
m
FG
15-225
Type 1
Type 3R
Type 12
23.25
25.66
25.66
591
652
652
8.41
8.84
8.84
214
225
226
6.28
9.31
9.31
160
237
238
18.75
24.28
24.28
476
617
618
1.20
1.70
1.70
31
43
43
15
19
18
.25, .50, .75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50
.25, .50, .75, 1, 1.25, 1.50, 2, 2.50
SFDN225
RFDN225
JFDN225
JG
175-250
Type 1
Type 3R
Type 12
34.70
37.50
37.53
881
891
953
10.92
11.56
11.56
227
294
294
7.20
10.22
10.22
183
260
260
30.00
35.77
35.77
762
909
909
1.88
1.94
1.94
48
49
49
31
40
37
.25, .50, 2, 2.50, 3
.25, .50, 2, 2.50, 3
SJDN250
RJDN250
JJDN250
KG
300-400
Type 1
Type 3R
Type 12
38.81
41.69
41.69
986
997
997
11.06
11.75
11.75
281
298
298
10.94
14.06
14.06
278
357
357
34.00
39.90
39.90
869
1014
1015
2.28
1.97
1.97
58
50
50
53
60
53
.25, .50, .75, 1.50, 2, 2.50, 3, 3.50
.25, .50, .75, 2.50, 3, 3.50
SKDN400
RKDN400
JKDN400
LG
450-600
Type 1
Type 3R
Type 12
45.88
48.31
48.31
1165
1227
1227
14.31
14.91
14.91
364
379
379
12.38
15.50
15.50
314
394
394
46.56
46.56
46.56
1183
1183
1183
1.91
1.92
1.92
48
49
49
81
84
81
.25, .50, .75, 3, 3.50, 4
.25, .50, .75, 3, 3.50, 4
SLDN600
RLDN600
JLDN600
NG
700-1200
Type 1
Type 3R
Type 12
61.22
63.59
63.59
1555
1615
1615
21.44
22.00
22.00
545
559
559
15.41
17.63
17.63
391
448
448
61.84
61.84
61.84
1571
1571
1571
1.97
1.97
1.97
50
50
50
178
175
170
SNDN1200
RNDN1200
JNDN1200
Type 3R Rainproof Type 12 DustproofType 1 Surface Mounted
E
D
A
C
B
C
ON
O
F
F
E
A
D
B
OF
E
C
A
D
B
EGCB 2011 Page 184 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:27 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
185
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
EGCB-4
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Engine Generator Circuit Breakers
Standard Template
CSA Listed Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable
UL Listed Neutral Kits, Insulated and Groundable
Internal Accessories
Breaker
Frame
Maximum
Ampere
Rating AWG Wire Range
Metric Wire
Range mm
2
Catalogue
Number
FG 100 #14-1/0 2.5 -50
3T100FB
➀
FG 150 #4-4/0 25 -95
3TA225FD
➀
JG 250 #4-350 kcmil 25 -185
TA250KB
KG 350 250-500 kcmil 120 -240
TA350K
KG 400 3/0-250 kcmil (2) 95 -120
3TA400K
➀
LG 600 250-500 kcmil (2) 120 -240
3TA603LDK
➀
NG 700 1-500 kcmil (2) 50 -300
TA700NB1
NG 1000 3/0-400 kcmil (3) 95 -185
TA1000NB1
NG 1200 4/0-500 kcmil (4) 120 -300
TA1200NB1
Maximum
Enclosure
Rating (A)
Main Lug Size
Cu/Al
# of
Lugs
Ground Lug Size
Cu/Al
# of
Lugs
Catalogue
Number
100 (1) #14 – 1/0 2 (1) #14 – #4 2
N100
250 (1) #6– 350MCM 2 (1) #14 – 1/0 2
N250
400 (2) 3/0 – 250MCM 2 (1) #6 - 300MCM 2
N400
600 (2) #1– 500MCM 2 (1) #6 - 250MCM 2
N600
1200 (4) #2– 600MCM 2 (1) #6 - 250MCM 2
N1200
Maximum
Enclosure
Rating (A)
Main Lug Size
Cu/Al
Ground Lug Size
Cu/Al
Catalogue
Number
100 (1) #14 – 1/0 (1) #14 – 1/0
INK100
250 (1) #4 – 350 kcmil (1) #4 – 300 kcmil
INK250
400 (1) #4 – 600 kcmil or
(2) 1/0 – 250 kcmil
(1) #4- 300 kcmil
INK400
600 (2) 250 – 500 kcmil (1) #4- 300 kcmil
INK600
1200 (4) 1/0 – 750 kcmil (1) #6 - 250 kcmil
INK1200
Breaker
Frame
Auxiliary Switch
➁
Shunt Trip
➁
1A-1B
Catalogue
Number
2A-2B
Catalogue
Number Rating
Catalogue
Number
FG
A1X1PK A2X1RPK
12-24 Vdc
SNT1LP03K
JG
A1X2PK A2X2PK
12-24 Vdc
SNT2P04K
KG
A1X3PK A2X3PK
12-24 Vdc
SNT3P04K
LG
A1X4PK A2X4PK
12-24 Vdc
SNT4LP03K
NG
A1X5RPK A2X5RPK
12-24 Vdc
SNT5LP03K
Package of 3 terminals.
Other accessories are available. Same as standard frame breakers.
EGCB 2011 Page 185 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:27 PM
186 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-1
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Product Description
DC (direct current) systems
and applications are becoming
commonplace as alternative
energy sources have expanded
and the number of DC devices
and data centres using DC
power has swelled.
Eaton offers moulded case
circuit breakers and switches
to meet circuit protection and
switching requirements for a
host of different DC end use
requirements. Applications
include UPS battery supply
circuits, solar systems and
electric vehicle charging, as
well as commercial and
industrial distribution.
Current ratings are available
from 15 to 2500A, with
a full scale of voltage and
interrupting ratings to address
needs ranging from standard
to the highest performance.
Optional internal accessories
provide remote tripping and
indication of breaker status.
The DC breaker family is
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489
listed and exceeds the
requirements in UL 489
Supplement SC for UPS
applications. Eaton breakers
may be applied in both
ungrounded and select
grounded applications, with
poles connected in series
to operate at the maximum
voltages shown on
Page
DCCB-2
. To use DC circuit
breakers on 600V grounded
systems, three poles in
series must be connected on
the ungrounded leg.
The HFDDC through
HMDLDC DC breakers
use the same internal and
external accessories as
their Series C or Series G
AC frame equivalents. NBDC
and PBDC use the same
internal and external
accessories as standard
NB and PB breakers.
DCCB 2011.fm Page 186 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
187
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-2
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Quick Reference Direct Current Circuit Breakers
CSA C22.2 No. 5 and UL 489 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Capacity Ratings
Notes
DC ratings apply to substantially non-inductive circuits. Time constants per UL 489 and CSA C22.2 No. 5.
EGEDC through HMDLDC have been tested up to 300 Vdc to allow for battery charging voltages. 750 Vdc is common in transportation applications.
HFDDC, four-pole 750 Vdc is available up to 150A maximum. 300 Vdc and 750 Vdc are not UL 489 and CSA C22.2 No. 5 listed voltage ratings.
Four-pole frame with two-poles connected in parallel.
See
Page DCCB-12
for series connection diagrams. Use NEC/CEC rated cable to connect/short poles in series as shown.
Circuit Breaker
Type
Maximum
Amperes
Interrupting Capacity (kA)
Poles in
Series
Volts DC
125
Poles in
Series 250
Poles in
Series 500 600
Poles in
Series 750
EGEDC 100 10 1 35 2 35 — 3 — —
EGSDC 100 35 1 42 2 50 — 3 — —
EGHDC 100 42 1 50 2 65 — 3 — —
HFDDC 225 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 42 4
JGEDC 250 35 1 35 2 — 35 3 — —
JGSDC 250 42 1 42 2 — 50 3 — —
JGHDC 250 50 1 50 2 — 65 3 — —
HJDDC 250 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 — —
HKDDC 400 42 1 50 2 — 42 3 — —
LGEDC 600 22 1 22 2 — 35 3 — —
LGSDC 600 22 1 22 2 — 50 3 — —
LGHDC 600 50 1 50 2 — 65 3 — —
HLDDC 600 42 1 50 2 — 35 3 — —
HLDDC
1200 42 1 50 2 — — — — —
HMDLDC 800 42 1 50 2 — 35 3 — —
NBDC 1200 42 1 50 2 — 50 3 — —
PBDC 2500 42 1 65 2 — 65 3 — —
Circuit Breaker
Type
Maximum
Amperes
125 Volts DC Poles in
Series
250 Volts DC Poles in
Series
600 Volts DC Poles in
SeriesIcu Ics Icu Ics Icu Ics
EGEDC 100 10 10 1 10 10 2 — — —
EGSDC 100 35 35 1 35 35 2 — — —
EGHDC 100 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
JGEDC 250 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
JGSDC 250 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
JGHDC 250 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
HJDDC 250 ——————20103
LGEDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
LGSDC 600 22 22 1 22 22 2 — — —
LGHDC 600 42 42 1 42 42 2 — — —
HLDDC 600 ——————20103
HMDLDC 800 ——————20 10 3
DCCB 2011.fm Page 187 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
188 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-3
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Catalogue Number Selection
DC Circuit Breaker
Frame
EGEDC = Series G—E (100A max.)
EGSDC = Series G—E (100A max.)
EGHDC = Series G—E (100A max.)
HFDDC = Series C—F (225A max.)
JGEDC = Series G—J (250A max.)
JGSDC = Series G—J (250A max.)
JGHDC = Series G—J (250A max.)
HJDDC = Series C—J (250A max.)
HKDDC = Series C—K (400A max.)
LGEDC = Series G—L (600A max.)
LGSDC = Series G—L (600A max.)
LGHDC = Series G—L (600A max.)
HLDDC = Series C—L (1200A max.)
HMDLDC = Series C—M (800A max.)
NBDC = NB (1200A max.)
PBDC = PB (2500A max.)
Number of Poles
1 = Single-pole
2 = Two-pole
3 = Three-pole
4 = Four-pole
Trip Unit Ampere Rating
015 = 15A
020 = 20A
025 = 25A
030 = 30A
035 = 35A
040 = 40A
045 = 45A
050 = 50A
060 = 60A
070 = 70A
080 = 80A
090 = 90A
100 = 100A
110 = 110A
125 = 125A
150 = 150A
175 = 175A
200 = 200A
225 = 225A
250 = 250A
300 = 300A
350 = 350A
400 = 400A
450 = 450A
500 = 500A
600 = 600A
700 = 700A
800 = 800A
900 = 900A
1000 = 1000A
1200 = 1200A
1600 = 1600A
2000 = 2000A
2500 = 2500A
Suffix
Series C, NB and PB Frames
K = Moulded case switch
L = Line and load terminals, F-Frame
MW = 135% magnetic trip unit, without terminals
W = Without terminals
Series G Frames
FFG = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, with terminals
FFW = Fixed thermal, fixed magnetic trip unit, without terminals
FAG = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, with terminals
FAW = Fixed thermal, adjustable magnetic trip unit, without terminals
KSG = Moulded case switch, with terminals
KSW = Moulded case switch, without terminals
HFDDC 3 150 W
DCCB 2011.fm Page 188 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
189
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-4
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
Type EGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 500 Vdc
Type EGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 500 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
without Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
25
EGEDC3025FFG EGEDC3025FFW
30
EGEDC3030FFG EGEDC3030FFW
35
EGEDC3035FFG EGEDC3035FFW
40
EGEDC3040FFG EGEDC3040FFW
45
EGEDC3045FFG EGEDC3045FFW
50
EGEDC3050FFG EGEDC3050FFW
60
EGEDC3060FFG EGEDC3060FFW
70
EGEDC3070FFG EGEDC3070FFW
80
EGEDC3080FFG EGEDC3080FFW
90
EGEDC3090FFG EGEDC3090FFW
100
EGEDC3100FFG EGEDC3100FFW
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
without Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
25
EGSDC3025FFG EGSDC3025FFW
30
EGSDC3030FFG EGSDC3030FFW
35
EGSDC3035FFG EGSDC3035FFW
40
EGSDC3040FFG EGSDC3040FFW
45
EGSDC3045FFG EGSDC3045FFW
50
EGSDC3050FFG EGSDC3050FFW
60
EGSDC3060FFG EGSDC3060FFW
70
EGSDC3070FFG EGSDC3070FFW
80
EGSDC3080FFG EGSDC3080FFW
90
EGSDC3090FFG EGSDC3090FFW
100
EGSDC3100FFG EGSDC3100FFW
Type EGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 500 Vdc
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete Circuit Breaker
with Terminals
Complete Circuit Breaker
without Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
25
EGHDC3025FFG EGHDC3025FFW
30
EGHDC3030FFG EGHDC3030FFW
35
EGHDC3035FFG EGHDC3035FFW
40
EGHDC3040FFG EGHDC3040FFW
45
EGHDC3045FFG EGHDC3045FFW
50
EGHDC3050FFG EGHDC3050FFW
60
EGHDC3060FFG EGHDC3060FFW
70
EGHDC3070FFG EGHDC3070FFW
80
EGHDC3080FFG EGHDC3080FFW
90
EGHDC3090FFG EGHDC3090FFW
100
EGHDC3100FFG EGHDC3100FFW
DCCB 2011.fm Page 189 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
190 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-5
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Type HFDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type JGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Notes
For breaker without terminals, replace "L" with "W" at end of catalogue number.
For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete Circuit Breaker with Line and Load Terminals
Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Four-Pole
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
15
HFDDC1015L HFDDC2015L HFDDC3015L HFDDC4015L
20
HFDDC1020L HFDDC2020L HFDDC3020L HFDDC4020L
25
HFDDC1025L HFDDC2025L HFDDC3025L HFDDC4025L
30
HFDDC1030L HFDDC2030L HFDDC3030L HFDDC4030L
35
HFDDC1035L HFDDC2035L HFDDC3035L HFDDC4035L
40
HFDDC1040L HFDDC2040L HFDDC3040L HFDDC4040L
45
HFDDC1045L HFDDC2045L HFDDC3045L HFDDC4045L
50
HFDDC1050L HFDDC2050L HFDDC3050L HFDDC4050L
60
HFDDC1060L HFDDC2060L HFDDC3060L HFDDC4060L
70
HFDDC1070L HFDDC2070L HFDDC3070L HFDDC4070L
80
HFDDC1080L HFDDC2080L HFDDC3080L HFDDC4080L
90
HFDDC1090L HFDDC2090L HFDDC3090L HFDDC4090L
100
HFDDC1100L HFDDC2100L HFDDC3100L HFDDC4100L
110
HFDDC1110L HFDDC2110L HFDDC3110L HFDDC4110L
125
HFDDC1125L HFDDC2125L HFDDC3125L HFDDC4125L
150
HFDDC1150L HFDDC2150L HFDDC3150L HFDDC4150L
175
— HFDDC2175L HFDDC3175L —
200
— HFDDC2200L HFDDC3200L —
225
— HFDDC2225L HFDDC3225L —
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
70
JGEDC3070FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
90
JGEDC3090FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ
100
JGEDC3100FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ
125
JGEDC3125FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ
150
JGEDC3150FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ
175
JGEDC3175FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ
200
JGEDC3200FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ
225
JGEDC3225FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ
250
JGEDC3250FAG JGEDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ
HFDDC
DCCB 2011.fm Page 190 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
191
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-6
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Type JGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type JGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type HJDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Note
For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
70
JGSDC3070FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
90
JGSDC3090FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ
100
JGSDC3100FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ
125
JGSDC3125FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ
150
JGSDC3150FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ
175 JGSDC3175FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ
200 JGSDC3200FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ
225 JGSDC3225FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ
250 JGSDC3250FAG JGSDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
70 JGHDC3070FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3070FA T250FJ
90 JGHDC3090FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3090FA T250FJ
100 JGHDC3100FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3100FA T250FJ
125 JGHDC3125FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3125FA T250FJ
150 JGHDC3150FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3150FA T250FJ
175 JGHDC3175FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3175FA T250FJ
200 JGHDC3200FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3200FA T250FJ
225 JGHDC3225FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3225FA T250FJ
250 JGHDC3250FAG JGHDC3250NN JT3250FA T250FJ
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
70 HJDDC3250F JT3070T TA250KB
90 HJDDC3250F JT3090T TA250KB
100 HJDDC3250F JT3100T TA250KB
125 HJDDC3250F JT3125T TA250KB
150 HJDDC3250F JT3150T TA250KB
175 HJDDC3250F JT3175T TA250KB
200 HJDDC3250F JT3200T TA250KB
225 HJDDC3250F JT3225T TA250KB
250 HJDDC3250F JT3250T TA250KB
JGHDC3250NN
HJDDC3250
DCCB 2011.fm Page 191 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
192 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-7
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Type HKDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 42 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type LGEDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type LGSDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Notes
For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
Three-pole kit.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
100 HKDDC3400F KT3100T TA300K
125 HKDDC3400F KT3125T TA300K
150 HKDDC3400F KT3150T TA300K
175 HKDDC3400F KT3175T TA300K
200 HKDDC3400F KT3200T TA300K
225 HKDDC3400F KT3225T TA300K
250 HKDDC3400F KT3250T TA350K
300 HKDDC3400F KT3300T TA350K
350 HKDDC3400F KT3350T TA350K
400 HKDDC3400F KT3400T 3TA400K
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
250 LGEDC3250FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
300 LGEDC3300FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK
350 LGEDC3350FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
400 LGEDC3400FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK
500 LGEDC3500FAG LGEDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK
600 LGEDC3600FAG LGEDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
250 LGSDC3250FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
300 LGSDC3300FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK
350 LGSDC3350FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
400 LGSDC3400FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK
500 LGSDC3500FAG LGSDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK
600 LGSDC3600FAG LGSDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK
HKDDC3400
LGEDC3630NN
DCCB 2011.fm Page 192 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 193
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-8
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Type LGHDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type HLDDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Two-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 250 Vdc
Notes
For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
Three-pole kit.
Includes breaker frame, trip unit and terminals.
Four-pole breaker with two poles wired in parallel.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete
Breaker
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
250 LGHDC3250FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3250FA TA350LK
300 LGHDC3300FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3300FA TA350LK
350 LGHDC3350FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3350FA TA350LK
400 LGHDC3400FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3400FA TA350LK
500 LGHDC3500FAG LGHDC3630NN LT4500FA 3TA632LK
600 LGHDC3600FAG LGHDC3630NN LT3600FA 3TA632LK
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
300 HLDDC3600F LT3300T TA602LD
350 HLDDC3600F LT3350T TA602LD
400 HLDDC3600F LT3400T TA602LD
450 HLDDC3600F LT3450T TA602LD
500 HLDDC3600F LT3500T TA602LD
600 HLDDC3600F LT3600T 3TA603LDK
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete
Breaker
Catalogue
Number
600 HLDDC20600
700 HLDDC20700
800 HLDDC20800
900 HLDDC20900
1000 HLDDC21000
1200 HLDDC21200
HLDDC
DCCB 2011.fm Page 193 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
194 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-9
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Type HMDLDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 35 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type NBDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 50 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Type PBDC DC Circuit Breakers—
Three-Pole High Interrupting Capacity 65 kAIC at 600 Vdc
Notes
For complete breaker, order individual frame, trip unit and terminals for field installation.
Includes frame and trip unit. Order terminals or connectors separately.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Circuit Breaker
Frame Only
Thermal-Magnetic
Trip Unit
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
300 HMDLDC3800F MT3300T TA700MA1
350 HMDLDC3800F MT3350T TA700MA1
400 HMDLDC3800F MT3400T TA700MA1
450 HMDLDC3800F MT3450T TA700MA1
500 HMDLDC3800F MT3500T TA700MA1
600 HMDLDC3800F MT3600T TA700MA1
700 HMDLDC3800F MT3700T TA700MA1
800 HMDLDC3800F MT3800T TA800MA2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete Circuit Breaker Factory
Assembled without Terminals
Standard
Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Includes Magnetic
Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%
Catalogue
Number
700 NBDC3700MW Included TA1000NB1
800 NBDC3800MW Included TA1000NB1
900 NBDC3900MW Included TA1000NB1
1000 NBDC31000MW Included TA1000NB1
1200 NBDC31200MW Included TA1200NB1
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Complete Circuit Breaker
Factory Assembled
without Terminals
Standard Rear
Connectors
Catalogue
Number
Includes Magnetic
Trip Unit Calibrated at 135%
Catalogue
Number
1600 PBDC31600W Included BA2000PB
2000 PBDC32000W Included BA2000PB
2500 PBDC32500W Included BA2500PB
HMDLDC3800F
DCCB 2011.fm Page 194 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 195
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-10
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
DC Breaker Terminal Wire Ranges
Moulded Case Switches
Eaton’s DC moulded case switches are used in applications requiring a compact, high-capacity disconnect. They are UL 489/CSA
C22.2 No. 5 listed and have automatic high instantaneous current protection. These devices do not provide overload protection.
Moulded Case Switches
Note
Four-pole frame with two-pole connected in parallel.
Breaker
Frame
Maximum Breaker
Ampacity
Terminal Body
Material Wire Type
AWG Wire Range/
Number of Conductors
Metric Wire
Range mm2
Number of
Terminals Included
Standard Terminal
Catalogue Number
EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 100 Aluminum Cu/Al 14–1/0 2.5–50 3 3TA125EF
HFDDC 20 Steel Cu/Al 14–10 (1) 2.5–4 (1) 3 3T20FB
100 Steel Cu/Al 14–1/0 (1) 2.5–50 (1) 3 3T100FB
225 Aluminum Cu/Al 4–4/0 (1) 25–95 (1) 3 3TA225FD
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 250 Stainless steel Cu 4–350 (1) 25–185 (1) 1 T250FJ
HJDDC 250 Aluminum Cu/Al 4–350 kcmil (1) 25–185 (1) 1 TA250KB
HKDDC 225 Aluminum Cu/Al 3–350 kcmil (1) 35–185 (1) 1 TA300K
350 Aluminum Cu/Al 250–500 kcmil (1) 120–240 (1) 1 TA350K
400 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–250 kcmil (2) 95–120 (1) 3 3TA400K
500 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–350 kcmil (2) 95–150 (2) 1 TA602LD
600 Aluminum Cu/Al 400–500 kcmil (2) 185–240 (2) 3 3TA603LDK
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 400 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 (1) 35–240 (1) 1 TA350LK
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 1 TA632L
630 Aluminum Cu/Al 2–500 kcmil (2) 35–240 (2) 3 3TA632LK
HLDDC 500 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–350 kcmil (2) 95–150 (2) 1 TA602LD
600 Aluminum Cu/Al 400–500 kcmil (2) 185–240 (2) 3 3TA603LDK
HMDLDC 600 Aluminum Cu/Al 1–500 kcmil (2) — 1 TA700MA1
800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) — 1 TA800MA2
NBDC 700 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
800 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
900 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
1000 Aluminum Cu/Al 3/0–400 kcmil (3) 95–185 (3) 1 TA1000NB1
1200 Aluminum Cu/Al 4/0–500 kcmil (4) 120–240 (4) 1 TA1200NB1
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Unfused Short Circuit Rating
(kA)
Poles in
Series
With Line and Load Terminals Without Line and Load Terminals
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
600 Vdc Maximum
100 42 3 HFDDC3100KL HFDDC3100KW
150 42 3 HFDDC3150KL HFDDC3150KW
225 42 3 HFDDC3225KL HFDDC3225KW
250 65 3 JGKDC3250KSG JGKDC3250KSW
250 42 3 HJDDC3250K HJDDC3250KW
400 42 3 HKDDC3400K HKDDC3400KW
65 3 LGKDC3400KSG LGKDC3400KSW
600 65 3 LGKDC3630KSG LGKDC3630KSW
35 3 HLDDC3600K HLDDC3600WK
800 35 3 HMDLDC3800K HMDLDC3800WK
500 Vdc Maximum
100 65 3 EGK3100KSG EGK3100KSW
250 Vdc Maximum
100 50 2HFDDC2100KL HFDDC2100KW
150 50 2HFDDC2150KL HFDDC2150KW
225 50 2HFDDC2225KL HFDDC2225KW
1200 50 HLDDC21200K HLDDC21200WK
DCCB 2011.fm Page 195 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
196 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-11
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Accessories
Internal Accessories
Note
F-Frame circuit breakers are factory sealed. Underwriters Laboratories requires that internal accessories be installed at the factory. Internal accessories are CSA/UL listed for factory installation
under E7819.
One accessory can be mounted per pole, per breaker. Factory installation of accessories is available. Contact Eaton for assistance with part number configuration.
Description
Factory
Installation
(HFDDC)
Field Installation Kits
HFDDC
EGEDC,
EGSDC,
EGHDC
JGEDC,
JGSDC,
JGHDC
LGEDC,
LGSDC,
LGHDC HJDDC HKDDC HLDDC HMDLDC NBDC PBDC
Right-Pole Mounting
Auxiliary switch
1A-1B A06 A1X1PK AUX1A1BPK AUX1A1BPK A1X2PK A1X13PK A1X4PK A1X4PK 4980D16G05 2602D32G14
2A-2B A13 A2X1RPK AUX2A2BPK AUX2A2BPK A2X2PK A2X3PK A2X4PK A2X4PK 4980D16G06 2602D32G15
Alarm switch
1 make/1 break B06 A1L1RPK ALM1M1BEPK ALM1M1BJPK A1L2RPK A1L3RPK A1L4RPK A1L4RPK — —
Auxiliary and alarm combo
1A-1B, 1 make/1 break C05 AAL1RPK AUXALRMEPK AUXALRMJPK AAL2RPK AAL3RPK AA114RPK AA114RPK — —
Left-Pole Mounting
Shunt trip
12 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT012CPK SNT012CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G14 2606D59G28
24 Vdc S02 SNT1LP03K SNT060CPK SNT060CPK SNT2P04K SNT3P04K SNT4LP03K SNT4LP03K 2606D58G13 2606D59G27
48 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT060CPK SNT060CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G12 2606D59G26
60 Vdc S06 SNT1LP08K SNT060CPK SNT060CPK SNT2P06K SNT3P06K SNT4LP23K SNT4LP23K 2606D58G11 2606D59G25
125 Vdc S10 SNT1LP12K SNT120CPK SNT120CPK SNT2P11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP26K SNT4LP26K 2606D58G10 2606D59G24
250 Vdc S14 SNT1LP18K — — SNT2P14K SNT3P14K SNT4LP14K SNT4LP14K 2606D58G09 2606D59G23
120 Vac S06 SNT1LP12K SNT120CPK SNT120CPK SNT2P11K SNT3P11K SNT4LP11K SNT4LP11K 2060D58G05 2060D59G19
Undervoltage release
12 Vdc U30 UVH1LP20K UVR012DPK UVR012DPK UVH2LP20K UVH3LP20K UVH4LP20K UVH4LP20K 372D032G06 4976D85G11
24 Vdc U34 UVH1LP21K UVR024DPK UVR024DPK UVH2LP21K UVH3LP21K UVH4LP21K UVH4LP21K 372D032G07 4976D85G12
48 Vdc U38 UVH1LP22K UVR048DPK UVR048DPK UVH2LP22K UVH3LP22K UVH4LP22K UVH4LP22K 372D032G08 4976D85G13
125 Vdc U42 UVH1LP26K UVR125DPK UVR125DPK UVH2LP26K UVH3LP26K UVH4LP26K UVH4LP26K 372D032G09 4976D85G17
250 Vdc U46 UVH1LP28K UVR250DPK UVR250DPK UVH2LP28K UVH3LP28K UVH4LP28K UVH4LP28K 372D032G10 4976D85G18
120 Vac U14 UVH1LP08K UVR120APK UVR120APK UVH2LP08K UVH3LP08K UVH4LP08K UVH4LP08K 373D632G05 5674D29G01
DCCB 2011.fm Page 196 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 197
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-12
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Wiring Diagrams
Series Connection Diagrams for DC Application
250 Vdc Maximum—Two Poles in Series
500 Vdc or 600 Vdc Maximum—Three Poles in Series
750 Vdc Maximum—Four Poles in Series
Notes
Poles in series connection is customer supplied. Use rated cable per NEC/CEC.
For grounded systems, all poles in series must be connected on non-grounded terminal, with load connected to grounded terminal.
Load (A)
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
Load (A)
Load
Load (A)
Load
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems, or grounded
systems that have one end of load (A) connected to
grounded terminal, opposite poles in series connection.
Suitable for use on ungrounded systems only.
DCCB 2011.fm Page 197 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
198 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB
DCCB-13
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Circuit Breakers
Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
DC Breaker Dimensions
Frame
Number
of Poles Width Height Depth
EGEDC, EGSDC, EGHDC 3 3.00 (76.2) 5.50 (139.7) 2.99 (75.9)
HFDDC 1 1.38 (35.1) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
2 2.75 (70.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
3 4.13 (105.0) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
4 5.50 (139.7) 6.00 (152.4) 3.38 (86.0)
JGEDC, JGSDC, JGHDC 3 4.13 (104.9) 7.00 (177.8) 3.57 (90.7)
HJDDC 2, 3 4.13 (105.0) 10.00 (254.0) 4.06 (103.1)
HKDDC 2, 3 5.50 (139.7) 10.13 (257.3) 4.10 (104.1)
LGEDC, LGSDC, LGHDC 3 5.48 (139.2) 10.13 (257.3) 4.09 (103.9)
600A Max. HLDDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
1200A Max. HLDDC 4 11.00 (279.4) 10.75 (273.1) 4.06 (103.1)
HMDLDC 2, 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 4.06 (103.1)
NBDC 3 8.25 (209.6) 16.00 (406.4) 5.50 (139.7)
PBDC 3 12.06 (306.3) 22.06 (560.3) 9.06 (230.1)
DCCB 2011.fm Page 198 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 10:43 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
199
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-1
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E
2
Mining Service Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E
2
Mining Service Breakers
Product Overview
State-of-the-art E
2
mining
service breakers incorporate
the rigid specifications and
testing procedures developed
by a focus group led by
engineers from several
large coal companies and
Eaton design engineers.
Additionally, the performance
of these breakers was proven
and verified during hundreds
of hours of field testing in
harsh mine environments.
E
2
mining breakers are
available in 600 Vac and l000Y/
577 Vac. Interchangeable trip
units can be used on either
600 or 1000 Vac frames.
The E
2
mining breaker family
is designed especially for
trailing cable application per
MSHA 30 CFR 75. Field
interchangeable electronic
rms sensing trip units are
available from 150 to 2000
amperes with instantaneous
pickup settings conforming
to the code of Federal
Regulations 30 CFR 75.601-2.
Electromechanical trip units
are also available with a
wide range of magnetic
pickup ranges.
E
2
electronic trip units are the
first to provide the mining
industry with true rms
sensing, made possible by
the custom ASIC
microprocessor in each
electronic trip unit.
E
2
breakers are designed to
be physically and electrically
interchangeable with Classic
Mining Service Breakers and
supersede Series C
®
Mining
Service Breakers. The table
to the right outlines direct
replacements.
600 Vac Mining Breaker
Replacement Chart
1000 Vac Mining Breaker
Replacement Chart
Additional Information on Mining Breakers
Note
E
2
R/E
2
RM is a new frame physically different than the HPBM. See DS29-170MS.
Classic Series C E
2
FBM FDBM E
2
F
HFBM FDM E
2
F
HFDM (mag. only) E
2
F
— JDM E
2
J
KAM KDM E
2
K
KAMH KDM E
2
K
LAM LDM E
2
L
LAMH LDM E
2
L
LCM LDM E
2
L
LCMH LDM E
2
L
MAM — E
2
M
MAMH — E
2
M
MCM — E
2
M
MCMH — E
2
M
NBM — E
2
N
NBMH — E
2
N
NCM — E
2
N
NCMH — E
2
N
Classic Series C E
2
M
HFM — E
2
FM
— JDCM E
2
JM
HKAM KDCM E
2
KM
HLAM LDCM E
2
LM
HLCM LDCM E
2
LM
HMAM — E
2
MM
HMCM — E
2
MM
HNBM — E
2
NM
HNBMH — E
2
NM
HNCM — E
2
NM
HLCLM — E
2
NM
HPBM — E
2
RM
Source Description
TD01217001E E
2
Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data
BR01217001E E
2
Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure
TC01217001E E
2
Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves
www.eaton.com/mining Mining and Metals
E2MB 2011.fm Page 199 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
200 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-2
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E
2
Mining Service Breakers
Eaton’s mining service circuit
breakers provide short circuit
protection as specified in the
code of Federal Regulations
30 CFR 75.601-2. E
2
225/400
ampere K frame and 400/600
ampere L frame electronic
trip units feature specifically
designed instantaneous
pickup settings to conform
exactly with the code of
Federal Regulations 30 CFR
75.601-2. Electromechanical
trip units are also available
with a wide range of magnetic
pickup ranges.
The tables below list the
conductor size maximum
allowable circuit breaker
instantaneous setting and
the E
2
breaker that meets
that setting.
Interrupting Capacity Rating
Trailing Cable Setting Per 30 CFR 75
Circuit
Breaker Type
Interrupting Capacity (Symmetrical kA)
Vac (50/60 Hz) Vdc
240 480 600 1000Y/577 250
E
2
F 652518—10
E
2
J 653518—10
E
2
K 653525—10
E
2
LME 100 65 35 — 42
E
2
L 653525—22
E
2
M 653525—22
E
2
N 655025——
E
2
R 125 65 50 — —
E
2
FM 65 25 18 10 10
E
2
JM 65 35 18 10 22
E
2
KM 65 35 25 14 10
E
2
LMZ 100 65 35 10 42
E
2
LM —35251822
E
2
MM —35251822
E
2
NM
—502525—
E
2
RM —655025—
Conductor
Size
Maximum
Breaker
Instantaneous
Setting
Maximum
Ampere
75°C Insulated
Conductor
E
2
/E
2
M
Instantaneous
Only Setting
14 50 15 E
2
K 150A A
12 75 20 E
2
K 150A B
10 150 30 E
2
K 150A C
8 200 50 E
2
K 225A A
6 300 65 E
2
K 225A B
4 500 85 E
2
K 225A/E2L 400A C/A
3 600 100 E
2
K 225A/E2L 400A D/B
2 800 115 E
2
K 225A/E2L 400A E/C
1 1000 130 E
2
K 225A/E2L 400A F/D
1/0 1250 150 E
2
K 225A/E2L 400A G/E
2/0 1500 175 E
2
K 225A/E2L 400A H/F
3/0 2000 200 E
2
L 400A G
4/0 2500 230 E
2
L 400A H
250 2500 255 E
2
L 400A H
300 2500 285 E
2
L 400A H
350 2500 310 E
2
L 400A H
400 2500 335 E
2
L 400A H
500 2500 380 E
2
L 400A H
Auxiliary Switch Electrical Rating Data
Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch) Electrical Rating Data
Notes
Two poles in series. DC rating applies to breakers with thermal-magnetic trip unit.
Breakers with electronic trip units are not DC rated.
Series rated for application with Eaton’s E
2
KM and E
2
LM breakers.
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum Current
Amperes
600 50/60 Hz 6.0
125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load)
250 DC 0.25 (non-inductive load)
Maximum
Voltage Frequency
Maximum Current
Amperes
600 50/60 Hz 6.0
125 DC 0.5 (non-inductive load)
250 DC 0.25 (non-inductive load)
E2MB 2011.fm Page 200 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
201
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-3
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E
2
Mining Service Breakers
Undervoltage Release Mechanism Electrical Rating Data
Breaker Type Supply Voltage
Dropout Voltage Pickup Voltage
VAMinimum Maximum Maximum
E2F/E2FM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.3
120 Vac 1.5
127 Vac 1.7
110 Vdc 1.5
120 Vdc 1.7
125 Vdc 1.9
E2J/E2JM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
110 Vdc 1.6
120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
E2K/E2KM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
110 Vdc 1.6
120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
E2LME/E2LMZ 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 0.96
120 Vac 1.13
127 Vac 1.25
110 Vdc 43.8 77 93.5 0.94
120 Vdc 1.12
125 Vdc 1.21
E2L/E2LM/E2M/
E2MM
110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
110 Vdc 1.6
120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
E2N/E2NM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 1.8
120 Vac 2.1
127 Vac 2.4
110 Vdc 1.6
120 Vdc 1.9
125 Vdc 2.2
E2R/E2RM 110 Vac 44.5 77 93.5 3.3
120 Vac 3.6
127 Vac 3.8
110 Vdc 43.8 77 93.5 3.3
120 Vdc 3.6
125 Vdc 3.8
E2MB 2011.fm Page 201 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
202 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-4
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E
2
Mining Service Breakers
Shunt Trip Electrical Rating Data
Breaker Type Supply Voltage
Operating Voltage
VAMinimum
E2F/E2FM 48 Vac 33.6 92
60 Vac 140
110 Vac 480
120 Vac 570
127 Vac 640
208 Vac 146 180
220 Vac 200
230 Vac 240
48 Vdc 33.6 100
60 Vdc 160
110 Vdc 77 55
120 Vdc 66
125 Vdc 71
E2J/E2JM 110 Vac 60.5 66
120 Vac 84
127 Vac 102
110 Vdc 77 112
120 Vdc 138
125 Vdc 150
E2K/E2KM 110 Vac 60 100
120 Vac 120
127 Vac 140
110 Vdc 77 110
120 Vdc 130
125 Vdc 140
24 Vac 41
48 Vac 18 139
60 Vac 210
E2LME/E2LMZ 110 Vac 60 83
120 Vac 92
127 Vac 117
24 Vdc 120
48 Vdc 18 475
60 Vdc 720
110 Vdc 82 99
120 Vdc 120
125 Vdc 121
Breaker Type Supply Voltage
Operating Voltage
VAMinimum
E2L/E2LM/E2M/
E2MM
48 Vac 34 830
60 Vac 1280
110 Vac 60 100
120 Vac 120
127 Vac 140
48 Vdc 34 710
60 Vdc 1105
110 Vdc 77 110
120 Vdc 130
125 Vdc 140
E2N/E2NM 110 Vac 60 100
120 Vac 120
127 Vac 140
110 Vdc 77 110
120 Vdc 130
125 Vdc 140
E2R/E2RM 110 Vac 60.5 330
120 Vac 390
127 Vac 430
110 Vdc 77 370
120 Vdc 440
125 Vdc 480
E2MB 2011.fm Page 202 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
203
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-5
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E
2
Mining Service Breakers
Product Selection
E
2
F/E
2
FM
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers—Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—
Include Line/Load Terminals
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Note
For two-pole application, use outer poles.
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Catalogue
Number
15
E2F3015
20
E2F3020
25
E2F3025
30
E2F3030
35
E2F3035
40
E2F3040
45
E2F3045
50
E2F305
60
E2F3060
70
E2F3070
80
E2F3080
90
E2F3090
100
E2F3100
125
E2F3125
150
E2F3150
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Catalogue
Number
15
—
20
E2FM3020
25
E2FM3025
30
—
35
—
40
E2FM3040
45
—
50
E2FM3050
60
E2FM3060
70
E2FM3070
80
E2FM3080
90
E2FM3090
100
E2FM3100
125
E2FM3125
150
E2FM3150
E2F/E2FM
E2MB 2011.fm Page 203 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
204 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-6
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E
2
Mining Service Breakers
E
2
F/E
2
FM
Magnetic Only Circuit Breakers—Sealed Breakers with Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit—
Include Line/Load Terminals
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Catalogue
Number
3 9–30 E2F003AM
7 21–70 E2F007CM
15 45–150 E2F015EM
30 90–300 E2F030HM
50–150 E2F030EM
50 150–500 E2F050KM
66–190 E2F050YM
70 210–700 E2F070MM
100 150–500 E2F100KM
300–1000 E2F100RM
150 450–1500 E2F150TM
750–2500 E2F150UM
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Catalogue
Number
3 9–30 —
7 21–70 —
15 45–150 —
30 90–300 —
50–150 —
50 150–500 E2FM050KM
66–190 E2FM050YM
70 210–700 E2FM070MM
100 150–500 E2FM100KM
300–1000 E2FM100RM
150 450–1500 E2FM150TM
750–2500 E2FM150UM
E2MB 2011.fm Page 204 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 205
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-7
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2J/E2JM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
70 300–650 E2J3070W E2J3250F E2J3070T
90 450–900 E2J3090W E2J3250F E2J3090T
100 500–1000 E2J3100W E2J3250F E2J3100T
125 625–1250 E2J3125W E2J3250F E2J3125T
150 750–1500 E2J3150W E2J3250F E2J3150T
175 875–1750 E2J3175W E2J3250F E2J3175T
200 1000–2000 E2J3200W E2J3250F E2J3200T
225 300–650 E2J3225AW E2J3250F E2J3225TA
500–1000 E2J3225DW E2J3250F E2J3225TD
1125–2250 E2J3225W E2J3250F E2J3225T
250 1250–2500 E2J3250W E2J3250F E2J3250T
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
70 300–650 E2JM3070W E2JM3250F E2J3070T
90 450–900 E2JM3090W E2JM3250F E2J3090T
100 500–1000 E2JM3100W E2JM3250F E2J3100T
125 625–1250 E2JM3125W E2JM3250F E2J3125T
150 750–1500 E2JM3150W E2JM3250F E2J3150T
175 875–1750 E2JM3175W E2JM3250F E2J3175T
200 1000–2000 E2JM3200W E2JM3250F E2J3200T
225 300–650 E2JM3225AW E2JM3250F E2J3225TA
500–1000 E2JM3225DW E2JM3250F E2J3225TD
1125–2250 E2JM3225W E2JM3250F E2J3225T
250 1250–2500 E2JM3250W E2JM3250F E2J3250T
E2J/E2JM
E2MB 2011.fm Page 205 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
206 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-8
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2J/E2JM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Magnetic Only Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
250 300–650 E2J3250MAW E2J3250F E2J3250TMA
450–900 E2J3250MCW E2J3250F E2J3250TMC
500–1000 E2J3250MDW E2J3250F E2J3250TMD
625–1250 E2J3250MFW E2J3250F E2J3250TMF
750–1500 E2J3250MGW E2J3250F E2J3250TMG
875–1750 E2J3250MJW E2J3250F E2J3250TMJ
1000–2000 E2J3250MKW E2J3250F E2J3250TMK
1125–2250 E2J3250MLW E2J3250F E2J3250TML
1250–2500 E2J3250MW E2J3250F E2J3250TM
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
250 300–650 E2JM3250MAW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMA
450–900 E2JM250MCW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMC
500–1000 E2JM3250MDW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMD
625–1250 E2JM3250MFW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMF
750–1500 E2JM3250MGW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMG
875–1750 E2JM3250MJW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMJ
1000–2000 E2JM3250MKW E2JM3250F E2J3250TMK
1125–2250 E2JM3250MLW E2JM3250F E2J3250TML
1250–2500 E2JM3250MW E2JM3250F E2J3250TM
E2MB 2011.fm Page 206 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 207
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-9
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2K/E2KM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 14 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
100 500–1000 E2K3100W E2K3400F E2K3100T
125 625–1250 E2K3125W E2K3400F E2K3125T
150 750–1500 E2K3150W E2K3400F E2K3150T
175 875–1750 E2K3175W E2K3400F E2K3175T
200 1000–2000 E2K3200W E2K3400F E2K3200T
225 300–650 E2K3225AW E2K3400F E2K3225TA
500–1000 E2K3225DW E2K3400F E2K3225TD
1125–2250 E2K3225W E2K3400F E2K3225T
250 1250–2500 E2K3250W E2K3400F E2K3250T
300 1500–3000 E2K3300W E2K3400F E2K3300T
350 1750–3500 E2K3350W E2K3400F E2K3350T
400 2000–4000 E2K3400W E2K3400F E2K3400T
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
100 500–1000 E2KM3100W E2KM3400F E2K3100T
125 625–1250 E2KM3125W E2KM3400F E2K3125T
150 750–1500 E2KM3150W E2KM3400F E2K3150T
175 875–1750 E2KM3175W E2KM3400F E2K3175T
200 1000–2000 E2KM3200W E2KM3400F E2K3200T
225 300–650 E2KM3225AW E2KM3400F E2K3225TA
500–1000 E2KM3225DW E2KM3400F E2K3225TD
1125–2250 E2KM3225W E2KM3400F E2K3225T
250 1250–2500 E2KM3250W E2KM3400F E2K3250T
300 1500–3000 E2KM3300W E2KM3400F E2K3300T
350 1750–3500 E2KM3350W E2KM3400F E2K3350T
400 2000–4000 E2KM3400W E2KM3400F E2K3400T
E2K/E2KM
E2MB 2011.fm Page 207 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
208 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-10
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2K/E2KM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Magnetic Only Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 14 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
400 300–650 E2K3400MAW E2K3400F E2K3400TMA
500–1000 E2K3400MDW E2K3400F E2K3400TMD
625–1250 E2K3400MFW E2K3400F E2K3400TMF
750–1500 E2K3400MGW E2K3400F E2K3400TMG
875–1750 E2K3400MJW E2K3400F E2K3400TMJ
1000–2000 E2K3400MKW E2K3400F E2K3400TMK
1125–2250 E2K3400MLW E2K3400F E2K3400TML
1250–2500 E2K3400MWW E2K3400F E2K3400TMW
1500–3000 E2K3400MNW E2K3400F E2K3400TMN
1750–3500 E2K3400MRW E2K3400F E2K3400TMR
2000–4000 E2K3400MW E2K3400F E2K3400TM
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
400 300–650 E2KM3250MAW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMA
500–1000 E2KM3400MDW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMD
625–1250 E2KM3400MFW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMF
750–1500 E2KM3400MGW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMG
875–1750 E2KM3400MJW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMJ
1000–2000 E2KM3400MKW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMK
1125–2250 E2KM3400MLW E2KM3400F E2K3400TML
1250–2500 E2KM3400MWW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMW
1500–3000 E2KM3400MNW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMN
1750–3500 E2KM3400MRW E2KM3400F E2K3400TMR
2000–4000 E2KM3400MW E2KM3400F E2K3400TM
E2MB 2011.fm Page 208 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 209
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-11
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2K/E2KM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous
600 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 14 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
100 50–800 E2KE3100W E2K3400F KEM3100T
125 50–800 E2KE3125W E2K3400F KEM3125T
150 50–800 E2KE3150W E2K3400F KEM3150T
200 200–1500 E2KE3200W E2K3400F KEM3200T
225 200–1500 E2KE3225W E2K3400F KEM3225T
500–2500 E2KE32252W E2K3400F KEM3225T2
400 200–1500 E2KE3400W E2K3400F KEM3400T
500–2500 E2KE34002W E2K3400F KEM3400T2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
100 50–800 E2KEM3100W E2KM3400F KEM3100T
125 50–800 E2KEM3125W E2KM3400F KEM3125T
150 50–800 E2KEM3150W E2KM3400F KEM3150T
200 200–1500 E2KEM3200W E2KM3400F KEM3200T
225 200–1500 E2KEM3225 E2KM3400F KEM3225T
500–2500 E2KEM32252W E2KM3400F KEM3225T2
400 200–1500 E2KEM3400W E2KM3400F KEM3400T
500–2500 E2KEM34002W E2KM3400F KEM3400T2
E2MB 2011.fm Page 209 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
210 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-12
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2K/E2KM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Instantaneous Only
600 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 14 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
150 50–800 E2KE3150MW E2K3400F KEM3150TM
225 200–1500 E2KE3225MW E2K3400F KEM3225TM
500–2500 E2KE3225M2W E2K3400F KEM3225TM2
400 200–1500 E2KE3400MW E2K3400F KEM3400TM
500–2500 E2KE3400M2W E2K3400F KEM3400TM2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
150 50–800 E2KEM3150MW E2KM3400F KEM3150TM
225 200–1500 E2KEM3225MW E2KM3400F KEM3225TM
500–2500 E2KEM3225M2W E2KM3400F KEM3225TM2
400 200–1500 E2KEM3400MW E2KM3400F KEM3400TM
500–2500 E2KEM3400M2W E2KM3400F KEM3400TM2
E2MB 2011.fm Page 210 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 211
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-13
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2LME/E2LMZ (Series G)
Circuit Breakers with Magnetic Only Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 35 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 35 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 10 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
400 3600–4400 E2LME3400KMW E2LME3400NN LT3400KM
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
400 3600–4400 E2LMZ3400KMW E2LMZ3400NN LT3400KM
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
160 320–1920 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M
200 400–2400 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M
225 450–2700 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M
250 500–3000 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M
300 600–3600 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M
315 630–3780 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M
350 700–4200 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M
400 800–4800 E2LME340031W E2LME3400NN LT340031M
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
160 320–1920 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M
200 400–2400 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M
225 450–2700 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M
250 500–3000 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M
300 600–3600 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M
315 630–3780 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M
350 700–4200 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M
400 800–4800 E2LMZ340031W E2LMZ3400NN LT340031M
E2MB 2011.fm Page 211 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
212 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-14
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2L/E2LM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Note
600 ampere thermal 1125–2250 T.A.
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
300 1500–3000 E2L3300W E2L3600F E2L3300T
350 1750–3500 E2L3350W E2L3600F E2L3350T
400 2000–4000 E2L3400W E2L3600F E2L3400T
450 2250–4500 E2L3450W E2L3600F E2L3450T
500 2500–5000 E2L3500W E2L3600F E2L3500T
600 3000–6000 E2L3600W E2L3600F E2L3600T
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
300 1500–3000 E2LM3300W E2LM3600F E2L3300T
350 1750–3500 E2LM3350W E2LM3600F E2L3350T
400 2000–4000 E2LM3400W E2LM3600F E2L3400T
450 2250–4500 E2LM3450W E2LM3600F E2L3450T
500 2500–5000 E2LM3500W E2LM3600F E2L3500T
600 3000–6000 E2LM3600W E2LM3600F E2L3600T
1125–2250 — E2LM3600F E2L3600TL
E2MB 2011.fm Page 212 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 213
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-15
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2L/E2LM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Magnetic Only Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
600 1125–2250 E2L3600MLW E2L3600F E2L3600TML
1500–3000 E2L3600MNW E2L3600F E2L3600TMN
1750–3500 E2L3600MRW E2L3600F E2L3600TMR
2000–4000 E2L3600MXW E2L3600F E2L3600TMX
2250–4500 E2L3600MYW E2L3600F E2L3600TMY
2500–5000 E2L3600MPW E2L3600F E2L3600TMP
3000–6000 E2L3600MW E2L3600F E2L3600TM
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
600 1125–2250 E2LM3600MLW E2LM3600F E2L3600TML
1500–3000 E2LM3600MNW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMN
1750–3500 E2LM3600MRW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMR
2000–4000 E2LM3600MXW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMX
2250–4500 E2LM3600MYW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMY
2500–5000 E2LM3600MPW E2LM3600F E2L3600TMP
3000–6000 E2LM3600MW E2LM3600F E2L3600TM
E2MB 2011.fm Page 213 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
214 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-16
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2L/E2LM
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous
600 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Circuit Breakers with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Instantaneous Only
600 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
300 500–2500 E2LE3300W E2L3600F LEM3300T
350 500–2500 E2LE3350W E2L3600F LEM3350T
400 500–2500 E2LE3400W E2L3600F LEM3400T
1000–4000 E2LE34002W E2L3600F LEM3400T2
600 500–2500 E2LE3600W E2L3600F LEM3600T
2500–5000 E2LE36002W E2L3600F LEM3600T2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
300 500–2500 E2LEM3300W E2LM3600F LEM3300T
350 500–2500 E2LEM3350W E2LM3600F LEM3350T
400 500–2500 E2LEM3400W E2LM3600F LEM3400T
1000–4000 E2LEM34002W E2LM3600F LEM3400T2
600 500–2500 E2LEM3600W E2LM3600F LEM3600T
2500–5000 E2LEM36002W E2LM3600F LEM3600T2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
400 500–2500 E2LE3400MW E2L3600F LEM3400TM
1000–4000 E2LE3400M2W E2L3600F LEM3400TM2
600 500–2500 E2LE3600MW E2L3600F LEM3600TM
1000–4000 E2LE3600M2W E2L3600F 1483D53G50
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
400 500–2500 E2LEM3400MW E2LM3600F LEM3400TM
1000–4000 E2LEM3400M2W E2LM3600F LEM3400TM2
600 500–2500 E2LEM3600MW E2LM3600F LEM3600TM
1000–4000 E2LEM3600M2W E2LM3600F 1483D53G50
E2MB 2011.fm Page 214 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 215
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-17
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2M/E2MM
Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Thermal-Magnetic Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Magnetic Only Trip Unit
600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
600 1500–3000 E2M3600W E2M3800F E2M3600TN
800 2000–4000 E2M3800W E2M3800F E2M3800TX
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
600 1500–3000 E2MM3600W E2MM3800F E2M3600TN
800 2000–4000 E2MM3800W E2MM3800F E2M3800TX
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
800 1500–3000 E2M3800MNW E2M3800F E2M3800TMN
2000–4000 E2M3800MXW E2M3800F E2M3800TMX
2500–5000 E2M3800MPW E2M3800F E2M3800TMP
3000–6000 E2M3800MWW E2M3800F E2M3800TMW
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
800 1500–3000 E2MM3800MNW E2MM3800F E2M3800TMN
2000–4000 E2MM3800MXW E2MM3800F E2M3800TMX
2500–5000 E2MM3800MPW E2MM3800F E2M3800TMP
3000–6000 E2MM3800MWW E2MM3800F E2M3800TMW
E2M/E2MM
E2MB 2011.fm Page 215 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
216 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-18
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2M/E2MM
Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous
600 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Electronic Trip Unit, Instantaneous Only
600 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 18 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
800 500–2500 E2ME3800W E2M3800F MEM3800T
1000–4000 E2ME38002W E2M3800F MEM3800T2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
800 500–2500 E2MEM3800W E2MM3800F MEM3800T
1000–4000 E2MEM38002W E2MM3800F MEM3800T2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
800 500–2500 E2ME3800MW E2M3800F MEM3800TM
1000–4000 E2ME3800M2W E2M3800F MEM3800TM2
Maximum
Continuous
Ampere Rating
at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Complete Breaker Frame Only Trip Unit Only
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
Catalogue
Number
800 500–2500 E2MEM3800MW E2MM3800F MEM3800TM
1000–4000 E2MEM3800M2W E2MM3800F MEM3800TM2
E2MB 2011.fm Page 216 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 217
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-19
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2N/E2NM
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous
600 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole Frame
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Frame
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit, Instantaneous Only
600 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole Frame
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Frame
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Catalogue
Number
400 500–2500 E2N3400W
500 500–2500 E2N3500W
600 500–2500 E2N3600W
700 500–2500 E2N3700W
800 500–2500 E2N3800W
900 1250–5000 E2N3900W
1000 1250–5000 E2N310W
1200 1250–5000 E2N312W
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Catalogue
Number
400 500–2500 E2NM3400W
500 500–2500 E2NM3500W
600 500–2500 E2NM3600W
700 500–2500 E2NM3700W
800 500–2500 E2NM3800W
900 1250–5000 E2NM3900W
1000 1250–5000 E2NM310W
1200 1250–5000 E2NM312W
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Catalogue
Number
800 500–2500 E2N3800MW
1200 1250–5000 E2N312MW
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Catalogue
Number
800 500–2500 E2NM3800MW
1200 1250–5000 E2NM312MW
E2MB 2011.fm Page 217 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
218 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-20
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
E2R/E2RM
Circuit Breakers with Electronic Trip Unit, Long/Instantaneous (Does Not Include Rating Plugs)
600 Vac Maximum, 50 kA at 600 Vac, Three-Pole Frame
1000Y/577 Vac Maximum, 25 kA at 1000 Vac, Three-Pole Frame
Note
Rating plugs: 1600 amperes 16RES16T; 2000 amperes 20RES20T.
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Catalogue
Number
LS
1600 2–8 x InE2R316T33W
2000 2–8 x InE2R320T33W
LSI
1600 2–8 x InE2R316T32W
2000 2–8 x InE2R320T32W
Maximum Continuous
Ampere Rating at 40°C
Magnetic
Trip Range
Catalogue
Number
LS
1600 2–8 x InE2RM316T33W
2000 2–8 x InE2RM320T33W
LSI
1600 2–8 x InE2RM316T32W
2000 2–8 x InE2RM320T32W
E2MB 2011.fm Page 218 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 219
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-21
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
Accessories
Line and Load Terminals
End Cap Terminals—For Use with Ring Type Terminals
External Accessories
Padlockable Handle
Lock Hasp
Breaker
Type
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Wire
Type
AWG Wire Range
(No. Conductors)
Catalogue
Number
E2F/E2FM 100 Cu/AI #14–1/0 (1) 3T100FB (package of three)
150 Cu #4–4/0 (1) 3T150FB (package of three)
E2J/E2JM 250 Cu #4–350 (1) T250KB
E2K/E2KM 225 Cu #3–350 (1) T300K
350 Cu 250–500 (1) T350K
400 Cu 2/0–250 (2) 3T400K (three-pole kit)
E2LME/E2LMZ 400 Cu/AI 500–750 (1) 3TA631LK
E2L/E2LM 400 Cu/AI 4/0–600 (1) 3TA401LDK (three-pole kit)
600 Cu 250–350 (2) T602LD
E2M/E2MM 600 Cu (2) 2/0–500 kcmil T600MA1
600 Cu/AI (2) 1–500 kcmil TA700MA1
800 std. Cu/AI (3) 3/0–400 kcmil TA800MA2
800 Cu/AI (2) 500–750 kcmil TA801MA
800 Cu (3) 3/0–300 kcmil T800MA1
E2N/E2NM 700 Cu 2/0–500 (2) T700NB1
1000 Cu 3/0–500 (3) T1000NB1
1200 Cu 3/0–400 (4) T1200NB3
1600 Cu/AI 500–1000 (4) TA1600RD
2000 Cu/AI 2–600 (6) TA2000RD
Breaker
Type
Maximum
Breaker Amperes
Catalogue
Number
Metric
Catalogue
Number Imperial
E2F/E2FM 150 KPEK1 KPEMK1 —
E2J/E2JM 250 KPEK2 KPEMK2 —
E2K/E2KM 400 KPEK3 KPEMK3 —
E2LME/E2LMZ 400 — L3RTWK —
E2L/E2LM 600 KPEK4 KPEMK4 —
Breaker Type
Catalogue
Number
E2F/E2FM PLK1
E2J/E2JM PLK3
E2K/E2KM PLK3
E2LME/E2LMZ LPHL
E2L/E2LM HLK4
E2M/E2MM HLK4
E2N/E2NM PLK5
E2R/E2RM HLK6
E2MB 2011.fm Page 219 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
220 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-22
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
Internal Accessories
Undervoltage Release
Notes
Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed.
LH (RH also available).
Pigtail leads.
Terminal blocks.
RH only.
Breaker
Type
UVR
Type
Voltage
Rating
Mounting
Location
Catalogue
Number
Factory
Modification Code
E2F/E2FM Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH1LP11K (thermal/magnetic only) U18
Handle reset 110–127 Vdc Left pole UVH1LP26K (thermal/magnetic only) U42
E2J/E2JM Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH2LP08K U18
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH2LP11K U22
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH2LP26K T14
E2K/E2KM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08K
U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM3LP08KT U68
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH3LP08K U18
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH3LP11K U22
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH3LP26K T14
E2LME/E2LMZ Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVR120APK U5
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVR125DPK U6
E2L/E2LM/E2M/E2MM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08K
U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM4LP08KT
U68
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH4LP08K U18
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH4LP11K U22
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH4LP26K T14
E2N/E2NM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LP08K U66
120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Left pole UVM5LT08K U68
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Left pole UVH5LP08K U18
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Left pole UVH5LP11K U22
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Left pole UVH5LP26K T14
E2R/E2RM 120 volt handle reset with LED 120 Vac Right pole UVM6RP08K U58
Handle reset 110–127 Vac Right pole UVH6RP08K U49
Handle reset 208–240 Vac Right pole UVH6RP11K U53
Handle reset 110–125 Vdc Right pole UVH6RP26K T33
E2MB 2011.fm Page 220 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 221
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB
E2MB-23
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
E2 Mining Service Breakers
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switch
Breaker
Type
Voltage
Rating
Mounting
Location
Catalogue
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
E2F/E2FM 48–127 Vac or
48–60 Vdc
Left pole SNT1LP08K S06
208–230 Vac or
110–127 Vdc
Left pole SNT1LP12K S10
E2J/E2JM 110–240 Vac or
110–125 Vdc
Left pole SNT2P11K S10
E2K/E2KM 110–240 Vac or
110–125 Vdc
Left pole SNT3P11K S10
E2LME/E2LMZ 24–60 Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT060CPK S1
110–240 Vac/Vdc Left pole SNT120CPK S2
E2L/E2LM/E2M/E2MM 48–60 Vac Left pole SNT4LP05K S06
48–60 Vdc Left pole SNT4LP23K S86
110–240 Vac Left pole SNT4LP11K S10
110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT4LP26K S42
E2N/E2NM 110–240 Vac Left pole SNT5LP11K S10
110–125 Vdc Left pole SNT5LP26K S42
E2R/E2RM 110–240 Vac Right pole SNT6P11K S29
110–125 Vdc Right pole SNT6P26K S45
Breaker
Type
Number of Sets
of Contacts
(1A and 1B)
Mounting
Location
Catalogue
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1X1PK A06
2 Right A2X1RPK A13
E2J/E2JM 1 Right A1X2PK A06
2 Right A2X2PK A13
E2K/E2KM 1 Right A1X3PK A06
2 Right A2X3PK A13
E2LME/E2LMZ 1 Right AUX1A1BPK A1
2 Right AUX2A2BPK A2
E2L/E2LM/E2M/E2MM 1 Right A1X4PK A06
2 Right A2X4PK A13
E2N/E2NM 1 Right A1X5PK A06
2 Right A2X5PK A13
E2R/E2RM 2 Right A2X6RPK A12
4 Right A4X6RPK A19
Alarm (Signal/Lockout Switch)
Notes
Contact Eaton for internal accessory voltage ratings not listed.
LH (RH also available).
LH or RH.
RH only.
Breaker
Type
Number of Sets
of Contacts
(Make and
Break)
Mounting
Location
Catalogue
Number
Factory
Modification
Code
E2F/E2FM 1 Right A1L1LPK/A1L1RPK B06
2 Right A2L1LPK/A2L1RPK B13
E2J/E2JM 1 Right A1L2LPK/A1L2RPK B06
E2K/E2KM 1 Right A1L3LPK/A1L3RPK B06
2 Right A2L3LPK/A2L3RPK B13
E2LME/E2LMZ 1 Right ALM1M1BJPK B1
2 Right ALM2M2BJPK B3
E2L/E2LM/E2M/E2MM 1 Right A1L4LPK/A1L4RPK B06
2 Right A2L4LPK/A2L4RPK B13
E2N/E2NM 1 Right A1L5LPK/A1L5RPK B06
2 Right A2L5LPK/A2L5RPK B13
E2R/E2RM 1 Right A1L6RPK B05
2 Right A2L6RPK B12
E2MB 2011.fm Page 221 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:09 PM
222 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-1
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Breakers
Product Overview
Classic mining service circuit breakers continue to be
manufactured and are primarily applied to achieve an exact
physical and electronic replacement of previously Eaton installed
Westinghouse equipment. To upgrade to the current offering of
E
2
mining circuit breakers, consult the cross reference
information on
Page CMCB-10.
AC Interrupting Capacity, Symmetrical Amperes
Special DC Interrupting Capacity
Notes
Based on circuit power factor of 50% or greater.
HLAM must be rear stud connected. If front connected, interrupting capacity rating is 10,000 amperes.
Resistive circuit.
Two poles in electrical series in ungrounded leg of circuit.
Breaker Type
60 Hz
AC Volts KAM LAM, MAM, NBM HKAM HLAM
All Other 1000 Volt
Breakers
240 25,000 42,000 — — —
480 22,000 30,000 — — —
600 22,000 22,000 — — —
1000
— — 10,000 12,000 14,000
Breaker
Type
Interrupting Capacity (Amperes) at 300–330 Vdc
Single-Pole Two Poles in Series
Maximum
Ampere Rating 0.0–0.15 mH Inductance
0.15–0.5 mH Inductance 0.5–0.9 mH Inductance 2.4 mH Inductance
KAM 225 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000
LAM 400/600 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000
MAM 800 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000
NBM 1200 15,000 10,000 15,000 5000
CMCB 2011.fm Page 222 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
223
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-2
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Classic Circuit Breakers For Mining Service
Undervoltage Release Data
Undervoltage releases are calibrated to pick up at 72 to 85% of rated voltage dropout between
35 to 70% of rated voltage.
Shunt Trip Coil Data
Notes
Supplied for external customer mounting.
New design electrical reset UVR.
16,000 for Type MAM and HMAM.
Breaker
Type Volts
Line
Amperes
Series
Resistors
Total
VA
KAM, HKAM
480/60 0.021 10,000 10.1
240/60 0.019 — 4.6
120/60 0.021 — 2.5
120/60
0.13 — 15.6
LAM, HLAM, MAM,
HMAM, NBM, HNBM
480/60 0.033 12,000
15.9
240/60 0.028 6,000 6.7
120/60 0.029 — 3.5
120/60
0.13 — 15.6
Breaker
Type Volts Amperes VA
KAM, HKAM, LAM, HLAM, MAM,
HMAM, NBM, HNBM
480/60 0.085 40.8
240/60 1.7 408
120/60 0.88 105.6
48 DC 8.0 384
CMCB 2011.fm Page 223 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
224 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-3
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on
Page CMCB-10
.
Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers
Notes
Terminals not included in style number.
All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated.
Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type.
UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac.
M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.
Breaker
Type
Frame
Style Numbers
Poles Amperes
Trip
Type
Accessories
(Included in Frame)
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes
KAM
2609D60G64
2 180 M None 200–400
1291C26G07
2 180 M UVR
200–400
2609D60G66
2 180 M Standard shunt trip
200–400
1291C26G01
2 225 TM UVR
300–700
1291C26G02
2 225 TM UVR
500–1000
2609D60G67
3 180 M None 200–400
1291C26G08
3 180 M UVR
200–400
2609D60G69
3 180 M Standard shunt trip
200–400
5685D48G75
3 225 TM None 300–700
5685D48G74
3 225 TM None 500–1000
1291C26G03
3 225 TM UVR
300–700
1291C26G04
3 225 TM UVR
500–1000
2609D60G01
3 225 TM Standard shunt trip
300–700
2609D60G02
3 225 TM Standard shunt trip
500–1000
2609D60G40
3 225 M None 300–700
2609D60G41
3 225 M None 500–700
1291C26G05
3 225 M UVR
300–700
1291C26G06
3 225 M UVR
500–1000
LAM
1291C32G01
2 400 TM UVR
500–1000
2609D60G61
2 400 M Shunt trip (48 Vdc) 750–1500
1291C32G03
3 400 TM UVR
500–1000
5685D48G73
3 400 TM None 800–1600
1291C32G02
3 400 TM UVR
800–1600
2609D60G03
3 400 TM Standard shunt trip
800–1600
2609D60G44
3 400 M None 800–1600
1291C32G04
3 400 M UVR
800–1600
CMCB 2011.fm Page 224 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
225
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-4
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
For reference only. Replace these frames with E2 Series. See Cross-Reference information beginning on
Page CMCB-10
.
Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers, continued
Notes
Terminals not included in style number.
All breakers listed are complete with accessories indicated.
Rated 120 volts/60 Hz: undervoltage release is handle reset type.
UVR is auto-reset type, 120 Vac.
M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.
Breaker
Type
Frame
Style Numbers
Poles Amperes
Trip
Type
Accessories
(Included in Frame)
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes
MAM
2609D60G17
2 600 TM UVR
750–1500
2609D60G18
2 800 TM UVR
1000–2000
2609D60G63
3 400 TM UVR
2000–4000
5685D48G72
3 600 TM None 1500–3000
2609D60G19
3 600 TM UVR
1500–3000
2609D60G04
3 600 TM Standard shunt trip
1500–3000
2609D60G05
3 800 TM Standard shunt trip
2000–4000
5685D48G71
3 800 TM None 2000–4000
2609D60G20
3 800 TM UVR
2000–4000
2609D60G46
3 800 M None 1500–3000
2609D60G47
3 800 M UVR
1500–3000
2609D60G48
3 800 M None 2000–4000
2609D60G49
3 800 M UVR
2000–4000
NBM
1229C37G13
2 1000 TM UVR
1500–3000
1229C37G14
2 1200 TM UVR
2000–4000
1227C36G10
3 1000 TM None 2500–5000
1229C37G15
3 1000 TM UVR
2500–5000
1227C36G13
3 1000 TM Standard shunt trip
2500–5000
1227C36G14
3 1200 TM Standard shunt trip
2500–5000
1227C36G09
3 1200 TM None 2500–5000
1229C37G16
3 1200 TM UVR
2500–5000
1227C36G19
3 1200 M None 2500–5000
1229C37G17
3 1200 M UVR
2500–5000
CMCB 2011.fm Page 225 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
226 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-5
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
1000 Volt Classic Mining Service Circuit Breakers
Notes
The magnetic trip range does not change when rating plug is changed.
120 volt, 60 Hz electrical reset type.
Rated 120 volts, 60 Hz; undervoltage release is handle reset type.
M = magnetic only; TM = thermal-magnetic.
Breaker
Type
Frame
Style Numbers Poles Amperes
Trip
Type
Accessories
(Included in Frame)
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes
HKAM
2609D60G70
3 180 M None 200–400
1291C26G16
3 180 M UVR
200–400
5685D48G87
3 225 TM None 300–700
1291C26G12
3 225 TM UVR
300–700
5685D48G86
3 225 TM None 500–1000
1291C26G13
3 225 TM UVR
500–1000
1291C26G14
3 225 M UVR
300–700
1291C26G15
3 225 M UVR
500–1000
HLAM
5685D48G85
3 400 TM None 800–1600
1291C32G07
3 400 TM UVR
800–1600
1291C32G09
3 400 M UVR
800–1600
HMAM 5685D48G84 3 600 TM None 1500–3000
2609D60G28 3 600 TM UVR 1500–3000
5685D48G83 3 800 TM None 2000–4000
2609D60G29 3 800 TM UVR 2000–4000
2609D60G57 3 800 M UVR 1500–3000
2609D60G58 3 800 M UVR 2000–4000
HNBM 1227C36G12 3 1000 TM None 2500–5000
1229C37G19 3 1000 TM UVR 2500–5000
1227C36G11 3 1200 TM None 2500–5000
1229C37G20 3 1200 TM UVR 2500–5000
1229C37G18 3 1200 M UVR 2500–5000
HKAM
HLAM
HMAM
H
NAM
CMCB 2011.fm Page 226 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 227
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-6
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Service Breaker Frames Only
Trip Units for Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Notes
Frame modified for left-hand mounting of UVR attachment.
Frame modified for right-hand mounting of UVR attachment.
Three-pole trip units only are suitable for replacement in 1000 volt mining service circuit breakers.
800 amperes.
Breaker
Type
Frame Size,
Amperes Number of Poles
Style
Numbers
Breaker
Type
Frame Size,
Amperes Number of Poles
Style
Numbers
KAM 225 2 2602D86G11 MAM 800 2 2600D43G11
225 3 2602D86G12 800 3 2600D43G12
KAMH 225 2 2602D86G13 MAMH 800 2 2600D43G13
225 3 2602D86G14 800 3 2600D43G14
HKAM 225 3 1264C99G05 HMAM 800 3 1264C99G03
LAM 400 2 2602D99G05 NBM 1200 2 2610D64G07
400 3 2602D99G06 1200 3 2610D64G08
LAMH 400 2 2602D99G07 NBMH 1200 2 2610D64G09
400 3 2602D99G08 1200 3 2610D64G10
HLAM 400 3 1264C99G02 HNBM 1200 3 2610D64G13
LAM3600F 600 3 2603D48G07
LAMH3600F 600 3 2603D48G08
HLAM3600F 600 3 2603D48G09
Thermal-Magnetic Magnetic Only
Breaker
Type
Conductor
Size
Magnetic Trip Range,
Amperes
Maximum Continuous
Amperes
Three-Pole
Style Numbers
Three-Pole
Style Numbers
HKAM #6 150–400 180 — 2609D99G22
#4–#3 300–700 225 5685D48G40 2611D75G01
#4–#1 500–1000 225 5685D48G34 2611D75G02
HLAM #4–#1 750–1500 400 5685D48G97 2609D99G21
#2–#2/0 800–1600 400 5685D48G28 2611D75G03
HLAM600 #2–2/0 750–1500 600 2609D99G20 —
2/0–500 kcmil 1500–3000 600 2609D99G19 —
HMAM #2–#2/0 750–1500 600 ——
2/0–500 kcmil 1500–3000 600 5685D48G22 2611D75G04
#1–3/0 1000–2000 800 ——
3/0–500 kcmil 2000–4000 800 5685D48G16 2611D75G05
HNBM 2/0–500 kcmil 1500–3000 1000 ——
4/0–500 kcmil 2500–5000 1000 5685D48G10 —
3/0–500 kcmil 2000–4000 1200 ——
4/0–500 kcmil 2500–5000 1200 5685D48G04 2611D75G07
CMCB 2011.fm Page 227 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
228 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-7
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Terminals For Classic Mining Service Breakers
Terminals are UL listed for wire type and range listed below.
When used with aluminum conductors, use joint compound.
Terminals For Mining Service Breakers
Breaker
Type
Terminal
Type
Maximum
Amperes
Package of 3 Line Terminals
Style Number
Wire Range,
Type
FBM, HFBM Style pressure type terminals 100 624B100G02 #14–1/0 Al/Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 50 624B100G10 #14–#4 Al/Cu
100 624B100G17 # 4–4/0 Al/Cu
Breaker
Type
Terminal
Type
Maximum
Amperes
Terminal
Catalogue Number
Wire Range, Type
Number of Cables
KAM, HKAM Standard pressure terminals (copper only) 225 T225LA (1) #6–350 kcmil
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 225 TA225LA1 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
LAM Standard copper pressure terminals 225 T225LA (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu
400 T401LA (1) #4–250 kcmil Cu plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 225 TA225LA1 (1) #6–350 kcmil Cu, or (1) #4–350 kcmil Al
400 TA400LA1 (1) #4–250 kcmil Al/Cu, plus (1) 3/0–600 kcmil Al/Cu
400 TA401LA (1) 600–750 kcmil Al
LAM-600, LAMH-600, HLAM-600 Standard copper pressure terminals 600 T600LA (2) 250–500 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 600 TA600LA (2) 250–500 kcmil Al/Cu
MAM, HMAM, MAMH Standard copper pressure terminals 350 T350MA (1) #1–600 kcmil Cu
600 T600MA1 (2) 2/0–500 kcmil Cu
800 T800MA1 (3) 3/0–300 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 600 TA700MA1 (2) #1–500 kcmil Al/Cu
800 TA800MA2 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu
800 TA801MA (2) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu
NBM, HNBM, NBMH Standard copper pressure terminals 1000 T1000NB1 (3) 3/0–500 kcmil Cu
1200 T1200NB1 (4) 3/0–400 kcmil Cu
Optional Al/Cu pressure terminals 1000 TA1000NB1 (3) 3/0–400 kcmil Al/Cu
1200 TA1200NB1 (4) 4/0–500 kcmil Al/Cu
1200 TA1201NB1 (3) 500–750 kcmil Al/Cu
CMCB 2011.fm Page 228 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 229
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-8
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Accessories
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Rear Connected Studs
For complete stud assembly,
order a stud and tube based
on thickness of customer’s
mounting panel. A short stud
must be assembled adjacent
to a long stud to maintain
clearances required by
Underwriters Laboratories.
Two studs required per pole.
For List Prices, see Eaton’s
Price and Availability Digest.
Mounting Panel
Thickness In
Inches (mm)
Stud Tube
Length
Style
Numbers
Length In
Inches (mm)
Style
Numbers
KAM, HKAM Breakers
0.75 (19.1)–1.00 (25.4) Short 656D565G01 0.84 (21.3) 456D983H05
Long 656D565G02 3.78 (96.0) 456D983H08
0.50 (12.7)–0.75 (19.1) Short 656D565G01 1.09 (27.7) 456D983H06
Long 656D565G02 4.03 (102.4) 456D983H09
0.25 (6.4)–0.50 (12.7) Short 656D565G01 1.34 (34.0) 456D983H07
Long 656D565G02 4.28 (108.7) 456D983H10
Rear Connected Studs For Insulated Panels Only: Two Per Pole
Line and Load Terminal Shields
Notes
Not UL Iisted.
400 ampere LA studs of the same length have sufficient clearance; however, customer
connections may make it necessary to use a short stud adjacent to a long stud.
150, 300 and 400 ampere frames only.
This is a special stud that includes six contact nuts for use where bus contact nuts
must be used.
For breakers used with terminals and cable connections. Sold in packages of 10.
Stud
Ampere Number
Diameter, In
Inches (mm)
and Thread
Extension Back
of Breaker In
Inches (mm)
Stud
Style Numbers
LAM, HLAM Breakers
225 0.50 (12.7)–13 3.22 (81.8) 1241 345
0.50 (12.7)–13 6.28 (159.5) 1241 346
225 0.50 (12.7)–13 4.97 (126.2) 1241 392
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 5.47 (138.9) 05B7383G22
0.75 (19.1)–16 7.97 (202.4) 05B7383G23
0.75 (19.1)–16 10.47 (265.9) 05B7383G24
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G16
1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G17
1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G18
MAM, HMAM, MAMH Breakers
225 0.50 (12.7)–13 3.66 (93.0) 314C960G01
400 0.75 (19.1)–16 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G04
0.75 (19.1)–16 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G05
0.75 (19.1)–16 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G06
600 1.00 (25.4)–12 5.91 (150.1) 314C960G07
1.00 (25.4)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G08
1.00 (25.4)–12 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G09
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 4.91 (124.7) 314C960G10
1.13 (28.7)–12 8.41 (213.6) 314C960G11
1.13 (28.7)–12 10.91 (277.1) 314C960G12
NBM, HNBM, NBMH Breakers
800 1.13 (28.7)–12 5.50 (139.7) 623B222G01
1.13 (28.7)–12 8.00 (203.2) 623B222G02
1.13 (28.7)–12 10.50 (266.7) 623B222G03
1200 1.25 (31.8)–12 5.50 (139.7) 373B375G04
1.25 (31.8)–12 10.50 (266.7) 373B375G03
Breaker Type Description Style Numbers
KAM Line terminals 1261C93G01
Load terminals 1262C46G01
LAM-400 Line terminals 1261C95G01
Load terminals 1262C48G01
MAM Line terminals 1261C97G01
Load terminals 1261C97G02
CMCB 2011.fm Page 229 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
230 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-9
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Standard Handle Reset Undervoltage Release
For Classic breakers field
mountable on special frames
listed on Page CMCB-10, or
replacement on breakers
originally equipped with this
type UVR.
For undervoltage protection.
A solenoid device mounts
within breaker case. Coil
must be energized before
closing breaker. Trips breaker
when voltage drops below
35 to 70% of coil rating. Picks
up and seals in at 72 to 85%
of coil rating. For line voltages
up to 250 Vdc or 600 Vac.
Externally mounted resistors
are supplied for certain ratings.
Standard leads extend 18.00
inches (457.2 mm) outside of
breaker. Longer leads may
be specified.
Breaker
Type Volts
Style
Numbers
Right-Hand Mounting
LAM, HLAM 120 Vac 4995D12G11
120 Vac 1228C76G03
240 Vac 4995D12G13
480 Vac 4995D12G14
125 Vdc 4995D12G09
MAM, HMAM,
MAMH
120 Vac 5672D69G11
120 Vac —
240 Vac 5672D69G13
480 Vac 5672D69G14
NBM, HNBM,
NBMH
120 Vac 4995D11G11
120 Vac 1229C35G03
240 Vac 4995D11G13
480 Vac 4995D11G14
Left-Hand Mounting
KAM, HKAM 120 Vac 4995D10G01
120 Vac 1228C76G03
240 Vac 4995D10G03
480 Vac 4995D10G04
Shunt Trips
For tripping breaker from a
remote point. A solenoid
device mounts within breaker
case. Breaker trips when coil
is energized. A cutoff switch
breaks the circuit to the
momentary rated coil when
breaker opens. Available for
control voltages up to 250
Vdc or 600 Vac. Voltage and
frequency must be specified.
Standard leads extend 18.00
inches (457.2 mm) outside of
breaker. Longer leads may
be specified.
Notes
Electrical reset UVR.
Auto reset type.
Breaker
Type
Volts
(50–60 Hz)
Style
Numbers
Right-Hand Mounting
KAM, HKAM 480 Vac 2605D15G16
240 Vac 2605D15G17
120 Vac 2605D15G19
LAM, HLAM 480 Vac 2606D56G16
240 Vac 2606D56G17
120 Vac 2606D56G19
48 Vdc 2606D56G07
MAM, HMAM,
MAMH
480 Vac 2606D57G16
240 Vac 2606D57G17
120 Vac 2606D57G19
NBM, HNBM,
NBMH
480 Vac 2606D58G16
240 Vac 2606D58G17
120 Vac 2606D58G19
Left-Hand Mounting
KAM, HKAM 480 Vac 2605D15G02
240 Vac 2605D15G03
120 Vac 2605D15G05
LAM, HLAM 480 Vac 2606D56G02
240 Vac 2606D56G03
120 Vac 2606D56G05
MAM, HMAM,
MAMH
480 Vac 2606D57G02
240 Vac 2606D57G03
120 Vac 2606D57G05
NBM, HNBM,
NBMH
480 Vac 2606D58G02
240 Vac 2606D58G03
120 Vac 2606D58G05
CMCB 2011.fm Page 230 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 231
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-10
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
Reference Information
E2 Cross-Reference
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
1491D72G31 E2J3070T
1491D72G32 E2J3090T
1491D72G33 E2J3100T
1491D72G37 E2J3200T
6622C87G27 E2K3225AWU66
6622C87G28 E2K3225DWU66
6622C87G32 E2K3400GWU66
E2KM3100 E2KEM3100W
E2KM3100U66 E2KEM3100WU66
E2KM3125 E2KEM3125W
E2KM3125U66 E2KEM3125WU66
E2KM3150 E2KEM3150W
E2KM3150MU66 E2KEM3150WU66
E2KM3150TM E2KEM3150MW
E2KM3150U66 E2KEM3150MWU66
E2KM3200 E2KEM3200W
E2KM3200U66 E2KEM3200WU66
E2KM3225 E2KEM3225W
E2KM3225F E2KM3400F
E2KM3225FUV E2KM3400F
E2KM3225MU66 E2KEM3225MWU66
E2KM3225TM E2KEM3225TM
E2KM3225U66 E2KEM3225WU66
E2LM3300U66 E2LEM3300WU66
E2LM3350U66 E2LEM3350WU66
E2LM34002U66 E2LEM34002WU66
E2LM3400F E2LM3600F
E2LM3400FUV E2LM3600F
E2LM3400M2U66 E2LEM3400M2WU66
E2LM3400MU66 E2LEM3400MWU66
E2LM3400U66 E2LEM3400WU66
FDBM3015 E2F3015
FDBM3015WU62 E2F3015WU62
FDBM3020 E2F3020
FDBM3025 E2F3025
FDBM3025U62 E2F3025U62
FDBM3030 E2F3030
FDBM3030U62 E2F3030WU62
FDBM3030WU62 E2F3030WU62
FDBM3035 E2F3035
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
FDBM3040 E2F3040
FDBM3045 E2F3045
FDBM3050 E2F3050
FDBM3050U62 E2F3050U62
FDBM3050WU62 E2F3050WU62
FDBM3060 E2F3060
FDBM3070 E2F3070
FDBM3070WU62 E2F3070WU62
FDBM3080 E2F3080
FDBM3090 E2F3090
FDBM3100 E2F3100
FDBM3100LM04U62 E2F3100M04U62
FDBM3125 E2F3125
FDBM3150 E2F3150
FDBM3150L E2F3150L
FDM3015 E2F3015
FDM3015L E2F3015L
FDM3015LU62 E2F3015LU62
FDM3020 E2F3020
FDM3020LU62 E2F3020LU62
FDM3025 E2F3025
FDM3025L E2F3025L
FDM3025LS22 E2F3025LS22
FDM3025LU62 E2F3025LU62
FDM3030 E2F3030
FDM3030LS22 E2F3030LS22
FDM3040 E2F3040
FDM3040L E2F3040L
FDM3040LU62 E2F3040LU62
FDM3050 E2F3050
FDM3050LU62 E2F3050LU62
FDM3050U62 E2F3050U62
FDM3060 E2F3060
FDM3060LU62 E2F3060LU62
FDM3070 E2F3070
FDM3070A02U62 E2F3070A02U62
FDM3080 E2F3080
FDM3090 E2F3090
FDM3100 E2F3100
FDM3100LS22 E2F3100LS22
CMCB 2011.fm Page 231 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
232 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-11
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
FDM3100LU62 E2FLU62
FDM3125 E2F3125
FDM3125LU62 E2F3125LU62
FDM3150 E2F3150
HFDM003AM E2F003AM
HFDM003AMLU62 E2F003AMLU62
HFDM007CM E2F007CM
HFDM007CMU62 E2F007CMU62
HFDM015EM E2F015EM
HFDM015EMA02 E2F015EMA02
HFDM015EMLU62 E2F015EMLU62
HFDM015EMU62 E2F015EMU62
HFDM030HM E2F030HM
HFDM030HMLU62 E2F030HMLU62
HFDM030HMU62 E2F030HMU62
HFDM050KM E2F050KM
HFDM050KML E2F050KML
HFDM050KMLU62 E2F050KMLU62
HFDM050KMU62 E2F050KMU62
HFDM070MM E2F070MM
HFDM070MMU62 E2F070MMU62
HFDM1001M E2F1001M
HFDM1001MS22 E2F1001MS22
HFDM100LM E2F100LM
HFDM100LMA02 E2F100LMA02
HFDM100LMU62 E2F100LMU62
HFDM 100RM E2F100RM
HFDM100RML E2F100RML
HFDM100RMS22 E2F100RMS22
HFDM100RMU62 E2F100RMU62
HFDM150TM E2F150TM
HFDM150TML E2F150TML
HFDM150TMU62 E2F150TMU62
HFDM150UM E2F150UM
JCDA2D1S30 E2JM250MDA2D1S30
JCMA2D1S30 E2JM250MFA2D1S30
JDCM3070W E2JM3070W
JDCM3090W E2JM3090W
JDCM3100W E2JM3100W
JDCM3125W E2JM3125W
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
JDCM3150W E2JM3150W
JDCM3175W E2JM3175W
JDCM3200W E2JM3200W
JDCM3225A5W E2JM3225AW
JDCM3225D5W E2JM3225DW
JDCM3225W E2JM3225W
JDCM3250A5MW E2JM3250MAW
JDCM3250A5MWU18 E2JM3250MAWU18
JDCM3250A5W E2JM3250AW
JDCM3250C5MW E2JM3250MCW
JDCM3250D5MW E2JM3250MDW
JDCM3250D5MWA06 E2JM3250MDWA06
JDCM3250D5W E2JM3250DW
JDCM3250D5WS10 E2JM3250DWS10
JDCM3250F E2JM3250F
JDCM3250F5MD01 E2JM3250MFD01
JDCM3250F5MW E2JM3250MFW
JDCM3250G5MW E2JM3250MGW
JDCM3250G5WA02D01 E2JM3250MGA02D01
JDCM3250J5MW E2JM3250MJW
JDCM3250J5MWA02 E2JM3250MJA02
JDCM3250J5WA02D01 E2JM3250MJA02D01
JDCM3250J5WD01 E2JM3250MJD01
JDCM3250K5MW E2JM3250MKW
JDCM3250L5MW E2JM3250MLW
JDCM3250MW E2JM3250MW
JDCM3250W E2JM3250W
JDCMAA2D1 E2JM3250MM02D01
JDCMDD1S30 E2JM3250MDS30D01
JDCMFD01 E2JM3250MFD01
JDCMGA02D1 E2JM3250MGA02D01
JDCMJA2D1 E2JM3250MJA02D01
JDCMJD01 E2JM3250MJD01
JDM2250F E2JM3250F
JDM3070W E2J3070W
JDM3090W E2J3090W
JDM3100W E2J3100W
JDM3125W E2J3125W
JDM3150W E2J3150W
JDM3150WU18 E2J3150WU18
CMCB 2011.fm Page 232 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 233
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-12
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
JDM3175W E2J3175W
JDM3200W E2J3200W
JDM3200WA06 E2J3200WA06
JDM3225A5W E2J3225AW
JDM3225D5W E2J3225DW
JDM3225W E2J3225W
JDM3250A5MW E2J3250MAW
JDM3250A5W E2J3250AW
JDM3250C5MW E2J3250CW
JDM3250D5MW E2J3250MDW
JDM3250D5W E2J3250DW
JDM3250F E2J3250F
JDM3250F5MW E2J3250MFW
JDM3250G5MW E2J3250MGW
JDM3250J5MW E2J3250MJW
JDM3250K5MW E2J3250MKW
JDM3250L5MW E2J3250MLW
JDM3250MW E2J3250MW
JDM3250W E2J3250W
JDM3250WS10 E2J3250WS10
JM2225T1125-2250 E2J3225T
JM3070T E2J3070T
JM3090T E2J3090T
JM3100T E2J3100T
JM3125T E2J3125T
JM3150T E2J3150T
JM3175T E2J3175T
JM3200T E2J3200T
JM3225T E2J3225T
JM3225TA5 E2J3225TA
JM3225TD5 E2J3225TD
JM3250T E2J3250T
JM3250TA5 E2J3250TA
JM3250TA5M_350-700 E2J3250TMA
JM3250TC5M E2J3250TMC
JM3250TD5_500-1000 E2J3250TMD
JM3250TF5M_625-1250 E2J3250TMF
JM3250TG5M_750-1500 E2J3250TMG
JM3250TJ5M_875-1750 E2J3250TMJ
JM3250TK5M_1000-2000 E2J3250TMK
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
JM3250TL5M_1125-2250 E2J3250TML
JM3250TM E2J3250TM
KDCM3100W E2KM3100W
KDCM3125W E2KM3125W
KDCM3150W E2KM3150W
KDCM3175W E2KM3175W
KDCM3200W E2KM3200W
KDCM3225A5MW E2KM3200MAW
KDCM3225D5MW E2KM3200MDW
KDCM3225W E2KM3225W
KDCM3250W E2KM3250W
KDCM3250WU18 E2KM3250WU18
KDCM3300W E2KM3300W
KDCM3350W E2KM3350W
KDCM3400D5MA02D09H04 E2KM3400MDA02D09H04
KDCM3400D5MW E2KM3400MDW
KDCM3400D5MWA02D07 E2KM3400MDA02D07
KDCM3400D5W E2KM3400DW
KDCM3400D5WD09 E2KM3400DD09
KDCM3400F E2KM3400F
KDCM3400F5MW E2KM3400MFW
KDCM3400FD09G04 E2KM3400MFD09G04
KDCM3400G5MW E2KM3400MGD09G05
KDCM3400G5MWD09H04 E2KM3400MGD09H04
KDCM3400G5W E2KM3400MGW
KDCM3400G5WD07 E2KM3400MGD07
KDCM3400J5MA02D09 E2KM3400MJA02D09
KDCM3400J5MA2D9G4S30 E2KM3400MJA2D9G4S30
KDCM3400J5MD09 E2KM3400MJD09
KDCM3400J5MD09H04S30 E2KM3400MJD09H04S30
KDCM3400J5MW E2KM3400MJW
KDCM3400J5MWA02D07 E2KM3400MJA02D07
KDCM3400J5MWA06 E2KM3400MJWA06
KDCM3400J5MWD07S30 E2KM3400MJD07S30
KDCM3400J5WD07 E2KM3400MJD07
KDCM3400K5MW E2KM3400MKW
KDCM3400K5MWS10 E2KM3400MKWS10
KDCM3400K5MWU18 E2KM3400MKWU18
KDCM3400L5MW E2KM3400MLW
KDCM3400L5MWD09H04 E2KM3400MLD09H04
CMCB 2011.fm Page 233 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
234 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-13
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
KDCM3400L5MWS10 E2KM3400MLWS10
KDCM3400L5WD07 E2KM3400MLD07
KDCM3400MW E2KM3400MW
KDCM3400N5MW E2KM3400MNW
KDCM3400N5MWA06 E2KM3400MNWA06
KDCM3400N5WA02D07 E2KM3400MNA02D07
KDCM3400R5MW E2KM3400MRW
KDCM3400W E2KM3400W
KDCM3400W5MW E2KM3400MWW
KDCMDMD07 E2KM3400MDD07
KDCMNA2D7 E2KM3400MNA02D07
KDM2400F E2K2400F
KDM2400G5MS50 E2K2400MGWS50
KDM2400G5MW E2K2400MGW
KDM2400W5MW E2K2400MWW
KDM2400W5MWA06D07S10 E2K2400MWA06D07S10
KDM2400W5MWA06D10S10 E2K2400MWA06D10S10
KDM2400W5MWD07 E2K2400MWD07
KDM2400W5MWD07S10 E2K2400MWD07S10
KDM2400W5MWD10 E2K2400MWD10
KDM2400W5MWD10S10 E2K2400MWD10S10
KDM2400W5MWS10 E2K2400MWWS10
KDM3100W E2K3100W
KDM3125W E2K3125W
KDM3150W E2K3150W
KDM3150WA06 E2K3150WA06
KDM3175W E2K3175W
KDM3200W E2K3200W
KDM3225A5W E2K3225AW
KDM3225D5A13D09U18 E2K3225DA13D09U18
KDM3225D5MW E2K3400MDW
KDM3225D5W E2K3225DW
KDM3225F E2K3400F
KDM3225W E2K3225W
KDM3225WK37 E2KE3225W
KDM3225WK37U18 E2KE3225WU18
KDM3225WK38 E2KE3225MW
KDM3250W E2K3250W
KDM3300W E2K3300W
KDM3300WA06U18 E2K3300WA06U18
Series C Mining Superseded by E2 Mining
KDM3300WS10 E2K3300WS10
KDM3350W E2K3350W
KDM3400D5MW E2K3400MDW
KDM3400D5W E2K3400DW
KDM3400D5WU18 E2K3400DWU18
KDM3400F E2K3400F
KDM3400F5MW E2K3400MFW
KDM3400FK37A06D09D18 E2KE3400A06D09D18
KDM3400G5A06D09U18 E2K3400GA06D09U18
KDM3400G5A13D09U18 E2K3400GA13D09U18
KDM3400G5MW E2K3400MGW
KDM3400G5W E2K3400GW
KDM3400G5WA06 E2K3400GWS10
KDM3400G5WS10 E2K3400GWS10
KDM3400G5WU18 E2K3400GWU18
KDM3400J5MW E2K3400MJW
KDM3400K5MS54 E2K3400MKWS54
KDM3400K5MW E2K3400MKW
KDM3400L5MW E2K3400MLW
KDM3400MW E2K3400MW
KDM3400MWA06U18 E2K3400MWA06U18
KDM3400N5MW E2K3400MNW
KDM3400R5MW E2K3400MRW
KDM3400W E2K3400W
KDM3400W5MW E2K3400MWW
KEM3100T KEM3100T
KEM3125T KEM3125T
KEM3150T KEM3150T
KEM3150TM KEM3150TM
KEM3200T KEM3200T
KEM3225T KEM3225T
KEM3225T2 KEM3225T2
KEM3225TM KEM3225TM
KEM3225TM2 KEM3225TM2
KM2225TA5 E2K2225TA
KM2225TA5M E2K2400TMA
KM2225TD5 E2K2225TD
KM2225TD5M E2K2400TMD
KM2400TD5 E2K2400TD
KM2400TD5M E2K2400TMD
CMCB 2011.fm Page 234 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca 235
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB
CMCB-14
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Classic Mining Circuit Breakers
E2 Cross-Reference, continued
Additional Information on Mining Breakers
Series C Mining
Superseded by
E2 Mining
KM2400TG5M E2K2400TMG
KM2400TN5M E2K2400TMN
KM2400TW5M E2K2400TMW
KM3100T E2K3100T
KM3125T E2K3125T
KM3150T E2K3150T
KM3175T E2K3175T
KM3200T E2K3200T
KM3225T E2K3225T
KM3225TA5 E2K3225TA
KM3225TA5M E2K3400TMA
KM3225TD5 E2K3225TD
KM3225TD5M E2K3400TMD
KM3250T E2K3250T
KM3300T E2K3300T
KM3350T E2K3350T
KM3400T E2K3400T
KM3400TD5 E2K3400TD
KM3400TF5M E2K3400TMF
KM3400TG5M E2K3400TMG
KM3400TJ5M E2K3400TMJ
KM3400TK5M E2K3400TMK
KM3400TL5M E2K3400TML
KM3400TM E2K3400TM
KM3400TN5M E2K3400TMN
KM3400TR5M E2K3400TMR
KM3400TW5M E2K3400TMW
LDCM3600EMA05W E2LEM3600MA05W
LDCM3600F E2LM3600F
LDM3600F E2L3600F
Series C
Mining
Superseded by
E2 Mining
LEM3300T LEM3300T
LEM3350T LEM3350T
LEM3400T LEM3400T
LEM3400T2 LEM3400T2
LEM3400TM LEM3400TM
LEM3400TM2 LEM3400TM2
LEM3600T LEM3600T
LEM3600TM LEM3600TM
LM3600TL6M E2L3600TML
LM3600TN6M E2L3600TMN
LM3600TP6M E2L3600TMP
LM3600TR6M E2L3600TMR
LM3600TS6M E2L3600TM
LM3600TX6M E2L3600TMX
UVE3LP08K UVE3LP08K
UVE4LP08K UVE4LP08K
Source Description
TD01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Dimensional Data
BR01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Brochure
TC01217001E E2 Mining Circuit Breaker Time Current Curves
Series C Mining
Superseded by
E2 Mining
CMCB 2011.fm Page 235 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:23 PM
236 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
GFR-1
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Add-on Ground Fault Protection Type GFR
GFR Relay
Type GFR Ground Fault Relay
Product Description
The GFR ground fault relays, current
sensors, test panels and accessory
devices are CSA and UL listed .
➀
A Type GFR ground fault protection
system, when properly installed on a
grounded electrical system, will sense
phase-to-ground fault currents. When the
level of fault current is in excess of the
pre-selected current pickup and time
delay settings, the GFR relay will initiate
a trip action of a disconnect device,
which will open the faulted circuit and
clear the fault.
The GFR devices are CSA and UL Class I
devices designed to protect electrical
equipment against extensive damage
from arcing ground faults.
A basic Type GFR ground fault protection
system consists of a ground fault relay
➁
,
a ground fault current sensor and a
disconnect device equipped with a shunt
trip device. This disconnect device can
be a moulded case circuit breaker, a
power circuit breaker, a bolted pressure
switch or other fusible disconnect
device, suitable for application with CSA
or UL Class I Ground Fault Sensing and
Relaying equipment.
Options
Additional optional equipment can be
added to the protection system to meet
the requirements of the specifying
engineer, including:
●
Ground Fault Test Panel
●
Ground Fault Warning Indicator
Relay
●
Ground Fault Indicating Ammeter
GFR relays are available with zone
selective interlocking circuitry to interlock
several relays within the same system.
This allows the relay which detects a
ground fault to instantly clear the fault by
tripping the disconnect device. The relay
simultaneously sends a signal to relay
units “upstream” from the fault to time
delay or to block their operation
completely. Current sensors in various
designs provide a range of “window”
sizes to accommodate standard bus and
cable arrangements.
Shunt trip attachments may be ordered
for field mounting in Eaton moulded case
circuit breakers, or may be ordered
factory installed in the breaker.
Electrical Ratings
GFR Relay
Ground Fault Detection Ranges:
1 to 12, 5 to 60 or 100 to 1200
Amperes
Output contacts:
240 Volt, 50/60 Hz: 3.0Amperes
120 Volt, 50/60 Hz: 6.0Amperes
28 Volt Dc: 3.0Amperes
125 Volt Dc: 0.5Amperes
Control power requirements:
120 Volt, 50/60 Hz: 0.125 Amperes, or
125 Volt Dc (optional)
Sensor:
600 Volts, 50/60 Hz maximum
system voltage
Typical Current Sensor
These devices are listed with CSA under file number 43357 and UL under file number E48381.
Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting.
GFR 2011 Page 236 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:28 PM
Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
PG01200001K—October 2011 www.eatoncanada.ca
237
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
GFR-2
Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Add-on Ground Fault Protection Type GFR
Product Selection
Each installation requires:
1. One relay unit (select trip ampere
as required)
2. One current sensor (select
configuration required)
3. One circuit breaker or disconnect
device with shunt trip, or a shunt trip
attachment for mounting in existing
breaker.
4. Test panel. (Optional)
Instruction Leaflet Number 15321
Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting.
One end removable for installation.
When a mechanically reset relay is used with a test panel, both the relay and test panel must be reset following
either a simulated ground fault test or actual ground fault.
Not CSA and UL listed.
Accessories
Test Panel (120 Volts Ac)
➂
Used to test the ground fault system, to
give an indication the relay has tripped the
breaker, and to reset the relay after
tripping
➃
. These functions may be
separately mounted pilot devices.
Ground Fault Warning Indicator
This is an accessory item for use with
GFR Relays with interlocking circuitry. At
approximately 30-50% of the Relay pickup
setting, the indicator switches separate
120 volt Ac control power to a lamp or
relay, (not included) to give an indication
of a ground fault. The indicator is rated
110/120 volts Ac 50/60 Hz for a maximum
indicator load of .5 amperes.
Indicating Ammeter
➃
The optional indicating ammeter.
It connects to the sensor terminals,
through a momentary contact pushbutton,
and will indicate (in amperes) any ground
fault current flowing through the sensor.
Kit includes the ammeter and pushbutton.
Shunt Trip Attachments
Use 120 volt Ac shunt trips.
Face Plate
Recommended when these relays are
semi-flush mounted, to close the door
cutout opening.
Optional Test Panel
Control Test
Catalogue
Number
120V 50/60 Hz 120V 50/60 Hz
GFRTP
125V Dc 120V 50/60 Hz
GFRTPD
Ground Fault Warning
Indicator
Style
Number
Manual Reset
1234C67G01
Self-Resetting
1234C67G02
GFR System
Used with
Kit Style
Number
1-12 Ampere
5-60 Ampere
100-1200 Ampere
752B820G01
752B820G02
752B820G03
Description Style Number
Face Plate
752B410G01
GFR Relay
GFR Relay
Types
Catalogue Numbers
➀
Ground Fault Pickup Amperes
1-12 5-60 100-1200
For 120 Volt 50/60 Hz Control
Electrical Reset with Zone Interlocking
GFR12EI GFR60EI GFR1200EI
Electrical Reset without Zone Interlocking
GFR12E GFR60E GFR1200E
Mechanical Reset with Zone Interlocking
GFR12MI GFR60MI GFR1200MI
Mechanical Reset without Zone Interlocking
GFR12M GFR60M GFR1200M
For 120 Volt Dc Control
Electrical Reset with Zone Interlocking
- - GFR1200EID
Electrical Reset without Zone Interlocking
- - GFR1200ED
Mechanical Reset with Zone Interlocking
- - GFR1200MID
Mechanical Reset without Zone Interlocking
- - GFR1200MD
Current Sensor
Window Size Style Number
Used with Relays Rated 1-12 Amperes
5.50 In. I.D.
1283C45G01
Used with Relays Rated 5-60 Amperes
2.50 In. I.D.
5.50 In. I.D.
7.81 x11.00 In.Rect.
➁
3.31 x24.94 In.Rect.
➁
179C768G01
1256C13G01
1257C88G04
1257C92G03
Used with Relays Rated 100-1200 Amperes
2.50 In. I.D.
5.50 In. I.D.
8.25 In. I.D.
7.81 x11.00 In.Rect.
➁
9.94 x16.94 In.Rect.
➁
9.94 x23.94 In.Rect.
➁
15.94 x19.94 In.Rect.
➁
3.31 x24.94 In.Rect.
➁
6.75 x29.64 In.Rect.
➁
179C768G02
1256C13G02
179C767G02
1257C88G03
1257C90G02
1257C91G02
1257C89G02
1257C92G04
1255C39G03
GFR 2011 Page 237 Wednesday, September 21, 2011 11:28 PM
Product Guide 2011
Series C and
Special Application
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
© 2011 Eaton Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Canada
Pub No. PG01200001K
October 2011
Eaton is a registered trademark
of Eaton Corporation.
All trademarks are property of their
respective owners.
Product Guide 2011 Series C and Special Application Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Eaton is dedicated to ensuring that reliable, efficient and safe
power is available when it’s needed most. With unparalleled
knowledge of electrical power management across industries,
experts at Eaton deliver customized, integrated solutions to solve
our customers’ most critical challenges.
Our focus is on delivering the right solution for the application.
But, decision makers demand more than just innovative products.
They turn to Eaton for an unwavering commitment to personal
support that makes customer success a top priority.
For more information, visit www.eaton.com.
Eaton Corporation
1111 Superior Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44114
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
Canadian Operations
5050 Mainway
Burlington, ON L7L 5Z1
Canada
1-800-268-3578
EatonCanada.ca
MCCB 2011 Cover Spread.indd 1 9/20/11 10:38:17 PM
